Table of Contents

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549

 

 

FORM 10-K

(Mark One):

 

x ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year ended January 31, 2016.

OR

 

¨ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the transition period from                      to                     

Commission file number 001-14077

WILLIAMS-SONOMA, INC.

(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

 

Delaware   94-2203880

(State or other jurisdiction of

incorporation or organization)

 

(I.R.S. Employer

Identification No.)

3250 Van Ness Avenue, San Francisco, CA   94109
(Address of principal executive offices)   (Zip Code)

Registrant’s telephone number, including area code: (415) 421-7900

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

 

Common Stock, $.01 par value   New York Stock Exchange, Inc.
(Title of class)   (Name of each exchange on which registered)

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.  Yes   x     No   ¨

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act.  Yes   ¨     No   x

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.   Yes   x     No   ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).  Yes   x     No   ¨

Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K (§229.405 of this chapter) is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of registrant’s knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K.   x

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer or a smaller reporting company. See definitions of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer” and “smaller reporting company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

Large accelerated filer   x     Accelerated filer   ¨     Non-accelerated filer   ¨     (Do not check if a smaller

reporting company) Smaller reporting company   ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Act).  Yes   ¨     No   x

As of August 2, 2015, the approximate aggregate market value of the registrant’s common stock held by non-affiliates was $7,577,638,000. It is assumed for purposes of this computation that an affiliate includes all persons as of August 2, 2015 listed as executive officers and directors with the Securities and Exchange Commission. This aggregate market value includes all shares held in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund within the registrant’s 401(k) Plan.

As of March 27, 2016, 89,158,790 shares of the registrant’s common stock were outstanding.


Table of Contents

DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE

Portions of our definitive Proxy Statement for the 2016 Annual Meeting of Stockholders, also referred to in this Annual Report on Form 10-K as our Proxy Statement, which will be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, or SEC, have been incorporated in Part III hereof.

FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

This Annual Report on Form 10-K and the letters to stockholders contained in this Annual Report contain forward-looking statements within the “safe harbor” provisions of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995 that involve risks and uncertainties, as well as assumptions that, if they do not fully materialize or prove incorrect, could cause our business and operating results to differ materially from those expressed or implied by such forward-looking statements. Such forward-looking statements include, without limitation, statements related to: projections of earnings, revenues, growth and other financial items; the strength of our business and our brands; our strategic growth initiatives; our beliefs about our competitive position, relative performance and our ability to leverage our competitive advantages; the plans, strategies, initiatives and objectives of management for future operations; our brands, products and related initiatives, including our ability to introduce new brands, new products and product lines and bring in new customers; our belief that our e-commerce websites and direct-mail catalogs act as a cost-efficient means of testing market acceptance of new products and new brands; the complementary nature of our e-commerce and retail channels; our marketing efforts; our global business and expansion efforts, including franchise, other third party arrangements and company-owned operations; our ability to attract new customers; the seasonal variations in demand; our ability to recruit, retain and motivate skilled personnel; our belief in the reasonableness of the steps taken to protect the security and confidentiality of the information we collect; our belief in the adequacy of our facilities and the availability of suitable additional or substitute space; our belief in the ultimate resolution of current legal proceedings; the payment of dividends; our stock repurchase program; our key initiatives in product leadership, inventory, marketing and real estate; our strategies and opportunities to profitably grow our business; our plans to strengthen our competitive position; our plans to develop cross brand initiatives; our leadership position across our brands and in our supply chain; our capital allocation strategy in fiscal 2016; our planned use of cash in fiscal 2016; our compliance with financial covenants; our belief that our cash on hand and available credit facilities will provide adequate liquidity for our business operations over the next 12 months; our belief that our accumulated undistributed earnings of our foreign subsidiaries are sufficient to support our anticipated future cash needs of our foreign operations; our intentions regarding the utilization of such undistributed earnings; our belief regarding the effects of potential losses under our indemnification obligations; the impact of inflation; the effects of changes in our inventory reserves; the impact of new accounting pronouncements; and statements of belief and statements of assumptions underlying any of the foregoing. You can identify these and other forward-looking statements by the use of words such as “will,” “may,” “should,” “expects,” “plans,” “anticipates,” “believes,” “estimates,” “predicts,” “intends,” “potential,” “continue,” or the negative of such terms, or other comparable terminology.

The risks, uncertainties and assumptions referred to above that could cause our results to differ materially from the results expressed or implied by such forward-looking statements include, but are not limited to, those discussed under the heading “Risk Factors” in Item 1A hereto and the risks, uncertainties and assumptions discussed from time to time in our other public filings and public announcements. All forward-looking statements included in this document are based on information available to us as of the date hereof, and we assume no obligation to update these forward-looking statements.

 

1


Table of Contents

WILLIAMS-SONOMA, INC.

ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 10-K

FISCAL YEAR ENDED JANUARY 31, 2016

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

          PAGE  
   PART I   

Item 1.

   Business      3   

Item 1A.

   Risk Factors      6   

Item 1B.

   Unresolved Staff Comments      20   

Item 2.

   Properties      20   

Item 3.

   Legal Proceedings      21   

Item 4.

   Mine Safety Disclosures      21   
   PART II   

Item 5.

   Market for Registrant’s Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities      22   

Item 6.

   Selected Financial Data      25   

Item 7.

   Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations      26   

Item 7A.

   Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk      36   

Item 8.

   Financial Statements and Supplementary Data      37   

Item 9.

   Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure      61   

Item 9A.

   Controls and Procedures      61   

Item 9B.

   Other Information      62   
   PART III   

Item 10.

   Directors, Executive Officers and Corporate Governance      63   

Item 11.

   Executive Compensation      63   

Item 12.

   Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters      63   

Item 13.

   Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, and Director Independence      63   

Item 14.

   Principal Accountant Fees and Services      63   
   PART IV   

Item 15.

   Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules      64   

 

2


Table of Contents

PART I

 

ITEM 1. BUSINESS

OVERVIEW

Williams-Sonoma, Inc., incorporated in 1973, is a multi-channel specialty retailer of high quality products for the home.

In 1956, our founder, Chuck Williams, turned a passion for cooking and eating with friends into a small business with a big idea. He opened a store in Sonoma, California, to sell the French cookware that intrigued him while visiting Europe but that could not be found in America. Chuck’s business, which set a standard for customer service, took off and helped fuel a revolution in American cooking and entertaining that continues today.

In the decades that followed, the quality of our products, our ability to identify new opportunities in the market and our people-first approach to business have facilitated our expansion beyond the kitchen into nearly every area of the home. Additionally, by embracing new technologies and customer-engagement strategies as they emerge, we are able to continually refine our best-in-class approach to multi-channel retailing.

Today, Williams-Sonoma, Inc. is one of the United States’ largest e-commerce retailers with some of the best known and most beloved brands in home furnishings. We currently operate retail stores in the United States, Canada, Puerto Rico, Australia and the United Kingdom, and franchise our brands to third parties in a number of countries in the Middle East, the Philippines and Mexico. Our products are also available to customers through our catalogs and online worldwide.

Williams-Sonoma

From the beginning, our namesake brand, Williams-Sonoma, has been bringing people together around food. A leading specialty retailer of high-quality products for the kitchen and home, the brand seeks to provide world-class service and an engaging customer experience. Williams-Sonoma products include everything for cooking, dining and entertaining, including: cookware, tools, electrics, cutlery, tabletop and bar, outdoor, furniture and a vast library of cookbooks. The brand also includes Williams-Sonoma Home, a premium concept that offers classic home furnishings and decorative accessories, extending the Williams-Sonoma lifestyle beyond the kitchen into every room of the home.

Pottery Barn

Established in 1949 and acquired by Williams-Sonoma, Inc. in 1986, Pottery Barn is a premier multi-channel home furnishings retailer. The brand was founded on the idea that home furnishings should be exceptional in comfort, quality, style and value. Pottery Barn stores, website, and catalogs are specially designed to make shopping an enjoyable experience, with inspirational lifestyle displays dedicated to every space in the home. Pottery Barn products include furniture, bedding, bathroom accessories, rugs, curtains, lighting, tabletop, outdoor and decorative accessories.

Pottery Barn Kids

Launched in 1999, Pottery Barn Kids serves as an inspirational destination for creating childhood memories by decorating nurseries, bedrooms and play spaces. Pottery Barn Kids offers exclusive, innovative and high-quality products designed specifically for creating magical spaces where children can play, laugh, learn and grow.

West Elm

West Elm helps customers express their personal style at home. Headquartered in Brooklyn, New York, the brand opened its first store in 2003 in Brooklyn, the neighborhood it still proudly calls home. Mixing clean lines, natural materials and handcrafted collections from the U.S. and around the world, West Elm creates unique, affordable designs for modern living. From its commitment to Fair Trade Certified, local and handcrafted products to its community-driven in-store events and collaborations, to its role as part of an active community on social media, everything West Elm does is designed to make an impact.

 

3


Table of Contents

PBteen

Launched in 2003, PBteen is the first home concept to focus exclusively on the teen market. The brand offers a complete line of furniture, bedding, lighting, decorative accents and more for teen bedrooms, dorm rooms, study spaces and lounges. PBteen’s innovative products are specifically designed to help teens create a comfortable and stylish room that reflects their own individual aesthetic.

Rejuvenation

Rejuvenation, founded in 1977 with a passion for old buildings, vintage lighting and house parts and great design, was acquired by Williams-Sonoma, Inc. in 2011. With manufacturing facilities in Portland, Oregon, Rejuvenation offers a wide assortment of high-quality lighting, hardware, furniture and home décor inspired by history, designed for today and made to last for years to come.

Mark and Graham

Launched in late 2012, Mark and Graham is designed to be a premier destination for personalized gift buying. With over 100 monograms and font types to choose from, a Mark and Graham purchase is uniquely personal. The brand’s product lines include women’s and men’s accessories, small leather goods, jewelry, key item apparel, paper, entertaining and bar, home décor and seasonal items.

E-COMMERCE OPERATIONS

As of January 31, 2016, the e-commerce channel had the following merchandising strategies: Williams-Sonoma, Pottery Barn, Pottery Barn Kids, West Elm, PBteen, Williams-Sonoma Home, Rejuvenation and Mark and Graham, which sell our products through our e-commerce websites and direct-mail catalogs. We offer shipping from many of our brands to countries worldwide, while our catalogs reach customers across the U.S. and Australia. The e-commerce channel complements the retail channel by building brand awareness and acting as an effective advertising vehicle. In addition, we believe that our e-commerce websites and our direct-mail catalogs act as a cost-efficient means of testing market acceptance of new products and new brands. Leveraging these insights and our multi-channel positioning, our marketing efforts, including the use of online advertising and the circulation of catalogs, are targeted toward driving sales to all of our channels, including retail. Consistent with our published privacy policies, we send our catalogs to addresses from our proprietary customer list, as well as to addresses from lists of other mail order direct marketers, magazines and companies with which we establish a business relationship. In accordance with prevailing industry practice and our privacy policies, we may also rent our list to select mailers. Our customer mailings are continually updated to include new prospects and to eliminate non-responders.

Detailed financial information about the e-commerce channel is found in Note L to our Consolidated Financial Statements.

RETAIL STORES

As of January 31, 2016, the retail channel had the following merchandising strategies: Williams-Sonoma, Pottery Barn, Pottery Barn Kids, West Elm and Rejuvenation, operating 618 stores comprising 571 stores in 43 states, Washington, D.C., and Puerto Rico, 27 stores in Canada, 19 stores in Australia and 1 store in the United Kingdom. We also have multi-year franchise agreements with third parties that currently operate 48 franchised stores and/or e-commerce websites in a number of countries in the Middle East, the Philippines and Mexico. The retail business complements the e-commerce business by building brand awareness and attracting new customers to our brands. Our retail stores serve as billboards for our brands, which we believe inspires our customers to shop online and through our catalogs.

Detailed financial information about the retail channel is found in Note L to our Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

4


Table of Contents

SUPPLIERS

We purchase most of our merchandise from numerous foreign and domestic manufacturers and importers, the largest of which accounted for approximately 2% of our purchases during fiscal 2015. Approximately 67% of our merchandise purchases in fiscal 2015 were sourced from foreign vendors in 48 countries, predominantly in Asia and Europe. Approximately 99% of these purchases were negotiated and paid for in U.S. dollars. In addition, we manufacture merchandise, primarily upholstered furniture and lighting, at our facilities located in North Carolina, California and Oregon.

COMPETITION AND SEASONALITY

The specialty retail business is highly competitive. Our specialty retail stores, e-commerce websites and direct-mail catalogs compete with other retailers, including large department stores, discount retailers, other specialty retailers offering home-centered assortments, other e-commerce websites and other direct-mail catalogs. The substantial sales growth in the direct-to-customer industry within the last decade, particularly in e-commerce, has encouraged the entry of many new competitors and an increase in competition from established companies. In addition, we face increased competition from discount retailers who, in the past, may not have competed with us or to this degree. We compete on the basis of our brand authority, the quality of our merchandise, service to our customers, our proprietary customer list, our e-commerce websites and our marketing capabilities, as well as the location and appearance of our stores. We believe that we compare favorably with many of our current competitors with respect to some or all of these factors.

Our business is subject to substantial seasonal variations in demand. Historically, a significant portion of our net revenues and net earnings have been realized during the period from October through January, and levels of net revenues and net earnings have typically been lower during the period from February through September. We believe this is the general pattern associated with the retail industry. In preparation for and during our holiday selling season, we hire a substantial number of additional temporary employees, primarily in our retail stores, customer care centers and distribution centers, and incur significant fixed catalog production and mailing costs.

EMPLOYEES

As of January 31, 2016, we had approximately 28,100 employees, of whom approximately 11,600 were full-time. In preparation for and during our fiscal 2015 holiday selling season, we hired approximately 8,900 temporary employees primarily in our retail stores, customer care centers and distribution centers.

TRADEMARKS, COPYRIGHTS, PATENTS AND DOMAIN NAMES

We own and/or have applied to register 80 separate trademarks and service marks. We own and/or have applied to register our key brand names as trademarks in the U.S. and 92 additional jurisdictions. Exclusive rights to the trademarks and service marks are held by Williams-Sonoma, Inc. and are used by our subsidiaries and franchisees under a license. These marks include our core brand names as well as brand names for selected products and services. The core brand names in particular, including “Williams-Sonoma,” “Pottery Barn,” “pottery barn kids,” “PBteen,” “west elm,” “Williams-Sonoma Home,” “Rejuvenation” and “Mark and Graham” are of material importance to us. Trademarks are generally valid as long as they are in use and/or their registrations are properly maintained, and they have not been found to have become generic. Trademark registrations can generally be renewed indefinitely so long as the marks are in use. We also own numerous copyrights and trade dress rights for our products, product packaging, catalogs, books, house publications, website designs and store designs, among other things, which are used by our subsidiaries and franchisees under a license. We hold patents on certain product functions and product designs. Patents are generally valid for 14 to 20 years as long as their registrations are properly maintained. In addition, we have registered and maintain numerous Internet domain names, including “williams-sonoma.com,” “potterybarn.com,” “potterybarnkids.com,” “pbteen.com,” “westelm.com,” “wshome.com,” “williams-sonomainc.com,” “rejuvenation.com” and “markandgraham.com.” Collectively, the trademarks, copyrights, trade dress rights and domain names that we hold are of material importance to us.

 

5


Table of Contents

AVAILABLE INFORMATION

We file annual reports on Form 10-K, quarterly reports on Form 10-Q, current reports on Form 8-K, proxy and information statements and amendments to reports filed or furnished pursuant to Sections 13(a), 14 and 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended. The public may read and copy these materials at the SEC’s Public Reference Room at 100 F Street, N.E., Washington, D.C. 20549-0213. The public may obtain information on the operation of the Public Reference Room by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. The SEC also maintains a website at www.sec.gov that contains reports, proxy and information statements and other information regarding Williams-Sonoma, Inc. and other companies that file materials electronically with the SEC. Our annual reports, Forms 10-K, Forms 10-Q, Forms 8-K and proxy and information statements are also available, free of charge, on our website at www.williams-sonomainc.com .

 

ITEM 1A. RISK FACTORS

A description of the risks and uncertainties associated with our business is set forth below. You should carefully consider such risks and uncertainties, together with the other information contained in this report and in our other public filings. If any of such risks and uncertainties actually occurs, our business, financial condition or operating results could differ materially from the plans, projections and other forward-looking statements included in the section titled “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and elsewhere in this report and in our other public filings. In addition, if any of the following risks and uncertainties, or if any other risks and uncertainties, actually occurs, our business, financial condition or operating results could be harmed substantially, which could cause the market price of our stock to decline, perhaps significantly.

Declines in general economic conditions, and the resulting impact on consumer confidence and consumer spending, could adversely impact our results of operations.

Our financial performance is subject to declines in general economic conditions and the impact of such economic conditions on levels of consumer confidence and consumer spending. Consumer confidence and consumer spending may deteriorate significantly, and could remain depressed for an extended period of time. Consumer purchases of discretionary items, including our merchandise, generally decline during periods when disposable income is limited, unemployment rates increase or there is economic uncertainty. An uncertain economic environment could also cause our vendors to go out of business or our banks to discontinue lending to us or our vendors, or it could cause us to undergo restructurings, any of which would adversely impact our business and operating results.

We are unable to control many of the factors affecting consumer spending, and declines in consumer spending on home furnishings and kitchen products in general could reduce demand for our products.

Our business depends on consumer demand for our products and, consequently, is sensitive to a number of factors that influence consumer spending, including general economic conditions, consumer disposable income, fuel prices, recession and fears of recession, unemployment, war and fears of war, inclement weather, availability of consumer credit, consumer debt levels, conditions in the housing market, interest rates, sales tax rates and rate increases, inflation, consumer confidence in future economic conditions and political conditions, and consumer perceptions of personal well-being and security. In particular, past economic downturns have led to decreased discretionary spending, which adversely impacted our business. In addition, periods of decreased home purchases typically lead to decreased consumer spending on home products. These factors have affected, and may in the future affect, our various brands and channels differently. Adverse changes in factors affecting discretionary consumer spending have reduced and may in the future reduce consumer demand for our products, thus reducing our sales and harming our business and operating results.

If we are unable to identify and analyze factors affecting our business, anticipate changing consumer preferences and buying trends, and manage our inventory commensurate with customer demand, our sales levels and operating results may decline.

Our success depends, in large part, upon our ability to identify and analyze factors affecting our business and to anticipate and respond in a timely manner to changing merchandise trends and customer demands in order to

 

6


Table of Contents

maintain and attract customers. For example, in the specialty home products business, style and color trends are constantly evolving. Consumer preferences cannot be predicted with certainty and may change between selling seasons. Changes in customer preferences and buying trends may also affect our brands differently. We must be able to stay current with preferences and trends in our brands and address the customer tastes for each of our target customer demographics. We must also be able to identify and adjust the customer offerings in our brands to cater to customer demands. For example, a change in customer preferences for children’s room furnishings may not correlate to a similar change in buying trends for other home furnishings. If we misjudge either the market for our merchandise or our customers’ purchasing habits, our sales may decline significantly or may be delayed while we work to fill backorders. We may be required to mark down certain products to sell any excess inventory or to sell such inventory through our outlet stores or other liquidation channels at prices which are significantly lower than our retail prices, any of which would negatively impact our business and operating results.

In addition, we must manage our inventory effectively and commensurate with customer demand. Much of our inventory is sourced from vendors located outside of the United States. Thus, we usually must order merchandise, and enter into contracts for the purchase and manufacture of such merchandise, up to twelve months and generally multiple seasons in advance of the applicable selling season and frequently before trends are known. The extended lead times for many of our purchases may make it difficult for us to respond rapidly to new or changing trends. Our vendors also may not have the capacity to handle our demands or may go out of business in times of economic crisis. In addition, the seasonal nature of the specialty home products business requires us to carry a significant amount of inventory prior to peak selling season. As a result, we are vulnerable to demand and pricing shifts and to misjudgments in the selection and timing of merchandise purchases. If we do not accurately predict our customers’ preferences and acceptance levels of our products, our inventory levels will not be appropriate, and our business and operating results may be negatively impacted.

We may be exposed to cybersecurity risks and costs associated with credit card fraud and identity theft that could cause us to incur unexpected expenses and loss of revenue.

A significant portion of our customer orders are placed through our e-commerce websites or through our customer care centers. In addition, a significant portion of sales made through our retail channel require the collection of certain customer data, such as credit card information. In order for our sales channels to function successfully, we and other parties involved in processing customer transactions must be able to transmit confidential information, including credit card information and other personal information on our customers, securely over public and private networks. Third parties may have or develop the technology or knowledge to breach, disable, disrupt or interfere with our systems or processes or those of our vendors. Although we take the security of our systems and the privacy of our customers’ confidential information seriously, and we believe we take reasonable steps to protect the security and confidentiality of the information we collect, we cannot guarantee that our security measures will effectively prevent others from obtaining unauthorized access to our information and our customers’ information. The techniques used to obtain unauthorized access to systems change frequently and are not often recognized until after they have been launched. Any person who circumvents our security measures could destroy or steal valuable information or disrupt our operations. Any security breach could cause consumers to lose confidence in the security of our information systems, including our e-commerce websites or stores, and choose not to purchase from us. Any security breach could also expose us to risks of data loss, litigation, regulatory investigations and other significant liabilities. Such a breach could also seriously disrupt, slow or hinder our operations and harm our reputation and customer relationships, any of which could harm our business.

In addition, states and the federal government are increasingly enacting laws and regulations to protect consumers against identity theft. As our business expands globally, we are subject to data privacy and other similar laws in various foreign jurisdictions, such as the European Union. If we are the target of a cybersecurity attack resulting in unauthorized disclosure of our customer data, we may be required to undertake costly notification procedures. In addition, compliance with these laws will likely increase the costs of doing business. If we fail to implement appropriate safeguards, to detect and provide prompt notice of unauthorized access as required by some of these laws, or otherwise comply with these laws, we could be subject to potential fines,

 

7


Table of Contents

claims for damages and other remedies, which could be significantly in excess of our insurance coverage and could harm our business.

If we are unable to effectively manage our e-commerce business and digital marketing efforts, our reputation and operating results may be harmed.

Our e-commerce channel has been our fastest growing business over the last several years and represents more than half of our sales and profits. The success of our e-commerce business depends, in part, on third parties and factors over which we have limited control. We must continually respond to changing consumer preferences and buying trends relating to e-commerce usage. Our success in e-commerce has been strengthened in part by our ability to leverage the information we have on our customers to infer customer interests and affinities such that we can personalize the experience they have with us. We also utilize interest-based advertising to target internet users whose behavior indicates they might be interested in our products. Current or future legislation may reduce or restrict our ability to use these certain techniques, which could reduce the effectiveness of our marketing efforts.

We are also vulnerable to certain additional risks and uncertainties associated with our e-commerce websites and digital marketing efforts, including: changes in required technology interfaces; website downtime and other technical failures; internet connectivity issues; costs and technical issues as we upgrade our website software; computer viruses; vendor reliability; changes in applicable federal and state regulations; security breaches; and consumer privacy concerns. In addition, we must keep up to date with competitive technology trends, including the use of new or improved technology, evolving creative user interfaces and other e-commerce marketing trends such as paid search, re-targeting, and the proliferation of mobile usage, among others, which may increase our costs and which may not succeed in increasing sales or attracting customers. Our failure to successfully respond to these risks and uncertainties might adversely affect the sales or margin in our e-commerce business, as well as damage our reputation and brands.

Our dependence on foreign vendors and our increased global operations subject us to a variety of risks and uncertainties that could impact our operations and financial results.

Approximately 67% of our merchandise purchases in fiscal 2015 were sourced from foreign venders in 48 countries, predominantly in Asia and Europe. Our dependence on foreign vendors means that we may be affected by changes in the value of the U.S. dollar relative to other foreign currencies. For example, any upward valuation in the Chinese yuan, the euro, or any other foreign currency against the U.S. dollar may result in higher costs to us for those goods. Although approximately 99% of our foreign purchases of merchandise are negotiated and paid for in U.S. dollars, declines in foreign currencies and currency exchange rates might negatively affect the profitability and business prospects of one or more of our foreign vendors. This, in turn, might cause such foreign vendors to demand higher prices for merchandise in their effort to offset any lost profits associated with any currency devaluation, delay merchandise shipments to us, or discontinue selling to us, any of which could ultimately reduce our sales or increase our costs. In addition, the rising cost of labor in the countries in which our foreign vendors operate has resulted in increases in our costs of doing business. Any further increases in the cost of living in such countries may result in additional increases in our costs or in our foreign vendors going out of business.

We, and our foreign vendors, are also subject to other risks and uncertainties associated with changing economic and political conditions outside of the United States. These risks and uncertainties include import duties and quotas, compliance with anti-dumping regulations, work stoppages, economic uncertainties and adverse economic conditions (including inflation and recession), foreign government regulations, employment and labor matters, wars and fears of war, political unrest, natural disasters, public health issues, regulations to address climate change and other trade restrictions. We cannot predict whether any of the countries from which our raw materials or products are sourced, or in which our products are currently manufactured or may be manufactured in the future, will be subject to trade restrictions imposed by the U.S. or foreign governments or the likelihood, type or effect of any such restrictions. Any event causing a disruption or delay of imports from foreign vendors, including labor disputes resulting in work disruption (such as the disruptions at the west coast ports in early 2015), the imposition of additional import restrictions, restrictions on the transfer of funds and/or increased

 

8


Table of Contents

tariffs or quotas, or both, could increase the cost, reduce the supply of merchandise available to us, or result in excess inventory if merchandise is received after the planned or appropriate selling season, all of which could adversely affect our business, financial condition and operating results. Furthermore, some or all of our foreign vendors’ operations may be adversely affected by political and financial instability resulting in the disruption of trade from exporting countries, restrictions on the transfer of funds and/or other trade disruptions. In addition, an economic downturn, or failure of foreign markets, may result in financial instabilities for our foreign vendors, which may cause our foreign vendors to decrease production, discontinue selling to us, or cease operations altogether. Our global operations in Asia, Australia and Europe could also be affected by changing economic and political conditions in foreign countries, either of which could have a negative effect on our business, financial condition and operating results.

Although we continue to be focused on improving our global compliance program, there remains a risk that one or more of our foreign vendors will not adhere to our global compliance standards, such as fair labor standards and the prohibition on child labor. Non-governmental organizations might attempt to create an unfavorable impression of our sourcing practices or the practices of some of our foreign vendors that could harm our image. If either of these events occurs, we could lose customer goodwill and favorable brand recognition, which could negatively affect our business and operating results.

We depend on foreign vendors and third party agents for timely and effective sourcing of our merchandise, and we may not be able to acquire products in sufficient quantities and at acceptable prices to meet our needs, which would impact our operations and financial results.

Our performance depends, in part, on our ability to purchase our merchandise in sufficient quantities at competitive prices. We purchase our merchandise from numerous foreign and domestic manufacturers and importers. We have no contractual assurances of continued supply, pricing or access to new products, and any vendor could change the terms upon which it sells to us, discontinue selling to us, or go out of business at any time. We may not be able to acquire desired merchandise in sufficient quantities on terms acceptable to us. Better than expected sales demand may also lead to customer backorders and lower in-stock positions of our merchandise, which could negatively affect our business and operating results. In addition, our vendors may have difficulty adjusting to our changing demands and growing business.

Any inability to acquire suitable merchandise on acceptable terms or the loss of one or more of our foreign vendors or third party agents could have a negative effect on our business and operating results because we would be missing products that we felt were important to our assortment, unless and until alternative supply arrangements are secured. We may not be able to develop relationships with new third party agents or vendors, and products from alternative sources, if any, may be of a lesser quality and/or more expensive than those we currently purchase.

In addition, we are subject to certain risks that could limit our vendors’ ability to provide us with quality merchandise on a timely basis and at prices that are commercially acceptable, including risks related to the availability of raw materials, labor disputes, work disruptions or stoppages, union organizing activities, vendor financial liquidity, inclement weather, natural disasters, public health issues, general economic and political conditions and regulations to address climate change.

If our vendors fail to adhere to our quality control standards, we may delay a product launch or recall a product, which could damage our reputation and negatively affect our operations and financial results.

Our vendors might not adhere to our quality control standards, and we might not identify the deficiency before merchandise ships to our stores or customers. Our vendors’ failure to manufacture or import quality merchandise in a timely and effective manner could damage our reputation and brands, and could lead to an increase in customer complaints and litigation against us and an increase in our routine insurance and litigation costs. Further, any merchandise that we receive, even if it meets our quality standards, could become subject to a recall, which could damage our reputation and brands, and harm our business. Additionally, changes to the legislative or regulatory framework regarding product safety or quality may subject companies like ours to more product recalls and result in higher recall-related expenses. Any recalls or other safety issues could harm our brands’ images and negatively affect our business and operating results.

 

9


Table of Contents

Our efforts to expand globally may not be successful and could negatively impact the value of our brands.

We are currently growing our business and increasing our global presence by opening new stores outside of the United States, expanding our franchise operations, and offering shipping globally through third party vendors. In fiscal 2013 we opened our first company-owned retail stores and launched e-commerce sites outside of North America as part of our overall global expansion strategy. While our global expansion to date has been a small part of our business, we plan to continue to increase the number of stores we open both directly and through our franchise arrangements. We have limited experience with global sales, understanding consumer preferences and anticipating buying trends in different countries, and marketing to customers overseas. Moreover, global awareness of our brands and our products may not be high. Consequently, we may not be able to successfully compete with established brands in these markets and our global sales may not result in the revenues we anticipate. Also, our products may not be accepted, either due to foreign legal requirements or due to different consumer tastes and trends. If our global growth initiatives are not successful, or if we or any of our third party vendors fail to comply with any applicable regulations or laws, the value of our brands may be harmed and our future opportunities for global growth may be negatively affected. Further, the administration of our global expansion may divert management attention and require more resources than we expect. In addition, we are exposed to foreign currency exchange rate risk with respect to our operations denominated in currencies other than the U.S. dollar. Our retail stores in Canada, Australia and the United Kingdom, and our operations throughout Asia and Europe expose us to market risk associated with foreign currency exchange rate fluctuations. Although we use instruments to hedge certain foreign currency risks, such hedges may not succeed in offsetting all of the impact of foreign currency rate volatility and generally only delay such impact on our business and financial results. Further, because we do not hedge against all of our foreign currency exposure our business will continue to be susceptible to foreign currency fluctuations. Our ultimate realized loss or gain with respect to currency fluctuations will generally depend on the size and type of the transactions that we enter into, the currency exchange rates associated with these exposures, changes in those rates and whether we have entered into foreign currency hedge contracts to offset these exposures. All of these factors could materially impact our results of operations, financial position and cash flows.

We have franchise agreements with unaffiliated franchisees to operate stores and/or e-commerce websites in the Middle East, the Philippines, and Mexico. Under these agreements, our franchisees operate stores and/or e-commerce websites that sell goods purchased from us under our brand names. We continue to expand our franchise operations with our existing franchisees as well as seek out and identify new select franchise partnerships for select countries. The effect of these franchise arrangements on our business and results of operations is uncertain and will depend upon various factors, including the demand for our products in new global markets. In addition, certain aspects of our franchise arrangements are not directly within our control, such as the ability of each franchisee to meet its projections regarding store openings and sales. Moreover, while the agreements we have entered into may provide us with certain termination rights, to the extent that our franchisees do not operate their stores in a manner consistent with our requirements regarding our brand identities and customer experience standards, the value of our brands could be impaired. In addition, in connection with these franchise arrangements, we have and will continue to implement certain new processes that may subject us to additional regulations and laws, such as U.S. export regulations. Failure to comply with any applicable regulations or laws could have an adverse effect on our results of operations.

We have limited experience operating on a global basis and our failure to effectively manage the risks and challenges inherent in a global business could adversely affect our business, operating results and financial condition and growth prospects.

We operate several retail businesses, subsidiaries and branch offices throughout Asia, Australia and Europe, which includes managing overseas employees, and may expand these overseas operations in the future. We have limited experience operating overseas subsidiaries and managing non-U.S. employees and, as a result, may encounter cultural challenges with local practices and customs that may result in harm to our reputation and the value of our brands. Our global presence exposes us to the laws and regulations of these jurisdictions, including those related to marketing, privacy, data protection, employment, and product safety and testing. We may be unable to keep current with government requirements as they change from time to time. Our failure to comply

 

10


Table of Contents

with such laws and regulations may harm our reputation, adversely affect our future opportunities for growth and expansion in these countries, and harm our business and operating results.

Moreover, our global operations subject us to a variety of risks and challenges, including:

 

    increased management, infrastructure and legal compliance costs, including the cost of real estate and labor in those markets;
    increased financial accounting and reporting requirements and complexities;
    increased operational complexities, including managing our inventory globally;
    the diversion of management attention away from our core business;
    general economic conditions, changes in diplomatic and trade relationships and political and social instability in each country or region;
    economic uncertainty around the world;
    compliance with foreign laws and regulations and the risks and costs of non-compliance with such laws and regulations;
    compliance with U.S. laws and regulations for foreign operations;
    dependence on certain third parties, including vendors and other service providers, with whom we do not have extensive experience;
    fluctuations in foreign currency exchange rates and the related effect on our financial results, and the use of foreign exchange hedging programs to mitigate such risks;
    growing cash balances in foreign jurisdictions which may be subject to repatriation restrictions;
    reduced or varied protection for intellectual property rights in some countries and practical difficulties of enforcing such rights abroad; and
    compliance with the laws of foreign taxing jurisdictions and the overlapping of different tax regimes.

Any of these risks could adversely affect our global operations, reduce our revenues or increase our operating costs, which in turn could adversely affect our business, operating results, financial condition and growth prospects. Some of our vendors and our franchisees also have global operations and are subject to the risks described above. Even if we are able to successfully manage the risks of our global operations, our business may be adversely affected if our vendors and franchisees are not able to successfully manage these risks.

In addition, as we continue to expand our global operations, we are subject to certain U.S. laws, including the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act, in addition to the laws of the foreign countries in which we operate. We must ensure that our employees and third party agents comply with these laws. If any of our overseas operations, or our employees or third party agents, violates such laws, we could become subject to sanctions or other penalties that could negatively affect our reputation, business and operating results.

A number of factors that affect our ability to successfully open new stores or close existing stores are beyond our control, and these factors may harm our ability to expand or contract our retail operations and harm our ability to increase our sales and profits.

Approximately 50% of our net revenues are generated by our retail stores. Our ability to open additional stores or close existing stores successfully will depend upon a number of factors, including:

 

    general economic conditions;
    our identification of, and the availability of, suitable store locations;
    our success in negotiating new leases and amending or terminating existing leases on acceptable terms;
    the success of other retail stores in and around our retail locations;
    our ability to secure required governmental permits and approvals;
    our hiring and training of skilled store operating personnel, especially management;
    the availability of financing on acceptable terms, if at all; and
    the financial stability of our landlords and potential landlords.

Many of these factors are beyond our control. For example, for the purpose of identifying suitable store locations, we rely, in part, on demographic surveys regarding the location of consumers in our target market segments. While we believe that the surveys and other relevant information are helpful indicators of suitable store locations, we recognize that these information sources cannot predict future consumer preferences and buying trends with

 

11


Table of Contents

complete accuracy. In addition, changes in demographics, in consumer shopping patterns, such as a reduction in mall traffic, in the types of merchandise that we sell and in the pricing of our products, may reduce the number of suitable store locations or cause formerly suitable locations to become less desirable. Further, time frames for lease negotiations and store development vary from location to location and can be subject to unforeseen delays or unexpected cancellations. We may not be able to open new stores or, if opened, operate those stores profitably. Construction and other delays in store openings could have a negative impact on our business and operating results. Additionally, we may not be able to renegotiate the terms of our current leases or close our underperforming stores on terms favorable to us, any of which could negatively impact our operating results.

Our sales may be negatively impacted by increasing competition from companies with brands or products similar to ours.

The specialty e-commerce and retail businesses are highly competitive. We compete with other retailers that market lines of merchandise similar to ours. We compete with national, regional and local businesses that utilize a similar retail store strategy, as well as traditional furniture stores, department stores and specialty stores. The substantial sales growth in the e-commerce industry within the last decade has encouraged the entry of many new competitors, new business models, and an increase in competition from established companies, many of whom are willing to spend significant funds and/or reduce pricing in order to gain market share. In addition, the decline in the global economic environment has led to increased competition from discount retailers selling similar products at reduced prices. The competitive challenges facing us include:

 

    anticipating and quickly responding to changing consumer demands or preferences better than our competitors;
    maintaining favorable brand recognition and achieving customer perception of value;
    effectively marketing and competitively pricing our products to consumers in several diverse market segments;
    effectively managing and controlling our costs;
    effectively managing increasingly competitive promotional activity;
    effectively attracting new customers;
    developing new innovative shopping experiences, like mobile and tablet applications that effectively engage today’s digital customers;
    developing innovative, high-quality products in colors and styles that appeal to consumers of varying age groups, tastes and regions, and in ways that favorably distinguish us from our competitors; and
    effectively managing our supply chain and distribution strategies in order to provide our products to our consumers on a timely basis and minimize returns, replacements and damaged products.

In light of the many competitive challenges facing us, we may not be able to compete successfully. Increased competition could reduce our sales and harm our operating results and business.

Our business and operating results may be harmed if we are unable to timely and effectively deliver merchandise to our stores and customers.

If we are unable to effectively manage our inventory levels and responsiveness of our supply chain, including predicting the appropriate levels and type of inventory to stock within each of our distribution centers, our business and operating results may be harmed. We continue to insource furniture delivery hubs in certain geographies and continue with the regionalization of our retail and e-commerce fulfillment capabilities. We are subject to risks that may disrupt our supply chain operations or regionalization efforts, such as increasing labor costs, union organizing activity, and our ability to effectively locate real estate for our distribution centers or other supply chain operations.

Further, we cannot control all of the various factors that might affect our e-commerce fulfillment rates and timely and effective merchandise delivery to our stores. We rely upon third party carriers for our merchandise shipments and reliable data regarding the timing of those shipments, including shipments to our customers and to and from our stores. In addition, we are heavily dependent upon two carriers for the delivery of our merchandise to our customers. As a result of our dependence on all of these third party providers, we are subject to risks, including

 

12


Table of Contents

labor disputes (such as the disruptions at the west coast ports in early 2015), union organizing activity, inclement weather, natural disasters, the closure of such carriers’ offices or a reduction in operational hours due to an economic slowdown, possible acts of terrorism affecting such carriers’ ability to provide delivery services to meet our shipping needs, disruptions or increased fuel costs, and costs associated with any regulations to address climate change. Failure to deliver merchandise in a timely and effective manner could damage our reputation and brands. In addition, fuel costs have been volatile and airline and other transportation companies continue to struggle to operate profitably, which could lead to increased fulfillment expenses. Any rise in fulfillment expenses could negatively affect our business and operating results.

Our failure to successfully manage our order-taking and fulfillment operations could have a negative impact on our business and operating results.

Our e-commerce business depends, in part, on our ability to maintain efficient and uninterrupted order-taking and fulfillment operations in our distribution centers, our customer care centers and on our e-commerce websites. Disruptions or slowdowns in these areas could result from disruptions in telephone or network services, power outages, inadequate system capacity, system hardware or software issues, computer viruses, security breaches, human error, changes in programming, union organizing activity, insufficient or inadequate labor to fulfill the orders, disruptions in our third party labor contracts, inefficiencies due to inventory levels and limited distribution center space, natural disasters or adverse weather conditions. Industries that are particularly seasonal, such as the home furnishings business, face a higher risk of harm from operational disruptions during peak sales seasons. These problems could result in a reduction in sales as well as increased selling, general and administrative expenses.

In addition, we face the risk that we cannot hire enough qualified employees to support our e-commerce operations, or that there will be a disruption in the workforce we hire from our third party providers, especially during our peak season. The need to operate with fewer employees could negatively impact our customer service levels and our operations.

Our facilities and systems, as well as those of our vendors, are vulnerable to natural disasters and other unexpected events, any of which could result in an interruption in our business and harm our operating results.

Our retail stores, corporate offices, distribution centers, infrastructure and e-commerce operations, as well as the operations of our vendors from which we receive goods and services, are vulnerable to damage from earthquakes, tornadoes, hurricanes, fires, floods or other volatile weather, power losses, telecommunications failures, hardware and software failures, computer viruses and similar events. If any of these events result in damage to our facilities or systems, or those of our vendors, we may experience interruptions in our business until the damage is repaired, resulting in the potential loss of customers and revenues. In addition, we may incur costs in repairing any damage beyond our applicable insurance coverage.

Our failure to successfully manage the costs and performance of our catalog mailings might have a negative impact on our business.

Catalog mailings are an important component of our business. Postal rate increases, such as the increases that went into effect in the U.S. in 2013 and 2014, affect the cost of our catalog mailings. We rely on discounts from the basic postal rate structure, which could be changed or discontinued at any time. Further, the U.S. Postal Service may raise rates in the future, which could negatively impact our business. The cost of paper, printing and catalog distribution also impacts our catalog business. We recently consolidated all of our catalog printing work with one printer. Our dependence on one vendor subjects us to various risks if the vendor fails to perform under our agreement. Paper costs have also fluctuated significantly in the past and may continue to fluctuate in the future. Also, consolidation within the paper industry has reduced the number of potential suppliers capable of meeting our paper requirements, and further consolidation could limit our ability in the future to obtain favorable terms including price, custom paper quality, paper quantity and service. Future increases in postal rates, paper costs or printing costs could have a negative impact on our operating results to the extent that we are unable to offset such increases by raising prices, implementing more efficient printing, mailing, delivery and order fulfillment systems, or through the use of alternative direct-mail formats. In addition, if the performance of our catalogs declines, if we misjudge the correlation between our catalog circulation and net sales, or if our catalog strategy overall does not continue to be successful, our results of operations could be negatively impacted.

 

13


Table of Contents

We have historically experienced fluctuations in our customers’ response to our catalogs. Customer response to our catalogs is substantially dependent on merchandise assortment, merchandise availability and creative presentation, as well as the selection of customers to whom the catalogs are mailed, changes in mailing strategies, the size of our mailings, timing of delivery of our mailings, as well as the general retail sales environment and current domestic and global economic conditions. In addition, environmental organizations and other consumer advocacy groups may attempt to create an unfavorable impression of our paper use in catalogs and our distribution of catalogs generally, which may have a negative effect on our sales and our reputation. In addition, we depend upon external vendors to print and mail our catalogs. The failure to effectively produce or distribute our catalogs could affect the timing of catalog delivery. The timing of catalog delivery has been and can be affected by postal service delays and may be impacted in the future by changes in the services provided by the post office. Any delays in the timing of catalog delivery could cause customers to forego or defer purchases, negatively impacting our business and operating results.

Declines in our comparable brand revenues may harm our operating results and cause a decline in the market price of our common stock.

Various factors affect comparable brand revenues, including the number, size and location of stores we open, close, remodel or expand in any period, the overall economic and general retail sales environment, consumer preferences and buying trends, changes in sales mix among distribution channels, our ability to efficiently source and distribute products, changes in our merchandise mix, competition (including competitive promotional activity and discount retailers), current local and global economic conditions, the timing of our releases of new merchandise and promotional events, the success of marketing programs, the cannibalization of existing store sales by our new stores, changes in catalog circulation and in our e-commerce business and fluctuations in foreign exchange rates. Among other things, weather conditions have affected, and may continue to affect, comparable brand revenues by limiting our ability to deliver our products to our stores, altering consumer behavior, or requiring us to close certain stores temporarily and thus reducing store traffic. Even if stores are not closed, many customers may decide to avoid going to stores in bad weather. These factors have caused and may continue to cause our comparable brand revenue results to differ materially from prior periods and from earnings guidance we have provided. For example, the overall economic and general retail sales environment, as well as local and global economic conditions, has caused a significant decline in our comparable brand revenue results in the past.

Our comparable brand revenues have fluctuated significantly in the past on an annual, quarterly and monthly basis, and we expect that comparable brand revenues will continue to fluctuate in the future. In addition, past comparable brand revenues are not necessarily an indication of future results and comparable brand revenues may decrease in the future. Our ability to improve our comparable brand revenue results depends, in large part, on maintaining and improving our forecasting of customer demand and buying trends, selecting effective marketing techniques, effectively driving traffic to our stores, e-commerce websites and direct-mail catalogs through marketing and various promotional events, providing an appropriate mix of merchandise for our broad and diverse customer base and using effective pricing strategies. Any failure to meet the comparable brand revenue expectations of investors and securities analysts in one or more future periods could significantly reduce the market price of our common stock.

Our failure to successfully anticipate merchandise returns might have a negative impact on our business.

We record a reserve for merchandise returns based on historical return trends together with current product sales performance in each reporting period. If actual returns are greater than those projected and reserved for by management, additional sales returns might be recorded in the future. In addition, to the extent that returned merchandise is damaged, we often do not receive full retail value from the resale or liquidation of the merchandise. Further, the introduction of new merchandise, changes in merchandise mix, changes in consumer confidence, or other competitive and general economic conditions may cause actual returns to differ from merchandise return reserves. Any significant increase in merchandise returns that exceeds our reserves could harm our business and operating results.

 

14


Table of Contents

If we are unable to successfully manage the complexities associated with a multi-channel and multi-brand business, we may suffer declines in our existing business and our ability to attract new business.

With the expansion of our e-commerce business, the development of new brands, acquired brands, and brand extensions, our overall business has become substantially more complex. The changes in our business have forced us to develop new expertise and face new challenges, risks and uncertainties. For example, we face the risk that our e-commerce business, including our catalog circulation, might cannibalize a significant portion of our retail sales. While we recognize that our e-commerce sales cannot be entirely incremental to sales through our retail channel, we seek to attract as many new customers as possible to our e-commerce websites. We continually analyze the business results of our channels and the relationships among the channels in an effort to find opportunities to build incremental sales.

If we are unable to introduce new brands and brand extensions successfully, or to reposition or close existing brands, our business and operating results may be negatively impacted.

We have in the past and may in the future introduce new brands and brand extensions, reposition brands, close existing brands, or acquire new brands, especially as we continue to expand globally. Our newest brands and brand extensions — Williams-Sonoma Home, PBteen and Mark and Graham, and any other new brands, as well as our acquired brand, Rejuvenation, or our expansion into new lines of business, including commercial furniture, may not grow as we project and plan for. The work involved with integrating new brands into our existing systems and operations could be time consuming, require significant amounts of management time and result in the diversion of substantial operational resources. Further, if we devote time and resources to new brands, acquired brands, brand extensions, brand repositioning, or new lines of business and those businesses are not as successful as we planned, then we risk damaging our overall business results or incurring impairment charges to write off any existing goodwill associated with previously acquired brands. Alternatively, if our new brands, acquired brands, brand extensions, repositioned brands or new lines of business prove to be very successful, we risk hurting our other existing brands through the potential migration of existing brand customers to the new businesses. In addition, we may not be able to introduce new brands and brand extensions, integrate newly acquired brands, reposition existing brands, develop new lines of business or expand our brands globally, in a manner that improves our overall business and operating results and may therefore be forced to close the brands or new lines of business, which may damage our reputation and negatively impact our operating results.

Fluctuations in our tax obligations and effective tax rate may result in volatility of our operating results.

We are subject to income taxes in many U.S. and certain foreign jurisdictions. Our provision for income taxes is subject to volatility and could be adversely impacted by a number of factors that require significant judgment and estimation. Although we believe our estimates are reasonable, actual results may materially differ from our estimates and adversely affect our financial condition or operating results. We record tax expense based on our estimates of future payments, which include reserves for estimates of probable settlements of foreign and domestic tax examinations. At any one time, many tax years are subject to audit by various taxing jurisdictions. The results of these audits and negotiations with taxing authorities may affect the ultimate settlement of these issues. As a result, we expect that throughout the year there could be ongoing variability in our quarterly tax rates as taxable events occur and exposures are evaluated.

In addition, our effective tax rate in a given financial statement period may be materially impacted by changes in the mix and level of earnings or losses in countries with differing statutory tax rates or by changes to existing laws or regulations.

Our inability to obtain commercial insurance at acceptable rates or our failure to adequately reserve for self-insured exposures might increase our expenses and have a negative impact on our business.

We believe that commercial insurance coverage is prudent in certain areas of our business for risk management. Insurance costs may increase substantially in the future and may be affected by natural catastrophes, fear of terrorism, financial irregularities, cybersecurity breaches and other fraud at publicly-traded companies, intervention by the government and a decrease in the number of insurance carriers. In addition, the carriers with which we hold our policies may go out of business or be otherwise unable to fulfill their contractual obligations,

 

15


Table of Contents

or may disagree with our interpretation of the coverage or the amounts owed. In addition, for certain types or levels of risk, such as risks associated with natural disasters or terrorist attacks, we may determine that we cannot obtain commercial insurance at acceptable rates, if at all. Therefore, we may choose to forego or limit our purchase of relevant commercial insurance, choosing instead to self-insure one or more types or levels of risks. We are primarily self-insured for workers’ compensation, employment practices liability, employee health benefits, and product and general liability claims, among others. If we suffer a substantial loss that is not covered by commercial insurance or our self-insurance reserves, the loss and related expenses could harm our business and operating results. In addition, exposures exist for which no insurance may be available and for which we have not reserved.

Our inability or failure to protect our intellectual property would have a negative impact on our brands, reputation and operating results.

We may not be able to adequately protect our intellectual property in the U.S. or in foreign jurisdictions, particularly as we continue to expand globally. Our trademarks, service marks, copyrights, trade dress rights, trade secrets, domain names and other intellectual property are valuable assets that are critical to our success. The unauthorized reproduction, theft or other misappropriation of our intellectual property could diminish the value of our brands or reputation and cause a decline in our sales. Protection of our intellectual property and maintenance of distinct branding are particularly important as they distinguish our products and services from our competitors. In addition, the costs of defending our intellectual property may adversely affect our operating results.

We may be subject to legal proceedings that could be time consuming, result in costly litigation, require significant amounts of management time and result in the diversion of significant operational resources.

We are involved in lawsuits, claims and proceedings incident to the ordinary course of our business. Litigation is inherently unpredictable. Any claims against us, whether meritorious or not, could be time consuming, result in costly litigation, require significant amounts of management time and result in the diversion of significant operational resources. There has been a rise in the number of lawsuits against companies like us that gather information in order to market to consumers online or through the mail and, along with other retailers, we have been named in lawsuits for gathering zip code information from our customers. We believe that we have meritorious defenses against these actions, and we will continue to vigorously defend against them. There have also been a growing number of consumer protection, e-commerce-related patent infringement lawsuits and employment-related lawsuits in recent years. From time to time, we have been subject to these types of lawsuits. The cost of defending against all these types of claims against us or the ultimate resolution of such claims, whether by settlement or adverse court decision, may harm our business and operating results. In addition, the increasingly regulated business environment may result in a greater number of enforcement actions and private litigation. This could subject us to increased exposure to stockholder lawsuits.

Our operating results may be harmed by unsuccessful management of our employment, occupancy and other operating costs, and the operation and growth of our business may be harmed if we are unable to attract qualified personnel.

To be successful, we need to manage our operating costs and continue to look for opportunities to reduce costs. We recognize that we may need to increase the number of our employees, especially during holiday selling seasons, and incur other expenses to support new brands and brand extensions and the growth of our existing brands, including the opening of new stores. Alternatively, if we are unable to make substantial adjustments to our cost structure during times of uncertainty, such as an economic downturn, we may incur unnecessary expenses or we may have inadequate resources to properly run our business, and our business and operating results may be negatively impacted. From time to time, we may also experience union organizing activity in currently non-union facilities, including in our stores and distribution centers. Union organizing activity may result in work slowdowns or stoppages and higher labor costs. In addition, there appears to be a growing number of wage-and-hour lawsuits and other employment-related lawsuits against retail companies, especially in California. State, federal and global laws and regulations regarding employment change frequently and the

 

16


Table of Contents

ultimate cost of compliance cannot be precisely estimated. Further, there have been and may continue to be increases in minimum wage and health care requirements. Any changes in regulations, the imposition of additional regulations, or the enactment of any new or more stringent legislation that impacts employment and labor, trade, or health care, could have an adverse impact on our financial condition and results of operations.

We contract with various agencies to provide us with qualified personnel for our workforce. Any negative publicity regarding these agencies, such as in connection with immigration issues or employment practices, could damage our reputation, disrupt our ability to obtain needed labor or result in financial harm to our business, including the potential loss of business-related financial incentives in the jurisdictions where we operate. Although we strive to secure long-term contracts on favorable terms with our service providers and other vendors, we may not be able to avoid unexpected operating cost increases in the future, such as those associated with minimum wage increases or enhanced health care requirements. Further, we incur substantial costs to warehouse and distribute our inventory. In fiscal 2015, we continued to insource furniture delivery hubs in certain geographies and continued with the regionalization of our retail and e-commerce fulfillment capabilities. Significant increases in our inventory levels may result in increased warehousing and distribution costs, such as costs related to additional distribution centers, which we may not be able to lease on acceptable terms, if at all. Such increases in inventory levels may also lead to increases in costs associated with inventory that is lost, damaged or aged. Higher than expected costs, particularly if coupled with lower than expected sales, would negatively impact our business and operating results. In addition, in times of economic uncertainty, these long-term contracts may make it difficult to quickly reduce our fixed operating costs, which could negatively impact our business and operating results.

We are undertaking certain systems changes that might disrupt our business operations.

Our success depends, in part, on our ability to source, sell and distribute merchandise efficiently through appropriate systems and procedures. We are in the process of substantially modifying our information technology systems, which involves updating or replacing legacy systems with successor systems over the course of several years. There are inherent risks associated with replacing our core systems, including supply chain and merchandising systems disruptions, that could affect our ability to get the correct products into the appropriate stores and delivered to customers. We may not successfully launch these new systems, or the launch of such systems may result in disruptions to our business operations. In addition, changes to any of our software implementation strategies could result in the impairment of software-related assets. We are also subject to the risks associated with the ability of our vendors to provide information technology solutions to meet our needs. Any disruptions could negatively impact our business and operating results.

We outsource certain aspects of our business to third party vendors and are in the process of insourcing certain business functions from third party vendors, both of which subject us to risks, including disruptions in our business and increased costs.

We outsource certain aspects of our business to third party vendors that subject us to risks of disruptions in our business as well as increased costs. For example, we utilize outside vendors for such things as payroll processing, email and other digital marketing and various distribution center services. In some cases, we rely on a single vendor for such services. Accordingly, we are subject to the risks associated with their ability to successfully provide the necessary services to meet our needs. If our vendors are unable to adequately protect our data and information is lost, our ability to deliver our services is interrupted, our vendors’ fees are higher than expected, or our vendors make mistakes in the execution of operations support, then our business and operating results may be negatively impacted.

In addition, we are in the process of insourcing certain aspects of our business, including the management of certain furniture manufacturing and delivery, and in fiscal 2015 completed the insourcing of the management of our global vendors, each of which were previously outsourced to third party providers. We may also need to continue to insource other aspects of our business in the future in order to control our costs and to stay competitive. This may cause disruptions in our business and result in increased cost to us. In addition, if we are unable to perform these functions better than, or at least as well as, our third party providers, our business may be harmed.

 

17


Table of Contents

If our operating and financial performance in any given period does not meet the guidance that we have provided to the public or the expectations of our investors and analysts, our stock price may decline.

We provide public guidance on our expected operating and financial results for future periods. Although we believe that this guidance provides investors and analysts with a better understanding of management’s expectations for the future and is useful to our stockholders and potential stockholders, such guidance is comprised of forward-looking statements subject to the risks and uncertainties described in this report and in our other public filings and public statements. Our actual results may not always be in line with or exceed the guidance we have provided or the expectations of our investors and analysts, especially in times of economic uncertainty. In the past, when we have reduced our previously provided guidance, the market price of our common stock has declined. If, in the future, our operating or financial results for a particular period do not meet our guidance or the expectations of our investors and analysts or if we reduce our guidance for future periods, the market price of our common stock may decline.

A variety of factors, including seasonality and the economic environment, may cause our quarterly operating results to fluctuate, leading to volatility in our stock price.

Our quarterly results have fluctuated in the past and may fluctuate in the future, depending upon a variety of factors, including changes in economic conditions, shifts in the timing of holiday selling seasons, including Valentine’s Day, Easter, Halloween, Thanksgiving and Christmas, as well as timing shifts due to 53-week fiscal years, which occur approximately every five years. Historically, a significant portion of our net revenues and net earnings have typically been realized during the period from October through January each year, our peak selling season. In anticipation of increased holiday sales activity, we incur certain significant incremental expenses prior to and during peak selling seasons, including fixed catalog production and mailing costs and the costs associated with hiring a substantial number of temporary employees to supplement our existing workforce.

We may require funding from external sources, which may cost more than we expect, or not be available at the levels we require and, as a consequence, our expenses and operating results could be negatively affected.

We regularly review and evaluate our liquidity and capital needs. Although we have a growing balance of cash that is held offshore, we currently believe that our available cash, cash equivalents and cash flow from operations will be sufficient to finance our operations and expected capital requirements for at least the next 12 months. However, we might experience periods during which we encounter additional cash needs and we might need additional external funding to support our operations. Although we were able to amend and increase our line of credit facility during fiscal 2014 on acceptable terms, in the event we require additional liquidity from our lenders, such funds may not be available to us or may not be available to us on acceptable terms. For example, in the event we were to breach any of our financial covenants, our banks would not be required to provide us with additional funding, or they may require us to renegotiate our existing credit facility on less favorable terms. In addition, we may not be able to renew our letters of credit that we use to help pay our suppliers on terms that are acceptable to us, or at all, as the availability of letter of credit facilities may become limited. Further, the providers of such credit may reallocate the available credit to other borrowers. If we are unable to access credit at the levels we require, or the cost of credit is greater than expected, it could adversely affect our operating results.

Disruptions in the financial markets may adversely affect our liquidity and capital resources and our business.

Global financial markets can experience extreme volatility, disruption and credit contraction, which adversely affect global economic conditions. Turmoil in the financial and credit markets or other changes in economic conditions could adversely affect sources of liquidity available to us or our costs of capital. We have access to capital through our revolving line of credit facility. Each financial institution, which is part of the syndicate for our revolving line of credit facility, is responsible for providing a portion of the loans to be made under the facility. If any lender, or group of lenders, with a significant portion of the commitments in our revolving line of credit facility fails to satisfy its obligations to extend credit under the facility and we are unable to find a replacement for such lender or group of lenders on a timely basis, if at all, our liquidity and our business may be materially adversely affected.

 

18


Table of Contents

If we are unable to pay quarterly dividends or repurchase our stock at intended levels, our reputation and stock price may be harmed.

We currently have $61,850,000 remaining for future repurchases under our $750,000,000 stock repurchase program. In addition, in March 2016, we announced that our Board of Directors had authorized a new stock repurchase program to purchase up to $500,000,000 of our common stock that we intend to execute over the next three years, as well as an increase in our quarterly cash dividend from $0.35 to $0.37 per common share for an annual cash dividend of $1.48 per share. The stock repurchase programs and dividend may require the use of a significant portion of our cash earnings. As a result, we may not retain a sufficient amount of cash to fund our operations or finance future growth opportunities, new product development initiatives and unanticipated capital expenditures, which could adversely affect our financial performance. Further, our Board of Directors may, at its discretion, decrease the intended level of dividends or entirely discontinue the payment of dividends at any time. The stock repurchase programs do not have an expiration date and may be limited at any time. Our ability to pay dividends and repurchase stock will depend on our ability to generate sufficient cash flows from operations in the future. This ability may be subject to certain economic, financial, competitive and other factors that are beyond our control. Any failure to pay dividends or repurchase stock after we have announced our intention to do so may negatively impact our reputation and investor confidence in us, and may negatively impact our stock price.

If we fail to maintain proper and effective internal controls, our ability to produce accurate and timely financial statements could be impaired and our investors’ views of us could be harmed.

We have evaluated and tested our internal controls in order to allow management to report on, and our registered independent public accounting firm to attest to, the effectiveness of our internal controls, as required by Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. If we are not able to continue to meet the requirements of Section 404 in a timely manner, or with adequate compliance, we would be required to disclose material weaknesses if they develop or are uncovered and we may be subject to sanctions or investigation by regulatory authorities, such as the Securities and Exchange Commission or the New York Stock Exchange. In addition, our internal controls may not prevent or detect all errors and fraud on a timely basis, if at all. A control system, no matter how well designed and operated, is based upon certain assumptions and can provide only reasonable assurance that the objectives of the control system will be met. If any of the above were to occur, our business and the perception of us in the financial markets could be negatively impacted.

Changes to accounting rules or regulations may adversely affect our operating results.

Changes to existing accounting rules or regulations may impact our future operating results. A change in accounting rules or regulations may even affect our reporting of transactions completed before the change is effective. The introduction of new accounting rules or regulations and varying interpretations of existing accounting rules or regulations have occurred and may occur in the future. Future changes to accounting rules or regulations, or the questioning of current accounting practices, may adversely affect our operating results.

Changes to estimates related to our cash flow projections may cause us to incur impairment charges related to our retail store locations and other property and equipment, including information technology systems, as well as goodwill.

We make estimates and projections in connection with impairment analyses for our retail store locations and other property and equipment, including information technology systems, as well as goodwill. These analyses require us to make a number of estimates and projections of future results. If these estimates or projections change or prove incorrect, we may be, and have been, required to record impairment charges on certain store locations and other property and equipment, including information technology systems. These impairment charges have been significant in the past and may be significant in the future and, as a result of these charges, our operating results have been and may, in the future, be adversely affected.

If we fail to attract and retain key personnel, our business and operating results may be harmed.

Our future success depends to a significant degree on the skills, experience and efforts of key personnel in our senior management, whose vision for our company, knowledge of our business and expertise would be difficult

 

19


Table of Contents

to replace. If any one of our key employees leaves, is seriously injured or unable to work, or fails to perform and we are unable to find a qualified replacement, we may be unable to execute our business strategy. In addition, our main offices are located in the San Francisco Bay Area, where competition for personnel with retail and technology skills can be intense. We may not be successful in recruiting, retaining and motivating skilled personnel domestically or globally who have the requisite experience to achieve our global business goals, and failure to do so may harm our business. Further, in the event we need to hire additional personnel, we may experience difficulties in attracting and successfully hiring such individuals due to competition for highly skilled personnel, as well as the significantly higher cost of living expenses in our market.

ITEM 1B. UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

None.

ITEM 2. PROPERTIES

We lease store locations, distribution and manufacturing facilities, corporate facilities and customer care centers for our U.S. and foreign operations for original terms ranging generally from 3 to 22 years. Certain leases contain renewal options for periods of up to 20 years.

For our store locations, our gross leased store space, as of January 31, 2016, totaled approximately 6,163,000 square feet for 618 stores compared to approximately 5,965,000 square feet for 601 stores as of February 1, 2015.

Leased Properties

The following table summarizes the location and size of our leased facilities occupied as of January 31, 2016:

 

Location    Occupied Square Footage (Approximate)  

Distribution and Manufacturing Facilities

  

Mississippi

     2,105,000   

New Jersey

     2,103,000   

California

     1,432,000   

Texas

     1,138,000   

Tennessee

     603,000   

North Carolina

     412,000   

Oregon

     91,000   

Other

     535,000   

Corporate Facilities

  

California

     240,000   

New York

     134,000   

Oregon

     41,000   

Customer Care Centers

  

Nevada

     36,000   

Oklahoma

     36,000   

Other

     24,000   

In January 2016, we entered into a 10 year agreement to lease 1,075,000 square feet of distribution facility space in Braselton, Georgia, which we will begin occupying in fiscal 2016. This square footage is not included in the table above.

In addition to the above contracts, we enter into other agreements for offsite storage needs for our distribution facilities and our retail store locations. As of January 31, 2016, the total leased space relating to these properties was not material to us and is not included in the occupied square footage reported above.

 

20


Table of Contents

Owned Properties

As of January 31, 2016 we owned 471,000 square feet of space primarily in California for our corporate headquarters and certain data center operations.

We believe that all of our facilities are adequate for our current needs and that suitable additional or substitute space will be available in the future to replace our existing facilities, or to accommodate the expansion of our operations, if necessary.

ITEM 3. LEGAL PROCEEDINGS

We are involved in lawsuits, claims and proceedings incident to the ordinary course of our business. These disputes, which are not currently material, are increasing in number as our business expands and our company grows larger. We review the need for any loss contingency reserves and establish reserves when, in the opinion of management, it is probable that a matter would result in liability, and the amount can be reasonably estimated. In view of the inherent difficulty of predicting the outcome of these matters, it may not be possible to determine whether any loss is probable or to reasonably estimate the amount of the loss until the case is close to resolution, in which case no reserve is established until that time. Any claims against us, whether meritorious or not, could be time consuming, result in costly litigation, require significant amounts of management time and result in the diversion of significant operational resources. The results of these lawsuits, claims and proceedings cannot be predicted with certainty. However, we believe that the ultimate resolution of these current matters will not have a material adverse effect on our consolidated financial statements taken as a whole.

ITEM 4. MINE SAFETY DISCLOSURES

Not applicable.

 

21


Table of Contents

PART II

 

ITEM 5. MARKET FOR REGISTRANT’S COMMON EQUITY, RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS AND ISSUER PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES

MARKET INFORMATION

Our common stock is traded on the New York Stock Exchange, or the NYSE, under the symbol WSM. The following table sets forth the high and low selling prices of our common stock on the NYSE for the periods indicated:

 

Fiscal 2015         High        Low  

4 th Quarter

     $ 75.90         $ 47.33   

3 rd Quarter

     $ 89.38         $ 71.03   

2 nd Quarter

     $ 85.37         $ 74.75   

1 st Quarter

     $ 84.75         $ 73.14   
Fiscal 2014         High        Low  

4 th Quarter

     $ 80.99         $ 64.17   

3 rd Quarter

     $ 75.69         $ 62.35   

2 nd Quarter

     $ 73.45         $ 60.47   

1 st Quarter

       $ 68.05         $ 52.46   

The closing price of our common stock on the NYSE on March 27, 2016 was $54.22.

STOCKHOLDERS

The number of stockholders of record of our common stock as of March 27, 2016 was 370. This number excludes stockholders whose stock is held in nominee or street name by brokers.

 

22


Table of Contents

PERFORMANCE GRAPH

This graph compares the cumulative total stockholder return for our common stock with those of the NYSE Composite Index and the S&P Retailing Index, our peer group index. The cumulative total return listed below assumed an initial investment of $100 and reinvestment of dividends. The graph shows historical stock price performance, including reinvestment of dividends, and is not necessarily indicative of future performance.

COMPARISON OF FIVE YEAR CUMULATIVE TOTAL RETURN*

Among Williams-Sonoma, Inc., the NYSE Composite Index,

and the S&P Retailing Index

 

LOGO

 

    1/30/11   1/29/12   2/3/13   2/2/14   2/1/15   1/31/16

Williams-Sonoma, Inc.

  100.00   110.71   145.07   179.74   262.99   177.19

NYSE Composite Index

  100.00   100.07   117.03   133.36   144.38   135.28

S&P Retailing Index

  100.00   116.11   149.64   189.33   227.25   266.25

* Notes:

 

A. The lines represent monthly index levels derived from compounded daily returns that include all dividends.
B. The indices are re-weighted daily, using the market capitalization on the previous trading day.
C. If the monthly interval, based on the fiscal year-end, is not a trading day, the preceding trading day is used.

 

23


Table of Contents

DIVIDENDS

In fiscal 2015, fiscal 2014 and fiscal 2013, total cash dividends declared were approximately $130,290,000, or $1.40 per common share, $125,378,000, or $1.32 per common share, and $121,688,000, or $1.24 per common share, respectively. In March 2016, we announced that our Board of Directors had authorized a 6% increase in our quarterly cash dividend, from $0.35 to $0.37 per common share, subject to capital availability. Our quarterly cash dividend may be limited or terminated at any time.

STOCK REPURCHASE PROGRAMS

During fiscal 2015, we repurchased 2,950,438 shares of our common stock at an average cost of $76.26 per share and a total cost of $224,995,000. During fiscal 2014, we repurchased 3,331,557 shares of our common stock at an average cost of $67.35 per share and a total cost of $224,377,000. During fiscal 2013, we repurchased 4,344,962 shares of our common stock at an average cost of $55.07 per share and a total cost of $239,274,000. In addition, in March 2016, we announced that our Board of Directors had authorized a new stock repurchase program to purchase up to $500,000,000 of our common stock that we intend to execute over the next three years.

The following table summarizes our repurchases of shares of our common stock during the fourth quarter of fiscal 2015 under our $750,000,000 stock repurchase program:

 

Fiscal period        
 
 
Total Number
of Shares
Purchased
  
  
  
   
 
 
Average
Price Paid
Per Share
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Total Number of
Shares Purchased as
Part of a Publicly
Announced Program
  
  
  
  
   
 
 

 

 

Maximum
Dollar Value of
Shares That May

Yet Be Purchased

Under the Program

  
  
  

  

  

November 2, 2015

 

–  November 29, 2015

    178,815      $ 66.73        178,815         $           78,416,000   

November 30, 2015

 

–  December 27, 2015

    142,852      $ 61.46        142,852         $           69,637,000   

December 28, 2015

 

–  January 31, 2016

    142,941      $ 54.47        142,941         $           61,850,000   

Total

        464,608      $ 61.34        464,608         $           61,850,000   

Stock repurchases under the programs may be made through open market and privately negotiated transactions at times and in such amounts as management deems appropriate. The timing and actual number of shares repurchased will depend on a variety of factors including price, corporate and regulatory requirements, capital availability and other market conditions. These stock repurchase programs do not have an expiration date and may be limited or terminated at any time without prior notice.

 

24


Table of Contents

ITEM 6. SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA

Five-Year Selected Financial Data

 

In thousands, except percentages, per share amounts
and retail stores data
  

Fiscal 2015

(52 Weeks)

    

Fiscal 2014

(52 Weeks)

    

Fiscal 2013

(52 Weeks)

    

Fiscal 2012

(53 Weeks)

    

Fiscal 2011

(52 Weeks)

 

Results of Operations

              

Net revenues

   $ 4,976,090       $ 4,698,719       $ 4,387,889       $ 4,042,870       $ 3,720,895   

Net revenue growth

     5.9%         7.1%         8.5%         8.7%         6.2%   

Comparable brand revenue growth 1

     3.7%         7.1%         8.8%         6.1%         7.3%   

Gross profit

   $ 1,844,214       $ 1,800,504       $ 1,704,216       $ 1,592,476       $ 1,459,856   

Gross margin

     37.1%         38.3%         38.8%         39.4%         39.2%   

Operating income

   $ 488,634       $ 502,265       $ 452,098       $ 409,163       $ 381,732   

Operating margin 2

     9.8%         10.7%         10.3%         10.1%         10.3%   

Net earnings

   $ 310,068       $ 308,854       $ 278,902       $ 256,730       $ 236,931   

Basic earnings per share

   $ 3.42       $ 3.30       $ 2.89       $ 2.59       $ 2.27   

Diluted earnings per share

   $ 3.37       $ 3.24       $ 2.82       $ 2.54       $ 2.22   

Weighted average basic shares outstanding during the period

     90,787         93,634         96,669         99,266         104,352   

Weighted average diluted shares outstanding during the period

     92,102         95,200         98,765         101,051         106,582   

Financial Position

              

Working capital 3

   $ 339,673       $ 515,975       $ 558,007       $ 659,645       $ 704,567   

Total assets

   $ 2,417,427       $ 2,330,277       $ 2,336,734       $ 2,187,679       $ 2,060,838   

Return on assets

     13.1%         13.2%         12.3%         12.0%         11.3%   

Net cash provided by operating activities

   $ 544,026       $ 461,697       $ 453,769       $ 364,127       $ 291,334   

Capital expenditures

   $ 202,935       $ 204,800       $ 193,953       $ 205,404       $ 130,353   

Long-term debt and other long-term obligations

   $ 49,713       $ 62,698       $ 61,780       $ 50,216       $ 52,015   

Stockholders’ equity

   $ 1,198,226       $ 1,224,706       $ 1,256,002       $ 1,309,138       $ 1,255,262   

Stockholders’ equity per share (book value)

   $ 13.38       $ 13.33       $ 13.35       $ 13.39       $ 12.50   

Return on equity

     25.6%         24.9%         21.7%         20.0%         18.8%   

Annual dividends declared per share

   $ 1.40       $ 1.32       $ 1.24       $ 0.88       $ 0.73   

E-commerce Net Revenues

              

E-commerce net revenue growth

     6.4%         12.1%         13.1%         14.5%         12.4%   

E-commerce net revenues as a percent of net revenues

     50.7%         50.5%         48.2%         46.2%         43.9%   

Retail Net Revenues

              

Retail net revenue growth

     5.4%         2.4%         4.6%         4.1%         1.8%   

Retail net revenues as a percent of net revenues

     49.3%         49.5%         51.8%         53.8%         56.1%   

Number of stores at year-end

     618         601         585         581         576   

Store selling square footage at year-end

     3,827,000         3,684,000         3,590,000         3,548,000         3,535,000   

Store leased square footage at year-end

     6,163,000         5,965,000         5,838,000         5,778,000         5,743,000   

 

1   Comparable brand revenue is calculated on a 52-week to 52-week basis, with the exception of fiscal 2012 which was calculated on a 53-week to 53-week basis. See definition of comparable brand revenue within “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations.”  
2   Operating margin is defined as operating income as a percent of net revenues.  
3   Working capital for fiscal 2015 may not be comparable to the prior years presented because of our adoption of ASU 2015-17, Balance Sheet Classification of Deferred Taxes, which we adopted prospectively in fiscal 2015. See Notes A and D to our Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information.  

The information set forth above is not necessarily indicative of future operations and should be read in conjunction with “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and the Consolidated Financial Statements and notes thereto in this Annual Report on Form 10-K.

 

25


Table of Contents
ITEM  7. MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

The following discussion and analysis of our financial condition, results of operations, and liquidity and capital resources for the 52 weeks ended January 31, 2016 (“fiscal 2015”), the 52 weeks ended February 1, 2015 (“fiscal 2014”), and the 52 weeks ended February 2, 2014 (“fiscal 2013”) should be read in conjunction with our Consolidated Financial Statements and notes thereto. All explanations of changes in operational results are discussed in order of magnitude.

OVERVIEW

In fiscal 2015, our net revenues increased 5.9% to $4,976,090,000 compared to $4,698,719,000 in fiscal 2014, with comparable brand revenue growth of 3.7%. This increase in net revenues was driven by a 6.4% increase in our e-commerce net revenues and a 5.4% increase in our retail net revenues, and included 26.8% growth in our international revenues. E-commerce net revenues generated 51% of our total company net revenues in fiscal 2015 compared to 50% of our net revenues in fiscal 2014.

In Pottery Barn, our largest brand, comparable brand revenues increased 1.9% in fiscal 2015 compared to fiscal 2014. This growth was primarily driven by our furniture, upholstery and textile collections, partially offset by softer sales trends in our gifting categories. In the Williams-Sonoma brand, comparable brand revenues increased 1.1% in fiscal 2015 compared to fiscal 2014. Growth in cookware, cutlery, tabletop and our Williams-Sonoma Home business drove these results. In West Elm, comparable brand revenues increased 14.8% in fiscal 2015 on top of 18.2% in fiscal 2014. Growth continued to be broad-based across categories. In Pottery Barn Kids, comparable brand revenues increased 2.2% in fiscal 2015 compared to fiscal 2014, primarily driven by our furniture, back-to-school and bedding categories. In PBteen, comparable brand revenues decreased 2.7% in fiscal 2015 compared to fiscal 2014. Strength in furniture, decorative accessories, and back-to-school categories were more than offset by weakness in our textiles and gifting collections. And in our emerging brands, Rejuvenation and Mark and Graham, net revenues increased 37.5%.

Additionally, in fiscal 2015, diluted earnings per share increased to $3.37, versus $3.24 in fiscal 2014 (which included a $0.04 benefit from our share of the VISA/MasterCard antitrust litigation settlement), and we returned $352,631,000 to our stockholders through stock repurchases and dividends.

As we look forward, in all of our brands we have targeted strategies and opportunities that we believe will allow us to profitably grow the business. We plan to improve our competitive positioning across product, service and value for our customers, and plan to expand our brands into new products and market segments through the expansion of proprietary products. We also plan to develop cross-brand initiatives to more fully engage with our customers and to leverage innovative marketing channels. We plan to invest in our high growth, newer brands, particularly West Elm, and expand our global reach through existing and new franchise relationships. In addition, we have identified four key strategies within our business to help us drive improvements across the company: re-asserting our product leadership, revolutionizing our approach to inventory, transforming our marketing, and changing our approach to real estate and the retail experience. We believe that collectively these strategies will extend our leadership position across our brands and in our supply chain.

 

26


Table of Contents

Results of Operations

NET REVENUES

Net revenues consist of e-commerce net revenues and retail net revenues. E-commerce net revenues include sales of merchandise to customers through our e-commerce websites and our catalogs, as well as shipping fees. Retail net revenues include sales of merchandise to customers at our retail stores and to our franchisees, as well as shipping fees on any products shipped to our customers’ homes. Shipping fees consist of revenue received from customers for delivery of merchandise to their homes. Revenues are presented net of sales returns and other discounts.

 

In thousands    Fiscal 2015      % Total      Fiscal 2014      % Total      Fiscal 2013      % Total  

E-commerce net revenues

   $ 2,522,580         50.7%       $ 2,370,694         50.5%       $ 2,115,022         48.2%   

Retail net revenues

     2,453,510         49.3%         2,328,025         49.5%         2,272,867         51.8%   

Net revenues

   $ 4,976,090         100.0%       $ 4,698,719         100.0%       $ 4,387,889         100.0%   

Net revenues in fiscal 2015 increased by $277,371,000, or 5.9%, compared to fiscal 2014, with comparable brand revenue growth of 3.7%. This increase in net revenues was driven by a 6.4% increase in our e-commerce net revenues and a 5.4% increase in our retail net revenues. By brand, this increase was primarily driven by West Elm and Pottery Barn, with particular strength in furniture. Total fiscal 2015 net revenue growth also included an increase in our international revenues of 26.8%, primarily related to our franchise operations, and a 3.3% increase in retail leased square footage primarily due to 17 net new stores.

Net revenues in fiscal 2014 increased by $310,830,000, or 7.1%, compared to fiscal 2013, with comparable brand revenue growth of 7.1%. This increase was driven by a 12.1% increase in our e-commerce net revenues and a 2.4% increase in our retail net revenues. By brand, this increase was primarily driven by the West Elm and Pottery Barn brands. Total fiscal 2014 net revenue growth also included an increase in our international revenues of 9.4%, and a 2.2% increase in retail leased square footage primarily due to 16 net new stores.

The following table summarizes our net revenues by brand for fiscal 2015, fiscal 2014 and fiscal 2013.

 

In thousands    Fiscal 2015      Fiscal 2014      Fiscal 2013  

Pottery Barn

   $ 2,074,051       $ 2,022,331       $ 1,910,978   

Williams-Sonoma

     993,609         994,651         978,002   

West Elm

     821,136         669,074         531,305   

Pottery Barn Kids

     640,073         624,594         597,628   

PBteen

     253,602         260,617         246,449   

Other 1

     193,619         127,452         123,527   

Total

   $ 4,976,090       $ 4,698,719       $ 4,387,889   

 

1   Primarily consists of net revenues from our international franchise operations, Rejuvenation, and Mark and Graham.

Comparable Brand Revenue

Comparable brand revenue includes retail comparable store sales and e-commerce sales, as well as shipping fees, sales returns and other discounts associated with current period sales. Outlet comparable store net revenues are included in their respective brands. Comparable brand revenue excludes sales from certain operations until such time that we believe those sales are meaningful to evaluating the performance of the brand. Sales related to our international franchise operations have also been excluded as they are not operated by us.

 

27


Table of Contents

Comparable stores are defined as permanent stores where gross square footage did not change by more than 20% in the previous 12 months and which have been open for at least 12 consecutive months without closure for seven or more consecutive days.

 

Comparable brand revenue growth (decline)    Fiscal 2015     Fiscal 2014      Fiscal 2013  

Pottery Barn

     1.9%        5.8%         10.4%   

Williams-Sonoma

     1.1%        3.8%         1.5%   

West Elm

     14.8%        18.2%         17.4%   

Pottery Barn Kids

     2.2%        5.9%         7.8%   

PBteen

     (2.7%     5.7%         14.1%   

Total

     3.7%        7.1%         8.8%   

E-COMMERCE NET REVENUES

 

In thousands    Fiscal 2015      Fiscal 2014      Fiscal 2013  

E-commerce net revenues

   $ 2,522,580       $ 2,370,694       $ 2,115,022   

E-commerce net revenue growth

     6.4%         12.1%         13.1%   

E-commerce net revenues in fiscal 2015 increased by $151,886,000, or 6.4%, compared to fiscal 2014, led by West Elm, Williams-Sonoma and Pottery Barn Kids.

E-commerce net revenues in fiscal 2014 increased by $255,672,000, or 12.1%, compared to fiscal 2013, with increases across all brands, led by West Elm, Pottery Barn and Williams-Sonoma.

RETAIL NET REVENUES AND OTHER DATA

 

In thousands    Fiscal 2015     Fiscal 2014     Fiscal 2013  

Retail net revenues

   $ 2,453,510      $ 2,328,025      $ 2,272,867   

Retail net revenue growth

     5.4%        2.4%        4.6%   

Store count – beginning of year

     601        585        581   

Store openings

     34        35        30   

Store closings

     (17     (19     (26

Store count – end of year

     618        601        585   

Store selling square footage at year-end

     3,827,000        3,684,000        3,590,000   

Store leased square footage (“LSF”) at year-end

     6,163,000        5,965,000        5,838,000   

 

     Fiscal 2015      Fiscal 2014      Fiscal 2013  
     

Store

Count

     Avg. LSF
Per Store
    

Store

Count

     Avg. LSF
Per Store
    

Store

Count

     Avg. LSF
Per Store
 

Williams-Sonoma

     239         6,600         243         6,600         248         6,600   

Pottery Barn

     197         13,800         199         13,700         194         13,800   

Pottery Barn Kids

     89         7,500         85         7,600         81         7,900   

West Elm

     87         13,200         69         13,700         58         14,100   

Rejuvenation

     6         9,000         5         10,000         4         13,200   

Total

     618         10,000         601         9,900         585         10,000   

Retail net revenues in fiscal 2015 increased by $125,485,000, or 5.4%, compared to fiscal 2014, primarily driven by West Elm. Retail net revenue growth for fiscal 2015 also included growth in our international revenues primarily related to our franchise operations, and a 3.3% increase in retail leased square footage primarily due to 17 net new stores.

Retail net revenues in fiscal 2014 increased by $55,158,000, or 2.4%, compared to fiscal 2013, led by West Elm and Pottery Barn, partially offset by a decrease in Williams-Sonoma due to store closures at the end of fiscal 2013.

 

28


Table of Contents

COST OF GOODS SOLD

 

In thousands    Fiscal 2015      % Net
Revenues
     Fiscal 2014      % Net
Revenues
     Fiscal 2013      % Net
Revenues
 

Cost of goods sold 1

   $ 3,131,876         62.9%       $ 2,898,215         61.7%       $ 2,683,673         61.2%   

 

1   Includes occupancy expenses of $631,817,000, $603,357,000 and $561,586,000 in fiscal 2015, fiscal 2014 and fiscal 2013, respectively.

Cost of goods sold includes cost of goods, occupancy expenses and shipping costs. Cost of goods consists of cost of merchandise, inbound freight expenses, freight-to-store expenses and other inventory related costs such as shrinkage, damages and replacements. Occupancy expenses consist of rent, depreciation and other occupancy costs, including common area maintenance, property taxes and utilities. Shipping costs consist of third party delivery services and shipping materials.

Our classification of expenses in cost of goods sold may not be comparable to other public companies, as we do not include non-occupancy related costs associated with our distribution network in cost of goods sold. These costs, which include distribution network employment, third party warehouse management and other distribution related administrative expenses, are recorded in selling, general and administrative expenses.

Within our reportable segments, the e-commerce channel does not incur freight-to-store or store occupancy expenses, and typically operates with lower markdowns and inventory shrinkage than the retail channel. However, the e-commerce channel incurs higher customer shipping, damage and replacement costs than the retail channel.

Fiscal 2015 vs. Fiscal 2014

Cost of goods sold increased by $233,661,000, or 8.1%, in fiscal 2015 compared to fiscal 2014. Cost of goods sold as a percentage of net revenues increased to 62.9% in fiscal 2015 from 61.7% in fiscal 2014. This increase was driven by increased shipping and fulfillment-related costs and higher franchise revenues, which have a lower gross margin.

In the e-commerce channel, cost of goods sold as a percentage of net revenues increased in fiscal 2015 compared to fiscal 2014 primarily driven by increased shipping and fulfillment-related costs, and an increase in occupancy expenses.

In the retail channel, cost of goods sold as a percentage of net revenues increased for fiscal 2015 compared to fiscal 2014 driven by higher franchise revenues and increased fulfillment-related costs, partially offset by the leverage of occupancy expenses.

Fiscal 2014 vs. Fiscal 2013

Cost of goods sold increased by $214,542,000, or 8.0%, in fiscal 2014 compared to fiscal 2013. Cost of goods sold as a percentage of net revenues increased to 61.7% in fiscal 2014 from 61.2% in fiscal 2013. This increase was primarily driven by lower selling margins.

In the e-commerce channel, cost of goods sold as a percentage of net revenues increased in fiscal 2014 compared to fiscal 2013 primarily driven by lower selling margins and an increase in occupancy expenses.

In the retail channel, cost of goods sold as a percentage of net revenues remained relatively flat in fiscal 2014 compared to fiscal 2013 due to an increase in occupancy expenses offset by higher selling margins.

SELLING, GENERAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE EXPENSES

 

In thousands    Fiscal 2015     

% Net

Revenues

     Fiscal 2014     

% Net

Revenues

     Fiscal 2013     

% Net

Revenues

 

Selling, general and administrative expenses

   $ 1,355,580         27.2%       $ 1,298,239         27.6%       $ 1,252,118         28.5%   

 

29


Table of Contents

Selling, general and administrative expenses consist of non-occupancy related costs associated with our retail stores, distribution warehouses, customer care centers, supply chain operations (buying, receiving and inspection) and corporate administrative functions. These costs include employment, advertising, third party credit card processing and other general expenses.

We experience differing employment and advertising costs as a percentage of net revenues within the retail and e-commerce channels due to their distinct distribution and marketing strategies. Employment costs represent a greater percentage of net revenues within the retail channel as compared to the e-commerce channel. However, advertising expenses are higher within the e-commerce channel than in the retail channel.

Fiscal 2015 vs. Fiscal 2014

Selling, general and administrative expenses for fiscal 2015 increased by $57,341,000, or 4.4%, compared to fiscal 2014. Selling, general and administrative expenses as a percentage of net revenues decreased to 27.2% in fiscal 2015 from 27.6% in fiscal 2014. This decrease as a percentage of net revenues was primarily driven by the leverage of advertising expenses and employment costs, partially offset by litigation settlement income of $7,414,000 recorded in fiscal 2014 that did not recur in fiscal 2015.

In the e-commerce channel, selling, general and administrative expenses as a percentage of net revenues was relatively flat for fiscal 2015 compared to fiscal 2014 primarily due to advertising leverage, offset by an increase in employment costs associated with incremental labor costs in our supply chain.

In the retail channel, selling, general and administrative expenses as a percentage of net revenues decreased for fiscal 2015 compared to fiscal 2014 primarily driven by the leverage of employment costs due to higher franchise revenues.

Fiscal 2014 vs. Fiscal 2013

Selling, general and administrative expenses for fiscal 2014 increased by $46,121,000, or 3.7%, compared to fiscal 2013. Selling, general and administrative expenses as a percentage of net revenues decreased to 27.6% in fiscal 2014 from 28.5% in fiscal 2013. This decrease as a percentage of net revenues was primarily driven by greater advertising efficiency, lower general expenses, including litigation settlement income recorded of $7,414,000, and the leverage of employment costs.

In the e-commerce channel, selling, general and administrative expenses as a percentage of net revenues decreased in fiscal 2014 compared to fiscal 2013 primarily driven by greater advertising efficiency.

In the retail channel, selling, general and administrative expenses as a percentage of net revenues increased in fiscal 2014 compared to fiscal 2013 primarily driven by employment cost deleverage, partially offset by lower general expenses.

INCOME TAXES

Our effective income tax rate was 36.5% for fiscal 2015, 38.5% for fiscal 2014, and 38.4% for fiscal 2013. The decrease in the effective income tax rate in fiscal 2015 reflects fluctuations in the level and mix of earnings, as well as the favorable resolution of certain income tax matters.

LIQUIDITY AND CAPITAL RESOURCES

As of January 31, 2016, we held $193,647,000 in cash and cash equivalents, the majority of which is held in demand deposit accounts and money market funds, and of which $62,332,000 was held by our foreign subsidiaries. As is consistent within our industry, our cash balances are seasonal in nature, with the fourth quarter historically representing a significantly higher level of cash than other periods.

Throughout the fiscal year, we utilize our cash balances to build our inventory levels in preparation for our fourth quarter holiday sales. In fiscal 2016, we plan to use our cash resources to fund our inventory and inventory related purchases, advertising and marketing initiatives, property and equipment purchases, stock repurchases

 

30


Table of Contents

and dividend payments. In addition to our cash balances on hand, we have a $500,000,000 unsecured revolving line of credit (“credit facility”) that may be used to borrow revolving loans or to request the issuance of letters of credit. We may, upon notice to the administrative agent, request existing or new lenders to increase the credit facility by up to $250,000,000, at such lenders’ option, to provide for a total of $750,000,000 of unsecured revolving credit. During fiscal 2015, we had borrowings of $200,000,000 under the credit facility, all of which were repaid in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2015. During fiscal 2014, we had borrowings of $90,000,000 under the credit facility, all of which were repaid in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2014.

During fiscal 2014, we redeemed restricted cash deposits of $14,289,000 previously held under collateralized trust agreements. These deposits, which secured potential liabilities associated with our workers’ compensation and other insurance programs, were replaced with standby letters of credit. As of January 31, 2016, a total of $13,367,000 in issued but undrawn standby letters of credit was outstanding under the credit facility. Additionally, we had three unsecured letter of credit reimbursement facilities, which were amended during the year, for a total of $70,000,000, of which an aggregate of $6,088,000 was outstanding as of January 31, 2016. These letter of credit facilities represent only a future commitment to fund inventory purchases to which we had not taken legal title. We are currently in compliance with all of our financial covenants under the credit facility and, based on our current projections, we expect to remain in compliance throughout fiscal 2016. We believe our cash on hand, in addition to our available credit facilities, will provide adequate liquidity for our business operations over the next 12 months.

Cash Flows from Operating Activities

For fiscal 2015, net cash provided by operating activities was $544,026,000 compared to $461,697,000 in fiscal 2014. For fiscal 2015, net cash provided by operating activities was primarily attributable to net earnings adjusted for non-cash items and an increase in accounts payable, customer deposits and income taxes payable, partially offset by an increase in merchandise inventories. This represents an increase in net cash provided by operating activities compared to fiscal 2014 primarily due to an increase in accounts payable and income taxes payable due to the timing of payments, partially offset by an increase in merchandise inventories.

For fiscal 2014, net cash provided by operating activities was $461,697,000 compared to $453,769,000 in fiscal 2013. For fiscal 2014, net cash provided by operating activities was primarily attributable to net earnings adjusted for non-cash items and an increase in customer deposits, partially offset by an increase in merchandise inventories. This represents an increase in net cash provided compared to fiscal 2013 primarily due to a decrease in inventory purchases and an increase in net earnings adjusted for non-cash items, partially offset by the timing of payments associated with accounts payable and accrued liabilities.

Cash Flows from Investing Activities

For fiscal 2015, net cash used in investing activities was $202,166,000 compared to $188,600,000 for fiscal 2014, and was primarily attributable to purchases of property and equipment. Net cash used in investing activities compared to fiscal 2014 increased primarily due to restricted cash receipts received in fiscal 2014 that did not recur in fiscal 2015.

For fiscal 2014, net cash used in investing activities was $188,600,000 compared to $190,624,000 for fiscal 2013, and was primarily attributable to purchases of property and equipment. Net cash used compared to fiscal 2013 decreased primarily due to restricted cash receipts, partially offset by an increase in purchases of property and equipment.

Cash Flows from Financing Activities

For fiscal 2015, net cash used in financing activities was $369,383,000 compared to $379,020,000 in fiscal 2014. For fiscal 2015, net cash used in financing activities was primarily attributable to the repurchase of common stock of $224,995,000 and the payment of dividends of $127,636,000. Net cash used in financing activities compared to fiscal 2014 decreased primarily due to a decrease in tax withholding payments related to stock-based awards.

For fiscal 2014, net cash used in financing activities was $379,020,000 compared to $355,376,000 in fiscal 2013. For fiscal 2014, net cash used in financing activities was primarily attributable to the repurchase of common

 

31


Table of Contents

stock of $224,377,000 and the payment of dividends of $125,758,000. Net cash used compared to fiscal 2013 increased primarily due to an increase in tax withholding payments related to stock-based awards.

Dividends

See section titled Dividends within Part II, Item 5 of this Annual Report on Form 10-K for further information.

Stock Repurchase Programs

See section titled Stock Repurchase Programs within Part II, Item 5 of this Annual Report on Form 10-K for further information.

Contractual Obligations

The following table provides summary information concerning our future contractual obligations as of January 31, 2016:

 

    Payments Due by Period 1  
In thousands   Fiscal 2016     

Fiscal 2017

to Fiscal 2019

    

Fiscal 2020

to Fiscal 2021

     Thereafter      Total  

Operating leases 2

  $ 257,805       $ 657,472       $ 305,376       $ 513,255       $ 1,733,908   

Purchase obligations 3

    765,417         9,388         654         318         775,777   

Total

  $ 1,023,222       $ 666,860       $ 306,030       $ 513,573       $   2,509,685   

 

1   This table excludes $15.9 million of liabilities for unrecognized tax benefits associated with uncertain tax positions as we are not able to reasonably estimate when and if cash payments for these liabilities will occur. This amount, however, has been recorded as a liability in our accompanying Consolidated Balance Sheet as of January 31, 2016.
2   Projected payments include only those amounts that are fixed and determinable as of the reporting date. See Note E to our Consolidated Financial Statements for discussion of our operating leases.
3   Represents estimated commitments at year-end to purchase inventory and other goods and services in the normal course of business to meet operational requirements.

Other Contractual Obligations

We have other liabilities reflected in our Consolidated Balance Sheet. The payment obligations associated with these liabilities are not reflected in the table above due to the absence of scheduled maturities. The timing of these payments cannot be determined, except for amounts estimated to be payable in fiscal 2016, which are included in our current liabilities as of January 31, 2016.

We are party to a variety of contractual agreements under which we may be obligated to indemnify the other party for certain matters. These contracts primarily relate to commercial matters, operating leases, trademarks, intellectual property, and financial matters. Under these contracts, we may provide certain routine indemnification relating to representations and warranties or personal injury matters. The terms of these indemnifications range in duration and may not be explicitly defined. Historically, we have not made significant payments for these indemnifications. We believe that if we were to incur a loss in any of these matters, the loss would not have a material effect on our financial condition or results of operations.

Commercial Commitments

The following table provides summary information concerning our outstanding commercial commitments as of January 31, 2016:

 

     Amount of Outstanding Commitment Expiration By Period 1  
In thousands    Fiscal 2016     

Fiscal 2017

to Fiscal 2019

    

Fiscal 2020

to Fiscal 2021

     Thereafter                Total  

Standby letters of credit

   $ 13,367                               $ 13,367   

Letter of credit facilities

     6,088                                 6,088   

Credit facility

                                       

Total

   $ 19,455                               $ 19,455   

 

1   See Note C to our Consolidated Financial Statements for discussion of our borrowing arrangements.

 

32


Table of Contents

IMPACT OF INFLATION

The impact of inflation (or deflation) on our results of operations for the past three fiscal years has not been significant. However, we cannot be certain of the effect inflation (or deflation) may have on our results of operations in the future.

CRITICAL ACCOUNTING POLICIES AND ESTIMATES

Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations is based on our Consolidated Financial Statements, which have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. The preparation of these Consolidated Financial Statements requires us to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses and related disclosures of contingent assets and liabilities. These estimates and assumptions are evaluated on an ongoing basis and are based on historical experience and various other factors that we believe to be reasonable under the circumstances. Actual results could differ from these estimates.

We believe the following critical accounting policies used in the preparation of our Consolidated Financial Statements include the significant estimates and assumptions that we consider to be the most critical to an understanding of our financial statements because they involve significant judgments and uncertainties. See Note A to our Consolidated Financial Statements for a detailed description of each policy.

Merchandise Inventories

Merchandise inventories, net of an allowance for excess quantities and obsolescence, are stated at the lower of cost (weighted average method) or market. To determine if the value of our inventory should be reduced below cost, we consider current and anticipated demand, customer preferences and age of the merchandise. The significant estimates used in inventory valuation are obsolescence (including excess and slow-moving inventory and lower of cost or market reserves) and estimates of inventory shrinkage. We reserve for obsolescence based on historical trends, aging reports, specific identification and our estimates of future sales and selling prices.

Reserves for shrinkage are estimated and recorded throughout the year, as a percentage of net sales based on historical shrinkage results, expectations of future shrinkage and current inventory levels. Actual shrinkage is recorded at year-end based on the results of our physical inventory counts and can vary from our estimates due to such factors as changes in operations, the mix of our inventory (which ranges from large furniture to small tabletop items) and execution against loss prevention initiatives in our stores, distribution centers, off-site storage locations, and with our third party warehouse and transportation providers. Accordingly, there is no shrinkage reserve at year-end.

Our obsolescence and shrinkage reserve calculations contain estimates that require management to make assumptions and to apply judgment regarding a number of factors, including market conditions, the selling environment, historical results and current inventory trends. If actual obsolescence or shrinkage estimates change from our original estimate, we will adjust our reserves accordingly throughout the year. We have made no material changes to our assumptions included in the calculations of the obsolescence and shrinkage reserves throughout the year. In addition, we do not believe a 10% change in our inventory reserves would have a material effect on net earnings. As of January 31, 2016 and February 1, 2015, our inventory obsolescence reserves were $9,782,000 and $10,244,000, respectively.

Advertising and Prepaid Catalog Expenses

Advertising expenses consist of media and production costs related to catalog mailings, e-commerce advertising and other direct marketing activities. All advertising costs are expensed as incurred, or upon the release of the initial advertisement, with the exception of prepaid catalog expenses. Prepaid catalog expenses consist primarily of third party incremental direct costs, including creative design, paper, printing, postage and mailing costs for all of our direct response catalogs. Such costs are capitalized as prepaid catalog expenses and are amortized over their expected period of future benefit. Each catalog is generally fully amortized over a six to nine month period, with the majority of the amortization occurring within the first four to five months. Prepaid catalog expenses are

 

33


Table of Contents

evaluated for realizability on a monthly basis by comparing the carrying amount associated with each catalog to the estimated future profitability (net revenues less merchandise cost of goods sold, selling expenses and catalog-related costs) of that catalog. If the estimated future profitability of the catalog is below its carrying amount, the catalog is impaired accordingly.

Total advertising expenses (including catalog advertising, e-commerce advertising and all other advertising costs) were approximately $333,276,000, $330,070,000 and $325,708,000 in fiscal 2015, fiscal 2014 and fiscal 2013, respectively.

Property and Equipment

Property and equipment is stated at cost. Depreciation is computed using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets.

We review the carrying value of all long-lived assets for impairment, primarily at a store level, whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value of an asset may not be recoverable. Our impairment analyses determine whether projected cash flows from operations are sufficient to recover the carrying value of these assets. Impairment may result when the carrying value of the asset exceeds the estimated undiscounted future cash flows over its remaining useful life. For store impairment, our estimate of undiscounted future cash flows over the store lease term is based upon our experience, the historical operations of the stores and estimates of future store profitability and economic conditions. The future estimates of store profitability and economic conditions require estimating such factors as sales growth, gross margin, employment costs, lease escalations, inflation and the overall economics of the retail industry, and are therefore subject to variability and difficult to predict. Actual future results may differ from those estimates. If a long-lived asset is found to be impaired, the amount recognized for impairment is equal to the difference between the asset’s net carrying value and its fair value. Long-lived assets are measured at fair value on a nonrecurring basis using Level 3 inputs as defined in the fair value hierarchy. The fair value is based on the present value of estimated future cash flows using a discount rate that approximates our weighted average cost of capital.

During fiscal 2015, fiscal 2014 and fiscal 2013, we recorded expense of approximately $2,100,000, $241,000 and $561,000, respectively, associated with asset impairment charges related to our retail stores, all of which is recorded within selling, general and administrative expenses.

Goodwill

Goodwill is not amortized, but rather is subject to impairment testing annually (on the first day of the fourth quarter), or between annual tests whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the fair value of a reporting unit may be below its carrying amount. The first step of the impairment test requires determining the fair value of the reporting unit. We use the income approach, whereby we calculate the fair value based on the present value of estimated future cash flows using a discount rate that approximates our weighted average cost of capital. The process of evaluating the potential impairment of goodwill is subjective and requires significant estimates and assumptions about the future such as sales growth, gross margins, employment rates, capital expenditures, inflation and future economic and market conditions. Actual future results may differ from those estimates. If the carrying value of the reporting unit’s assets and liabilities, including goodwill, is in excess of its fair value, goodwill may be impaired, and we must perform a second step of comparing the implied fair value of the goodwill to its carrying value to determine the impairment charge, if any. At January 31, 2016 and February 1, 2015, we had goodwill of $18,703,000 and $18,740,000, respectively, included in other assets, primarily related to our fiscal 2011 acquisition of Rejuvenation Inc. We evaluated our goodwill for impairment and determined that the fair value of each reporting unit substantially exceeds its carrying value. Accordingly, we did not recognize any goodwill impairment in fiscal 2015, fiscal 2014 or fiscal 2013.

Self-Insured Liabilities

We are primarily self-insured for workers’ compensation, employee health benefits and product and general liability claims. We record self-insurance liabilities based on claims filed, including the development of those claims, and an estimate of claims incurred but not yet reported. Factors affecting these estimates include future

 

34


Table of Contents

inflation rates, changes in severity, benefit level changes, medical costs and claim settlement patterns. Should a different amount of claims occur compared to what was estimated, or costs of the claims increase or decrease beyond what was anticipated, reserves may need to be adjusted accordingly. We determine our workers’ compensation liability and product and general liability claims reserves based on an actuarial analysis of historical claims data. Self-insurance reserves for employee health benefits, workers’ compensation and product and general liability claims were $25,290,000 and $24,901,000 as of January 31, 2016 and February 1, 2015, respectively.

Income Taxes

Income taxes are accounted for using the asset and liability method. Under this method, deferred income taxes arise from temporary differences between the tax basis of assets and liabilities and their reported amounts in our Consolidated Financial Statements. We record reserves for our estimates of probable settlements of foreign and domestic tax examinations. At any one time, many tax years are subject to audit by various taxing jurisdictions. The results of these audits and negotiations with taxing authorities may affect the ultimate settlement of these issues. Additionally, our effective tax rate in a given financial statement period may be materially impacted by changes in the mix and level of our earnings in various taxing jurisdictions.

 

35


Table of Contents
ITEM 7A. QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

We are exposed to market risks, which include significant deterioration of the U.S. and foreign markets, changes in U.S. interest rates, foreign currency exchange rate fluctuations, and the effects of economic uncertainty which may affect the prices we pay our vendors in the foreign countries in which we do business. We do not engage in financial transactions for trading or speculative purposes.

Interest Rate Risk

Our revolving line of credit has a variable interest rate which, when drawn upon, subjects us to risks associated with changes in that interest rate. During fiscal 2015, we had borrowings of $200,000,000 under the credit facility, all of which were repaid in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2015. A hypothetical increase or decrease of one percentage point on our existing variable rate debt instrument would not materially affect our results of operations or cash flows.

In addition, we have fixed and variable income investments consisting of short-term investments classified as cash and cash equivalents, which are also affected by changes in market interest rates. As of January 31, 2016, our investments, made primarily in demand deposit accounts and money market funds, are stated at cost and approximate their fair values.

Foreign Currency Risks

We purchase a significant amount of inventory from vendors outside of the U.S. in transactions that are denominated in U.S. dollars. Approximately 1% of our international purchase transactions are in currencies other than the U.S. dollar, primarily the euro. Any foreign currency impact related to these international purchase transactions was not significant to us during fiscal 2015 or fiscal 2014. Since we pay for the majority of our international purchases in U.S. dollars, however, a decline in the U.S. dollar relative to other foreign currencies would subject us to risks associated with increased purchasing costs from our vendors in their effort to offset any lost profits associated with any currency devaluation. We cannot predict with certainty the effect these increased costs may have on our financial statements or results of operations.

In addition, our retail and/or e-commerce businesses in Canada, Australia and the United Kingdom, and our operations throughout Asia and Europe, expose us to market risk associated with foreign currency exchange rate fluctuations. Substantially all of our purchases and sales are denominated in U.S. dollars, which limits our exposure to this risk. However, some of our foreign operations have a functional currency other than the U.S. dollar. While the impact of foreign currency exchange rate fluctuations was not material to us in fiscal 2015, we have continued to see volatility in the exchange rates in the countries in which we do business. As we continue to expand globally, the foreign currency exchange risk related to our foreign operations may increase. To mitigate this risk, we hedge a portion of our foreign currency exposure with foreign currency forward contracts in accordance with our risk management policies (see Note M to our Consolidated Financial Statements).

 

36


Table of Contents
ITEM 8.  FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA

Williams-Sonoma, Inc.

Consolidated Statements of Earnings

 

In thousands, except per share amounts      Fiscal 2015         Fiscal 2014         Fiscal 2013   

E-commerce net revenues

     $ 2,522,580         $ 2,370,694         $ 2,115,022   

Retail net revenues

     2,453,510         2,328,025         2,272,867   

Net revenues

     4,976,090         4,698,719         4,387,889   

Cost of goods sold

     3,131,876         2,898,215         2,683,673   

Gross profit

     1,844,214         1,800,504         1,704,216   

Selling, general and administrative expenses

     1,355,580         1,298,239         1,252,118   

Operating income

     488,634         502,265         452,098   

Interest (income) expense, net

     627         62         (584

Earnings before income taxes

     488,007         502,203         452,682   

Income taxes

     177,939         193,349         173,780   

Net earnings

     $    310,068         $    308,854         $    278,902   

Basic earnings per share

     $          3.42         $3.30         $          2.89   

Diluted earnings per share

     $          3.37         $3.24         $          2.82   

Shares used in calculation of earnings per share:

        

Basic

     90,787         93,634         96,669   

Diluted

     92,102         95,200         98,765   

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

Williams-Sonoma, Inc.

Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income

 

In thousands      Fiscal 2015        Fiscal 2014        Fiscal 2013   

Net earnings

     $    310,068        $    308,854        $    278,902   

Other comprehensive income (loss), net of tax:

      

Foreign currency translation adjustments

     (7,958     (9,305     (7,850

Change in fair value of derivative financial instruments

     1,074        806        870   

Reclassification adjustment for realized gains on derivative financial instruments

     (1,184     (573     (129

Comprehensive income

     $    302,000        $    299,782        $    271,793   

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

37


Table of Contents

Williams-Sonoma, Inc.

Consolidated Balance Sheets

 

In thousands, except per share amounts    Jan. 31, 2016     Feb. 1, 2015  

ASSETS

    

Current assets

    

Cash and cash equivalents

     $      193,647        $     222,927   

Accounts receivable, net

     79,304        67,465   

Merchandise inventories, net

     978,138        887,701   

Prepaid catalog expenses

     28,919        33,942   

Prepaid expenses

     44,654        36,265   

Deferred income taxes, net

            130,618   

Other assets

     11,438        13,005   

Total current assets

     1,336,100        1,391,923   

Property and equipment, net

     886,813        883,012   

Non-current deferred income taxes, net

     141,784        4,265   

Other assets, net

     52,730        51,077   

Total assets

     $   2,417,427        $  2,330,277   

LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY

    

Current liabilities

    

Accounts payable

     $      447,412        $     397,037   

Accrued salaries, benefits and other

     127,122        136,012   

Customer deposits

     296,827        261,679   

Income taxes payable

     67,052        32,488   

Current portion of long-term debt

            1,968   

Other liabilities

     58,014        46,764   

Total current liabilities

     996,427        875,948   

Deferred rent and lease incentives

     173,061        166,925   

Other long-term obligations

     49,713        62,698   

Total liabilities

     1,219,201        1,105,571   

Commitments and contingencies – See Note J

    

Stockholders’ equity

    

Preferred stock: $.01 par value; 7,500 shares authorized; none issued

              

Common stock: $.01 par value; 253,125 shares authorized;

    

89,563 and 91,891 shares issued and outstanding at

January 31, 2016 and February 1, 2015, respectively

     896        919   

Additional paid-in capital

     541,307        527,261   

Retained earnings

     668,545        701,214   

Accumulated other comprehensive loss

     (10,616     (2,548

Treasury stock – at cost: 29 and 35 shares as of January 31, 2016 and February 1, 2015, respectively

     (1,906     (2,140

Total stockholders’ equity

     1,198,226        1,224,706   
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity      $   2,417,427        $  2,330,277   

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

38


Table of Contents

Williams-Sonoma, Inc.

Consolidated Statements of Stockholders’ Equity

 

    Common Stock    

Additional
Paid-in

Capital

   

Retained

Earnings

    Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income (Loss)
    Treasury
Stock
   

Total

Stockholders’

Equity

 
In thousands   Shares     Amount            
                                                         

Balance at February 3, 2013

    97,734      $    977      $   503,616      $ 790,912      $          13,633      $      $   1,309,138   

Net earnings

                         278,902                      278,902   

Foreign currency translation adjustments

                                (7,850            (7,850

Change in fair value of derivative financial instruments

                                870               870   

Reclassification adjustment for realized gains on derivative financial instruments

                                (129            (129

Exercise of stock-based awards and related tax effect

    201        2        15,339                             15,341   

Conversion/release of stock-based awards 1

    459        5        (18,101                          (18,096

Repurchases of common stock

    (4,345     (43     (17,047     (219,083            (3,101     (239,274

Stock-based compensation expense

                  38,788                             38,788   

Dividends declared

                         (121,688                   (121,688

Balance at February 2, 2014

    94,049        941        522,595        729,043        6,524        (3,101     1,256,002   

Net earnings

                         308,854                      308,854   

Foreign currency translation adjustments

                                (9,305            (9,305

Change in fair value of derivative financial instruments

                                806               806   

Reclassification adjustment for realized gains on derivative financial instruments

                                (573            (573

Exercise of stock-based awards and related tax effect

    116        1        31,021                             31,022   

Conversion/release of stock-based awards 1

    1,058        10        (56,053                          (56,043

Repurchases of common stock

    (3,332     (33     (13,776     (210,568                   (224,377

Reissuance of treasury stock under share-based compensation plans 1

                  (1,158     (737            961        (934

Stock-based compensation expense

                  44,632                             44,632   

Dividends declared

                         (125,378                   (125,378

Balance at February 1, 2015

    91,891        919        527,261        701,214        (2,548     (2,140     1,224,706   

Net earnings

                         310,068                      310,068   

Foreign currency translation adjustments

                                (7,958            (7,958

Change in fair value of derivative financial instruments

                                1,074               1,074   

Reclassification adjustment for realized gains on derivative financial instruments

                                (1,184            (1,184

Exercise of stock-based awards and related tax effect

    68        1        17,238                             17,239   

Conversion/release of stock-based awards 1

    554        6        (31,411                          (31,405

Repurchases of common stock

    (2,950     (30     (12,646     (212,319                   (224,995

Reissuance of treasury stock under share-based compensation plans 1

                  (492     (128            234        (386

Stock-based compensation expense

                  41,357                             41,357   

Dividends declared

                         (130,290                   (130,290

Balance at January 31, 2016

    89,563      $ 896      $ 541,307      $ 668,545      $ (10,616   $ (1,906   $ 1,198,226   

 

1   Amounts are shown net of shares withheld for employee taxes.

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

39


Table of Contents

Williams-Sonoma, Inc.

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

 

In thousands   Fiscal 2015     Fiscal 2014     Fiscal 2013  

Cash flows from operating activities:

     
Net earnings   $ 310,068      $ 308,854      $ 278,902   

Adjustments to reconcile net earnings to net cash provided by (used in) operating activities:

     

Depreciation and amortization

    167,760        162,273        149,795   

Loss on disposal/impairment of assets

    4,339        2,410        2,764   

Amortization of deferred lease incentives

    (24,721     (24,419     (25,382

Deferred income taxes

    (7,436     (248     (28,344

Tax benefit related to stock-based awards

    14,592        26,952        8,817   

Excess tax benefit related to stock-based awards

    (14,494     (26,560     (8,743

Stock-based compensation expense

    41,357        44,632        38,788   

Other

    149        595          

Changes in:

     

Accounts receivable

    (12,849     (9,366     786   

Merchandise inventories

    (92,647     (76,964     (174,664

Prepaid catalog expenses

    5,022        (386     3,675   

Prepaid expenses and other assets

    (9,245     (61     (13,649

Accounts payable

    60,507        4,455        135,095   

Accrued salaries, benefits and other current and long-term liabilities

    (135     8,867        43,635   

Customer deposits

    35,877        34,400        21,578   

Deferred rent and lease incentives

    31,334        23,297        13,238   

Income taxes payable

    34,548        (17,034     7,478   

Net cash provided by operating activities

    544,026        461,697        453,769   

Cash flows from investing activities:

     

Purchases of property and equipment

    (202,935     (204,800     (193,953

Restricted cash receipts

           14,289        1,766   

Proceeds from insurance reimbursements

    683        1,644        1,518   

Other

    86        267        45   

Net cash used in investing activities

    (202,166     (188,600     (190,624

Cash flows from financing activities:

     

Repurchase of common stock

    (224,995     (224,377     (239,274

Payment of dividends

    (127,636     (125,758     (111,581

Borrowings under revolving line of credit

    200,000        90,000          

Repayments of borrowings under revolving line of credit

    (200,000     (90,000       

Tax withholdings related to stock-based awards

    (31,790     (56,977     (18,096

Excess tax benefit related to stock-based awards

    14,494        26,560        8,743   

Net proceeds related to stock-based awards

    2,647        4,077        6,614   

Repayments of long-term obligations

    (1,968     (1,785     (1,724

Other

    (135     (760     (58

Net cash used in financing activities

    (369,383     (379,020     (355,376

Effect of exchange rates on cash and cash equivalents

    (1,757     (1,271     (2,203

Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents

    (29,280     (107,194     (94,434

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

    222,927        330,121        424,555   

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

  $ 193,647      $ 222,927      $ 330,121   

Supplemental disclosure of cash flow information:

     

Cash paid during the year for interest

  $ 1,989      $ 1,269      $ 1,270   

Cash paid during the year for income taxes, net of refunds

  $ 134,478      $ 172,305      $ 186,968   

Non-cash investing activities:

     

Purchases of property and equipment not yet paid for at end of period

  $ 2,715      $ 4,808      $ 9,034   

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

40


Table of Contents

Williams-Sonoma, Inc.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

Note A: Summary of Significant Accounting Policies

We are a specialty retailer of high-quality products for the home. These products, representing distinct merchandise strategies – Williams-Sonoma, Pottery Barn, Pottery Barn Kids, West Elm, PBteen, Williams-Sonoma Home, Rejuvenation, and Mark and Graham – are marketed through e-commerce websites, direct mail catalogs and 618 stores. We have retail and/or e-commerce businesses in the U.S., Canada, Australia and the United Kingdom, and ship our products to customers worldwide. Our catalogs reach customers throughout the U.S. and Australia. In addition, we have unaffiliated franchisees that operate stores and/or e-commerce websites in the Middle East, the Philippines and Mexico.

Intercompany transactions and accounts have been eliminated.

Fiscal Year

Our fiscal year ends on the Sunday closest to January 31, based on a 52 or 53-week year. Fiscal 2015, a 52-week year, ended on January 31, 2016; Fiscal 2014, a 52-week year, ended on February 1, 2015; and fiscal 2013, a 52-week year, ended on February 2, 2014.

Use of Estimates

The preparation of financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America requires us to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses and related disclosures of contingent assets and liabilities. These estimates and assumptions are evaluated on an ongoing basis and are based on historical experience and various other factors that we believe to be reasonable under the circumstances. Actual results could differ from these estimates.

Cash Equivalents

Cash equivalents include highly liquid investments with an original maturity of three months or less. As of January 31, 2016, we were invested primarily in demand deposit accounts and money market funds. Book cash overdrafts issued, but not yet presented to the bank for payment, are reclassified to accounts payable.

Restricted Cash

Restricted cash represents deposits held in trusts to secure our liabilities associated with our workers’ compensation and other insurance programs. During fiscal 2014, we redeemed restricted cash deposits of $14,289,000 previously held under collateralized trust agreements. We held no restricted cash during fiscal 2015.

Accounts Receivable and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

Accounts receivable are stated at their carrying values, net of an allowance for doubtful accounts. Accounts receivable consist primarily of credit card, franchisee and landlord receivables for which collectability is reasonably assured. Receivables are evaluated for collectability on a regular basis and an allowance for doubtful accounts is recorded, if necessary. Our allowance for doubtful accounts was not material to our financial statements as of January 31, 2016 and February 1, 2015.

Merchandise Inventories

Merchandise inventories, net of an allowance for excess quantities and obsolescence, are stated at the lower of cost (weighted average method) or market. To determine if the value of our inventory should be reduced below cost, we consider current and anticipated demand, customer preferences and age of the merchandise. The significant estimates used in inventory valuation are obsolescence (including excess and slow-moving inventory and lower of cost or market reserves) and estimates of inventory shrinkage. We reserve for obsolescence based on historical trends, aging reports, specific identification and our estimates of future sales and selling prices.

Reserves for shrinkage are estimated and recorded throughout the year, as a percentage of net sales based on historical shrinkage results, expectations of future shrinkage and current inventory levels. Actual shrinkage is

 

41


Table of Contents

recorded at year-end based on the results of our physical inventory counts and can vary from our estimates due to such factors as changes in operations, the mix of our inventory (which ranges from large furniture to small tabletop items) and execution against loss prevention initiatives in our stores, distribution centers, off-site storage locations, and with our third party warehouse and transportation providers. Accordingly, there is no shrinkage reserve at year-end.

Our obsolescence and shrinkage reserve calculations contain estimates that require management to make assumptions and to apply judgment regarding a number of factors, including market conditions, the selling environment, historical results and current inventory trends. If actual obsolescence or shrinkage estimates change from our original estimate, we will adjust our reserves accordingly throughout the year. We have made no material changes to our assumptions included in the calculations of the obsolescence and shrinkage reserves throughout the year. As of January 31, 2016 and February 1, 2015, our inventory obsolescence reserves were $9,782,000 and $10,244,000, respectively.

Advertising and Prepaid Catalog Expenses

Advertising expenses consist of media and production costs related to catalog mailings, e-commerce advertising and other direct marketing activities. All advertising costs are expensed as incurred, or upon the release of the initial advertisement, with the exception of prepaid catalog expenses. Prepaid catalog expenses consist primarily of third party incremental direct costs, including creative design, paper, printing, postage and mailing costs for all of our direct response catalogs. Such costs are capitalized as prepaid catalog expenses and are amortized over their expected period of future benefit. Each catalog is generally fully amortized over a six to nine month period, with the majority of the amortization occurring within the first four to five months. Prepaid catalog expenses are evaluated for realizability on a monthly basis by comparing the carrying amount associated with each catalog to the estimated future profitability (net revenues less merchandise cost of goods sold, selling expenses and catalog-related costs) of that catalog. If the estimated future profitability of the catalog is below its carrying amount, the catalog is impaired accordingly.

Total advertising expenses (including catalog advertising, e-commerce advertising and all other advertising costs) were approximately $333,276,000, $330,070,000 and $325,708,000 in fiscal 2015, fiscal 2014 and fiscal 2013, respectively.

Property and Equipment

Property and equipment is stated at cost. Depreciation is calculated using the straight-line method over the following estimated useful lives:

 

Leasehold improvements

   Shorter of estimated useful life or lease term (generally 3 – 22 years)

Fixtures and equipment

     2 – 20 years

Buildings and building improvements

   10 – 40 years

Capitalized software

     2 – 10 years

We review the carrying value of all long-lived assets for impairment, primarily at a store level, whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value of an asset may not be recoverable. Our impairment analyses determine whether projected cash flows from operations are sufficient to recover the carrying value of these assets. Impairment may result when the carrying value of the asset exceeds the estimated undiscounted future cash flows over its remaining useful life. For store impairment, our estimate of undiscounted future cash flows over the store lease term is based upon our experience, historical operations of the stores and estimates of future store profitability and economic conditions. The future estimates of store profitability and economic conditions require estimating such factors as sales growth, gross margin, employment rates, lease escalations, inflation and the overall economics of the retail industry, and are therefore subject to variability and difficult to predict. Actual future results may differ from those estimates. If a long-lived asset is found to be impaired, the amount recognized for impairment is equal to the difference between the asset’s net carrying value and its fair value. Long-lived assets are measured at fair value on a nonrecurring basis using Level 3 inputs as defined in the

 

42


Table of Contents

fair value hierarchy. The fair value is based on the present value of estimated future cash flows using a discount rate that approximates our weighted average cost of capital.

During fiscal 2015, fiscal 2014 and fiscal 2013, we recorded expense of approximately $2,100,000, $241,000 and $561,000, respectively, associated with asset impairment charges related to our retail stores, all of which is recorded within selling, general and administrative expenses.

For any store or facility closure where a lease obligation still exists, we record the estimated future liability associated with the rental obligation on the cease use date.

Goodwill

Goodwill is not amortized, but rather is subject to impairment testing annually (on the first day of the fourth quarter), or between annual tests whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the fair value of a reporting unit may be below its carrying amount. The first step of the impairment test requires determining the fair value of the reporting unit. We use the income approach, whereby we calculate the fair value based on the present value of estimated future cash flows using a discount rate that approximates our weighted average cost of capital. The process of evaluating the potential impairment of goodwill is subjective and requires significant estimates and assumptions about the future, such as sales growth, gross margins, employment rates, capital expenditures, inflation and future economic and market conditions. Actual future results may differ from those estimates. If the carrying value of the reporting unit’s assets and liabilities, including goodwill, is in excess of its fair value, goodwill may be impaired, and we must perform a second step of comparing the implied fair value of the goodwill to its carrying value to determine the impairment charge, if any. At January 31, 2016 and February 1, 2015, we had goodwill of $18,703,000 and $18,740,000, respectively, included in other assets, primarily related to our fiscal 2011 acquisition of Rejuvenation Inc. We did not recognize any goodwill impairment in fiscal 2015, fiscal 2014 or fiscal 2013.

Self-Insured Liabilities

We are primarily self-insured for workers’ compensation, employee health benefits and product and general liability claims. We record self-insurance liabilities based on claims filed, including the development of those claims, and an estimate of claims incurred but not yet reported. Factors affecting these estimates include future inflation rates, changes in severity, benefit level changes, medical costs and claim settlement patterns. Should a different amount of claims occur compared to what was estimated, or costs of the claims increase or decrease beyond what was anticipated, reserves may need to be adjusted accordingly. We determine our workers’ compensation liability and product and general liability claims reserves based on an actuarial analysis of historical claims data. Self-insurance reserves for employee health benefits, workers’ compensation and product and general liability claims were $25,290,000 and $24,901,000 as of January 31, 2016 and February 1, 2015, respectively.

Customer Deposits

Customer deposits are primarily comprised of unredeemed gift cards and merchandise credits and deferred revenue related to undelivered merchandise. We maintain a liability for unredeemed gift cards and merchandise credits until the earlier of redemption, escheatment or four years as we have concluded that the likelihood of our gift cards being redeemed beyond four years from the date of issuance is remote. Income from unredeemed gift cards and merchandise credits, which is recorded in other income within selling, general and administrative expense, is not material to our consolidated financial statements. Our gift cards and merchandise credits have no expiration dates.

Deferred Rent and Lease Incentives

For leases that contain fixed escalations of the minimum annual lease payment during the original term of the lease, we recognize rental expense on a straight-line basis over the lease term, including the construction period, and record the difference between rent expense and the amount currently payable as deferred rent. Deferred lease incentives include construction allowances received from landlords, which are amortized on a straight-line basis over the lease term, including the construction period.

 

43


Table of Contents

Fair Value of Financial Instruments

The carrying values of cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable, accounts payable and debt approximate their estimated fair values. We use derivative instruments to hedge against foreign currency exchange rate fluctuations. The assets or liabilities associated with our derivative financial instruments are recorded at fair value in either other current assets or other current liabilities. The fair value of our foreign currency derivative instruments is measured using the income approach whereby we use observable market data at the measurement date and standard valuation techniques to convert future amounts to a single present value amount. These observable inputs include spot rates, forward rates, interest rates and credit derivative market rates (refer to Notes M and N for additional information).

Revenue Recognition

We recognize revenues and the related cost of goods sold (including shipping costs) at the time the products are delivered to our customers. Revenue is recognized for retail sales (excluding home-delivered merchandise) at the point of sale in the store and, for home-delivered merchandise and e-commerce sales, when the merchandise is delivered to the customer. Discounts provided to customers are accounted for as a reduction of sales. We record a reserve for estimated product returns in each reporting period. Shipping and handling fees charged to the customer are recognized as revenue at the time the products are delivered to the customer. Revenues are presented net of any taxes collected from customers and remitted to governmental authorities.

Sales Returns Reserve

Our customers may return purchased items for an exchange or refund. We record a reserve for estimated product returns, net of cost of goods sold, based on historical return trends together with current product sales performance. A summary of activity in our sales returns reserve is as follows:

 

In thousands    Fiscal 2015 1     Fiscal 2014 1     Fiscal 2013 1  

Balance at beginning of year

   $ 14,782      $ 15,954      $ 14,397   

Provision for sales returns

     321,421        311,911        293,929   

Actual sales returns

     (317,090     (313,083     (292,372

Balance at end of year

   $ 19,113      $ 14,782      $ 15,954   

 

1   Amounts are shown net of cost of goods sold.

Vendor Allowances

We receive allowances or credits from certain vendors for volume rebates. We treat such volume rebates as an offset to the cost of the product or services provided at the time the expense is recorded. These allowances and credits received are recorded in both cost of goods sold and in selling, general and administrative expenses.

Cost of Goods Sold

Cost of goods sold includes cost of goods, occupancy expenses and shipping costs. Cost of goods consists of cost of merchandise, inbound freight expenses, freight-to-store expenses and other inventory related costs such as shrinkage, damages and replacements. Occupancy expenses consist of rent, depreciation and other occupancy costs, including common area maintenance, property taxes and utilities. Shipping costs consist of third party delivery services and shipping materials.

Selling, General and Administrative Expenses

Selling, general and administrative expenses consist of non-occupancy related costs associated with our retail stores, distribution warehouses, customer care centers, supply chain operations (buying, receiving and inspection) and corporate administrative functions. These costs include employment, advertising, third party credit card processing and other general expenses.

Stock-Based Compensation

We account for stock-based compensation arrangements by measuring and recognizing compensation expense in our Consolidated Financial Statements for all stock-based awards using a fair value based method. Restricted

 

44


Table of Contents

stock units are valued using the closing price of our stock on the date prior to the date of grant. The fair value of each stock-based award is amortized over the requisite service period.

Foreign Currency Translation

Some of our foreign operations have a functional currency other than the U.S. dollar. Assets and liabilities are translated into U.S. dollars using the current exchange rates in effect at the balance sheet date, while revenues and expenses are translated at the average exchange rates during the period. The resulting translation adjustments are recorded as other comprehensive income within stockholders’ equity. Gains and losses are included in selling, general and administrative expenses (except for those discussed in Note M).

Earnings Per Share

Basic earnings per share is computed as net earnings divided by the weighted average number of common shares outstanding for the period. Diluted earnings per share is computed as net earnings divided by the weighted average number of common shares outstanding for the period plus common stock equivalents. Common stock equivalents consist of shares subject to stock-based awards with exercise prices less than or equal to the average market price of our common stock for the period, to the extent their inclusion would be dilutive.

Income Taxes

Income taxes are accounted for using the asset and liability method. Under this method, deferred income taxes arise from temporary differences between the tax basis of assets and liabilities and their reported amounts in our Consolidated Financial Statements. We record reserves for our estimates of the additional income tax liability that is more likely than not to result from the ultimate resolution of foreign and domestic tax examinations. At any one time, many tax years are subject to examination by various taxing jurisdictions. The results of these audits and negotiations with taxing authorities may affect the ultimate settlement of these issues. We review and update the estimates used in the accrual for uncertain tax positions as more definitive information becomes available from taxing authorities, upon completion of tax examination, upon expiration of statutes of limitation, or upon occurrence of other events.

In order to compute income tax on an interim basis, we estimate what our effective tax rate will be for the full fiscal year and adjust these estimates throughout the year as necessary. Adjustments to our income tax provision due to changes in our estimated effective tax rate are recorded in the interim period in which the change occurs. The tax expense (or benefit) related to items other than ordinary income is individually computed and recognized when the items occur. Our effective tax rate in a given financial statement period may be materially impacted by changes in the mix and level of our earnings in various taxing jurisdictions.

New Accounting Pronouncements

In May 2014, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued Accounting Standards Update (“ASU”) 2014-09, Revenue from Contracts with Customers , to clarify the principles of recognizing revenue and create common revenue recognition guidance between U.S. Generally Accepted Accounting Principles and International Financial Reporting Standards. In addition, in March 2016, the FASB issued ASU 2016-08, Revenue from Contracts with Customers: Principal versus Agent Considerations . The amendments are intended to improve the operability and understandability of the implementation guidance on principal versus agent considerations. These ASUs are effective retrospectively for fiscal years and interim periods within those years beginning after December 15, 2017. We are currently assessing the potential impact of these ASUs on our Consolidated Financial Statements.

In November 2015, the FASB issued ASU 2015-17, Balance Sheet Classification of Deferred Taxes , which requires entities to present both deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities as noncurrent in a classified balance sheet. This ASU is effective for fiscal years and interim periods within those years beginning after

 

45


Table of Contents

December 15, 2016; however, early adoption is permitted. We early adopted this ASU prospectively and have presented both deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities as noncurrent in our Consolidated Balance Sheet as of January 31, 2016. Prior balance sheets have not been retrospectively adjusted. For the significant components of our deferred tax accounts, see Note D.

In January 2016, the FASB issued ASU 2016-01, Recognition and Measurement of Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities , which revises an entity’s accounting related to the classification and measurement of investments in equity securities and the presentation of certain fair value changes for financial liabilities measured at fair value. This ASU is effective for fiscal years and interim periods within those fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2017. We are currently assessing the potential impact of this ASU on our Consolidated Financial Statements.

In February 2016, the FASB issued ASU 2016-02, Leases , which will require lessees to recognize a right-of-use asset and a lease liability for virtually all of their leases (other than short-term leases). This ASU is effective for fiscal years and interim periods within those years beginning after December 15, 2018. We are currently assessing the potential impact of this ASU on our Consolidated Financial Statements.

Note B: Property and Equipment

Property and equipment consists of the following:

 

In thousands    Jan. 31, 2016     Feb. 1, 2015  

Leasehold improvements

   $ 861,852      $ 852,372   

Fixtures and equipment

     714,911        691,001   

Capitalized software

     455,954        431,259   

Land and buildings

     172,782        192,841   

Corporate systems projects in progress 1

     115,296        91,885   

Construction in progress 2

     20,325        10,119   

Total

         2,341,120        2,269,477   

Accumulated depreciation

     (1,454,307     (1,386,465

Property and equipment, net

   $ 886,813      $ 883,012   

 

1   Corporate systems projects in progress as of January 31, 2016 and February 1, 2015 include approximately $77.6 million and $56.8 million, respectively, for the portion of our new inventory and order management system currently under development and not ready for its intended use.
2   Construction in progress primarily consists of leasehold improvements and furniture and fixtures related to new, expanded or remodeled retail stores where construction had not been completed as of year-end.

Note C: Borrowing Arrangements

Long-term debt consists of the following:

 

In thousands    Jan. 31, 2016      Feb. 1, 2015  

Memphis-based distribution facility obligation (see Note F)

   $       $ 1,968   

Credit Facility

We have a $500,000,000 unsecured revolving line of credit (“credit facility”) that may be used to borrow revolving loans or request the issuance of letters of credit. We may, upon notice to the administrative agent, request existing or new lenders to increase the credit facility by up to $250,000,000, at such lenders’ option, to provide for a total of $750,000,000 of unsecured revolving credit. As of January 31, 2016, we were in compliance with our financial covenants under the credit facility and based on current projections, we expect to remain in compliance throughout fiscal 2016. The credit facility matures on November 19, 2019, at which time all outstanding borrowings must be repaid and all outstanding letters of credit must be cash collateralized.

 

46


Table of Contents

We may elect interest rates calculated at (i) Bank of America’s prime rate (or, if greater, the average rate on overnight federal funds plus one-half of one percent, or a rate based on LIBOR plus one percent) plus a margin based on our leverage ratio or (ii) LIBOR plus a margin based on our leverage ratio. During fiscal 2015, we had borrowings of $200,000,000 under the credit facility (at a weighted average interest rate of 1.11%), all of which were repaid in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2015, and no amounts were outstanding as of January 31, 2016. During fiscal 2014, we had borrowings of $90,000,000 under the credit facility (at a weighted average interest rate of 1.05%), all of which were repaid in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2014, and no amounts were outstanding as of February 1, 2015. Additionally, as of January 31, 2016, $13,367,000 in issued but undrawn standby letters of credit was outstanding under the credit facility. The standby letters of credit were issued to secure the liabilities associated with workers’ compensation and other insurance programs.

Letter of Credit Facilities

We have three unsecured letter of credit reimbursement facilities for a total of $70,000,000, each of which matures on August 27, 2016. The letter of credit facilities contain covenants that are consistent with our unsecured revolving line of credit. Interest on unreimbursed amounts under the letter of credit facilities accrues at the lender’s prime rate (or, if greater, the average rate on overnight federal funds plus one-half of one percent) plus 2.0%. As of January 31, 2016, an aggregate of $6,088,000 was outstanding under the letter of credit facilities, which represents only a future commitment to fund inventory purchases to which we had not taken legal title. The latest expiration possible for any future letters of credit issued under the facilities is January 24, 2017.

Note D: Income Taxes

The components of earnings before income taxes, by tax jurisdiction, are as follows:

 

In thousands    Fiscal 2015      Fiscal 2014      Fiscal 2013  

United States

   $     462,701       $     482,739       $     448,764   

Foreign

     25,306         19,464         3,918   

Total earnings before income taxes

   $ 488,007       $ 502,203       $ 452,682   

The provision for income taxes consists of the following:

 

In thousands    Fiscal 2015     Fiscal 2014     Fiscal 2013  

Current

      

Federal

   $     156,812      $     157,227      $     173,686   

State

     22,969        31,959        25,748   

Foreign

     5,594        4,411        2,690   

Total current

     185,375        193,597        202,124   

Deferred

      

Federal

     (6,093     2,719        (26,324

State

     1,258        (2,547     (1,277

Foreign

     (2,601     (420     (743

Total deferred

     (7,436     (248     (28,344

Total provision

   $ 177,939      $ 193,349      $ 173,780   

We have historically elected not to provide for U.S. income taxes with respect to the undistributed earnings of our foreign subsidiaries as we intended to utilize those earnings in our foreign operations for an indefinite period of time. As of January 31, 2016, the accumulated undistributed earnings of all foreign subsidiaries were approximately $66,500,000 and are sufficient to support our anticipated future cash needs for our foreign operations. We currently intend to utilize those undistributed earnings for an indefinite period of time and will only repatriate such earnings when it is tax effective to do so. If we did not consider these earnings to be indefinitely reinvested, the deferred tax liability would have been in the range of $8,000,000 to $12,000,000 at January 31, 2016.

 

47


Table of Contents

A reconciliation of income taxes at the federal statutory corporate rate to the effective rate is as follows:

 

     Fiscal 2015     Fiscal 2014     Fiscal 2013  

Federal income taxes at the statutory rate

     35.0%        35.0%        35.0%   

State income tax rate

     3.2%        4.0%        3.7%   

Other

     (1.7%     (0.5%     (0.3%

Effective tax rate

     36.5%        38.5%        38.4%   

Significant components of our deferred tax accounts are as follows:

 

Deferred tax assets (liabilities), in thousands    Jan. 31, 2016     Feb. 1, 2015  

Customer deposits

   $ 64,742      $ 60,989   

Merchandise inventories

     31,752        30,328   

Stock-based compensation

     21,365        19,857   

Deferred rent

     19,952        18,925   

Accrued liabilities

     17,028        28,866   

Compensation

     15,776        15,968   

State taxes

     6,723        7,061   

Executive deferral plan

     6,003        5,437   

Deferred lease incentives

     (36,475     (37,098

Prepaid catalog expenses

     (10,883     (12,753

Depreciation

     (4,527     (9,888

Other

     11,451        8,759   

Valuation allowance

     (1,123     (1,568

Total deferred tax assets, net

   $        141,784      $      134,883   

As of January 31, 2016, we adopted ASU 2015-17, Balance Sheet Classification of Deferred Taxes . We have adopted this ASU prospectively and have presented both deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities as noncurrent in our Consolidated Balance Sheet as of January 31, 2016. Prior balance sheets have not been retrospectively adjusted (see Note A).

The following table summarizes the activity related to our gross unrecognized tax benefits:

 

In thousands    Fiscal 2015     Fiscal 2014     Fiscal 2013  

Balance at beginning of year

   $       14,359      $       10,765      $ 8,990   

Increases related to current year’s tax positions

     2,765        3,093        3,351   

Increases related to prior years’ tax positions

     101        2,007        328   

Decreases related to prior years’ tax positions

     (341     (138     (42

Settlements

     (2,912     (1,144     (170

Lapses in statute of limitations

     (682     (224     (1,692

Balance at end of year

   $ 13,290      $ 14,359      $       10,765   

As of January 31, 2016, we had $13,290,000 of gross unrecognized tax benefits, of which $8,948,000 would, if recognized, affect the effective tax rate.

We accrue interest and penalties related to unrecognized tax benefits in the provision for income taxes. As of January 31, 2016 and February 1, 2015, our accruals for the payment of interest and penalties totaled $2,649,000 and $2,412,000, respectively, primarily related to the payment of interest.

Due to the potential resolution of state issues, it is reasonably possible that the balance of our gross unrecognized tax benefits could decrease within the next twelve months by a range of $0 to $2,100,000.

We file income tax returns in the U.S. federal jurisdiction and various state and foreign jurisdictions. The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) has concluded examination of our U.S. federal income tax returns for years prior to fiscal 2011 without any significant adjustments. Substantially all material state, local and foreign income tax examinations have been concluded through fiscal 2004.

 

48


Table of Contents

Note E: Accounting for Leases

Operating Leases

We lease store locations, distribution centers, customer care centers, corporate facilities and certain equipment for original terms ranging generally from 3 to 22 years. Certain leases contain renewal options for periods up to 20 years. The rental payments for our store leases are typically structured as either: minimum rent; rent based on a percentage of store sales; minimum rent plus additional rent based on a percentage of store sales; or rent based on a percentage of store sales if a specified store sales threshold or contractual obligation of the landlord has not been met. Contingent rental payments, including rental payments that are based on a percentage of sales, cannot be predicted with certainty at the onset of the lease term. Accordingly, such contingent rental payments are recorded as incurred each period and are excluded from our calculation of deferred rent liability.

Total rent expense for all operating leases was as follows:

 

In thousands    Fiscal 2015     Fiscal 2014     Fiscal 2013  

Rent expense

   $ 224,564      $ 215,221      $ 201,727   

Contingent rent expense

     33,985        32,699        34,608   

Rent expense before deferred lease incentive income

     258,549        247,920        236,335   

Deferred lease incentive income

     (24,679     (24,420     (25,385

Less: sublease rental income

     (608     (560     (536

Total rent expense 1

   $     233,262      $     222,940      $     210,414   

 

1   Excludes all other occupancy-related costs including depreciation, common area maintenance, property taxes and utilities.

The aggregate future minimum annual cash rental payments under non-cancelable operating leases in effect at January 31, 2016 were as follows:

 

In thousands

    Lease Commitments 1   

Fiscal 2016

    $    257,805   

Fiscal 2017

    242,036   

Fiscal 2018

    218,381   

Fiscal 2019

    197,055   

Fiscal 2020

    168,046   

Thereafter

    650,585   

Total

    $ 1,733,908   

 

1   Projected cash payments include only those amounts that are fixed and determinable as of the reporting date and are not necessarily representative of future expected rent expense. We currently pay rent for certain store locations based on a percentage of store sales. As future store sales cannot be predicted with certainty, projected payments for these locations are based on minimum rent, which is generally higher than rent based on a percentage of store sales. We incur other lease obligation expenses, such as common area maintenance and other executory costs, which are not fixed in nature and are thus not included in the future projected cash payments reflected above. In addition, projected cash payments do not include any benefit from deferred lease incentive income, which is reflected within “Total rent expense” above.

Note F: Memphis-Based Distribution Facilities

Our Memphis-based distribution facility includes an operating lease entered into in August 1990 for a distribution facility in Memphis, Tennessee. The lessor is a general partnership comprised of the estate of W. Howard Lester, our former Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer, and the estate of James A. McMahan, a former Director Emeritus and significant stockholder, and two unrelated parties. The partnership does not have operations separate from the leasing of this distribution facility and does not have lease agreements with any unrelated third parties. The terms of the lease automatically renewed until the bonds that financed the construction of the facility were fully repaid during the second quarter of fiscal 2015. Simultaneously, we entered into an agreement with the partnership to lease the facility through July 2017. We made annual rental payments

 

49


Table of Contents

of approximately $3,050,000, $2,432,000 and $2,448,000 including applicable taxes, insurance and maintenance expenses in fiscal 2015, fiscal 2014 and fiscal 2013, respectively.

Prior to August 2, 2015, the partnership described above qualified as a variable interest entity and was consolidated by us due to its related party relationship and our obligation to renew the lease until the bonds were fully repaid. Accordingly, as of August 2, 2015, this facility was no longer being consolidated by us.

Note G: Earnings Per Share

The following is a reconciliation of net earnings and the number of shares used in the basic and diluted earnings per share computations:

 

In thousands, except per share amounts    Net Earnings      Weighted
Average Shares
     Earnings
Per Share
 

Fiscal 2015

        

Basic

   $       310,068         90,787       $        3.42   

Effect of dilutive stock-based awards

        1,315      

Diluted

   $ 310,068         92,102       $ 3.37   

Fiscal 2014

        

Basic

   $ 308,854         93,634       $ 3.30   

Effect of dilutive stock-based awards

        1,566      

Diluted

   $ 308,854         95,200       $ 3.24   

Fiscal 2013

        

Basic

   $ 278,902         96,669       $ 2.89   

Effect of dilutive stock-based awards

        2,096      

Diluted

   $ 278,902         98,765       $ 2.82   

Stock-based awards of 12,000 and 21,000 were excluded from the computation of diluted earnings per share in fiscal 2015 and fiscal 2014, respectively, as their inclusion would be anti-dilutive. There were no stock-based awards excluded from the computation of diluted earnings per share in fiscal 2013.

Note H: Stock-Based Compensation

Equity Award Programs

Our Amended and Restated 2001 Long-Term Incentive Plan (the “Plan”) provides for grants of incentive stock options, nonqualified stock options, stock-settled stock appreciation rights (collectively, “option awards”), restricted stock awards, restricted stock units (including those that are performance-based), deferred stock awards (collectively, “stock awards”) and dividend equivalents up to an aggregate of 32,310,000 shares. As of January 31, 2016, there were approximately 9,439,000 shares available for future grant. Awards may be granted under the Plan to officers, employees and non-employee members of the board of directors of the company (the “Board”) or any parent or subsidiary. Shares issued as a result of award exercises or releases are primarily funded with the issuance of new shares.

Option Awards

Annual grants of option awards are limited to 1,000,000 shares on a per person basis and have a maximum term of seven years. The exercise price of these option awards is not less than 100% of the closing price of our stock on the day prior to the grant date. Option awards granted to employees generally vest evenly over a period of four years for service-based awards. Certain option awards contain vesting acceleration clauses resulting from events including, but not limited to, retirement, merger or a similar corporate event.

Stock Awards

Annual grants of stock awards are limited to 1,000,000 shares on a per person basis. Stock awards granted to employees generally vest evenly over a period of four years for service-based awards. Certain performance-based awards, which have variable payout conditions based on predetermined financial targets, vest three years from

 

50


Table of Contents

the date of grant. Certain stock awards and other agreements contain vesting acceleration clauses resulting from events including, but not limited to, retirement, merger or a similar corporate event. Stock awards granted to non-employee Board members generally vest in one year. Non-employee Board members automatically receive stock awards on the date of their initial election to the Board and annually thereafter on the date of the annual meeting of stockholders (so long as they continue to serve as a non-employee Board member).

Stock-Based Compensation Expense

During fiscal 2015, fiscal 2014 and fiscal 2013, we recognized total stock-based compensation expense, as a component of selling, general and administrative expenses, of $41,357,000, $44,632,000 and $38,788,000, respectively. As of January 31, 2016, there was $52,481,000 of unrecognized stock-based compensation expense (net of estimated forfeitures), which we expect to recognize on a straight-line basis over a weighted average remaining service period of approximately two years. At each reporting period, all compensation expense attributable to vested awards has been fully recognized.

Stock Options

The following table summarizes our stock option activity during fiscal 2015:

 

      Shares    

Weighted
Average

Exercise
Price

     Weighted Average
Contractual Term
Remaining (Years)
     Intrinsic
Value 1
 

Balance at February 1, 2015 (100% vested)

     107,000      $      39.05                     

Granted

                    

Exercised

     (68,500   $ 38.64         

Cancelled

                                

Balance at January 31, 2016 (100% vested)

     38,500      $ 39.80         0.31       $ 457,000   

 

1   Intrinsic value for outstanding and vested options is based on the excess of the market value of our common stock on the last business day of the fiscal year (or $51.66) over the exercise price.

No stock options were granted in fiscal 2015, fiscal 2014 or fiscal 2013. The total intrinsic value of stock options exercised was $2,722,000 for fiscal 2015, $3,564,000 for fiscal 2014 and $3,834,000 for fiscal 2013. Intrinsic value for options exercised is based on the excess of the market value over the exercise price on the date of exercise.

Stock-Settled Stock Appreciation Rights

A stock-settled stock appreciation right is an award that allows the recipient to receive common stock equal to the appreciation in the fair market value of our common stock between the grant date and the conversion date for the number of shares converted.

The following table summarizes our stock-settled stock appreciation right activity during fiscal 2015:

 

      Shares    

Weighted

Average

Conversion
Price 1

    

Weighted Average

Contractual Term
Remaining (Years)

     Intrinsic
Value 2
 

Balance at February 1, 2015

     1,159,948      $         29.36                     

Granted

                    

Converted into common stock

     (521,913     31.26         

Cancelled

     (3,426     35.10                     

Balance at January 31, 2016 (100% vested)

     634,609      $ 27.76         2.23       $ 15,165,000   

 

1   Conversion price is equal to the market value on the date of grant.
2   Intrinsic value for outstanding and vested rights is based on the excess of the market value of our common stock on the last business day of the fiscal year (or $51.66) over the conversion price.

 

51


Table of Contents

No stock-settled stock appreciation rights were granted in fiscal 2015, fiscal 2014 or fiscal 2013. The total intrinsic value of awards converted to common stock was $24,465,000 for fiscal 2015, $26,837,000 for fiscal 2014 and $18,046,000 for fiscal 2013. Intrinsic value for conversions is based on the excess of the market value on the date of conversion over the conversion price.

Restricted Stock Units

The following table summarizes our restricted stock unit activity during fiscal 2015:

 

      Shares    

Weighted
Average
Grant Date

Fair Value

    

Weighted Average

Contractual Term
Remaining (Years)

    

Intrinsic

Value 1

 

Balance at February 1, 2015

     2,313,477      $        52.47                     

Granted

     821,072        76.19         

Released

     (656,452     51.34         

Cancelled

     (189,139     57.45                     

Balance at January 31, 2016

     2,288,958      $ 60.89         2.50       $ 118,248,000   

Vested plus expected to vest at January 31, 2016

     1,436,810      $ 61.20         2.35       $ 74,226,000   

 

1   Intrinsic value for outstanding and unvested restricted stock units is based on the market value of our common stock on the last business day of the fiscal year (or $51.66).

The following table summarizes additional information about restricted stock units:

 

      Fiscal 2015      Fiscal 2014      Fiscal 2013  

Weighted average grant date fair value per share of awards granted

   $ 76.19       $ 63.18       $ 53.59   

Intrinsic value of awards released 1

   $ 50,773,000       $ 101,189,000       $ 24,568,000   

 

1   Intrinsic value for releases is based on the market value on the date of release.

Tax Effect

We present tax benefits resulting from the settlement of stock-based awards as operating cash flows in our Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows. Tax deductions in excess of the cumulative compensation cost recognized for stock-based awards settled are presented as a financing cash inflow and an operating cash outflow. During fiscal 2015, fiscal 2014 and fiscal 2013, net proceeds related to stock-based awards was $2,647,000, $4,077,000 and $6,614,000, respectively, and the current tax benefit related to stock-based awards totaled $30,352,000, $52,798,000 and $17,940,000, respectively.

Note I: Williams-Sonoma, Inc. 401(k) Plan and Other Employee Benefits

We have a defined contribution retirement plan, the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. 401(k) Plan (the “401(k) Plan”), which is intended to be qualified under Internal Revenue Code sections 401(a), 401(k), 401(m) and 4975(e)(7). The 401(k) Plan permits eligible employees to make salary deferral contributions up to 75% of their eligible compensation each pay period (7% for highly-compensated employees). Employees designate the funds in which their contributions are invested. Each participant may choose to have his or her salary deferral contributions and earnings thereon invested in one or more investment funds, including our company stock fund.

Our matching contribution is equal to 50% of each participant’s salary deferral contribution, taking into account only those contributions that do not exceed 6% of the participant’s eligible pay for the pay period. Each participant’s matching contribution is earned on a semi-annual basis with respect to eligible salary deferrals for those employees that are employed with the company on June 30th or December 31st of the year in which the deferrals are made. Each associate must complete one year of service prior to receiving company matching contributions. For the first five years of the participant’s employment, all matching contributions vest at the rate of 20% per year of service, measuring service from the participant’s hire date. Thereafter, all matching contributions vest immediately. Our contributions to the plan were $6,915,000, $6,038,000 and $5,538,000 in fiscal 2015, fiscal 2014 and fiscal 2013, respectively.

 

52


Table of Contents

The 401(k) Plan consists of two parts: a profit sharing plan portion and a stock bonus plan/employee stock ownership plan (the “ESOP”). The ESOP portion is the portion that is invested in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund. The profit sharing and ESOP components of the 401(k) Plan are considered a single plan under Internal Revenue Code section 414(l).

We also have a nonqualified executive deferred compensation plan that provides supplemental retirement income benefits for a select group of management. This plan permits eligible employees to make salary and bonus deferrals that are 100% vested. We have an unsecured obligation to pay in the future the value of the deferred compensation adjusted to reflect the performance, whether positive or negative, of selected investment measurement options chosen by each participant during the deferral period. As of January 31, 2016 and February 1, 2015, $15,929,000 and $14,446,000, respectively, is included in other long-term obligations related to these deferred compensation liabilities. Additionally, we have purchased life insurance policies on certain participants to potentially offset these unsecured obligations. The cash surrender value of these policies was $17,112,000 and $17,422,000 as of January 31, 2016 and February 1, 2015, respectively, and is included in other assets, net.

Note J: Commitments and Contingencies

We are involved in lawsuits, claims and proceedings incident to the ordinary course of our business. These disputes, which are not currently material, are increasing in number as our business expands and our company grows larger. We review the need for any loss contingency reserves and establish reserves when, in the opinion of management, it is probable that a matter would result in liability, and the amount of loss, if any, can be reasonably estimated. In view of the inherent difficulty of predicting the outcome of these matters, it may not be possible to determine whether any loss is probable or to reasonably estimate the amount of the loss until the case is close to resolution, in which case no reserve is established until that time. Any claims against us, whether meritorious or not, could be time consuming, result in costly litigation, require significant amounts of management time and result in the diversion of significant operational resources. The results of these lawsuits, claims and proceedings cannot be predicted with certainty. However, we believe that the ultimate resolution of these current matters will not have a material adverse effect on our consolidated financial statements taken as a whole.

Note K: Stock Repurchase Program and Dividends

During fiscal 2015, we repurchased 2,950,438 shares of our common stock at an average cost of $76.26 per share and a total cost of approximately $224,995,000 under our $750,000,000 stock repurchase program. In addition, in March 2016, we announced that our Board of Directors had authorized a new stock repurchase program to purchase up to $500,000,000 of our common stock that we intend to execute over the next three years. As of January 31, 2016, we held treasury stock of $1,906,000 which represents the cost of shares available for issuance in certain foreign jurisdictions as a result of future stock-based award settlements.

During fiscal 2014, we repurchased 3,331,557 shares of our common stock at an average cost of $67.35 per share and a total cost of approximately $224,377,000. During fiscal 2013, we repurchased 4,344,962 shares of our common stock at an average cost of $55.07 per share and a total cost of approximately $239,274,000.

Stock repurchases under these programs may be made through open market and privately negotiated transactions at times and in such amounts as management deems appropriate. The timing and actual number of shares repurchased will depend on a variety of factors including price, corporate and regulatory requirements, capital availability and other market conditions. The stock repurchase programs do not have an expiration date and may be limited or terminated at any time without prior notice.

Total cash dividends declared in fiscal 2015, fiscal 2014 and fiscal 2013, were approximately $130,290,000, or $1.40 per common share, $125,378,000, or $1.32 per common share and $121,688,000, or $1.24 per common share, respectively. In March 2016, we announced that our Board of Directors had authorized a 6% increase in our quarterly cash dividend, from $0.35 to $0.37 per common share, subject to capital availability. Our quarterly cash dividend may be limited or terminated at any time.

 

53


Table of Contents

Note L: Segment Reporting

We have two reportable segments, e-commerce and retail. The e-commerce segment has the following merchandising strategies: Williams-Sonoma, Pottery Barn, Pottery Barn Kids, West Elm, PBteen, Williams-Sonoma Home, Rejuvenation and Mark and Graham, which sell our products through our e-commerce websites and direct-mail catalogs. Our e-commerce merchandising strategies are operating segments, which have been aggregated into one reportable segment, e-commerce. The retail segment has the following merchandising strategies: Williams-Sonoma, Pottery Barn, Pottery Barn Kids, West Elm and Rejuvenation, which sell our products through our retail stores. Our retail merchandising strategies are operating segments, which have been aggregated into one reportable segment, retail. Management’s expectation is that the overall economic characteristics of each of our operating segments will be similar over time based on management’s judgment that the operating segments have had similar historical economic characteristics and are expected to have similar long-term financial performance in the future.

These reportable segments are strategic business units that offer similar products for the home. They are managed separately because the business units utilize two distinct distribution and marketing strategies. Based on management’s best estimate, our operating segments include allocations of certain expenses, including advertising and employment costs, to the extent they have been determined to benefit both channels. These operating segments are aggregated at the channel level for reporting purposes due to the fact that our brands are interdependent for economies of scale and we do not maintain fully allocated income statements at the brand level. As a result, material financial decisions related to the brands are made at the channel level. Furthermore, it is not practicable for us to report revenue by product group.

We use operating income to evaluate segment profitability. Operating income is defined as earnings (loss) before net interest income (expense) and income taxes. Unallocated costs before interest and income taxes include corporate employee-related costs, occupancy expenses (including depreciation expense), administrative costs and third party service costs, primarily in our corporate administrative and systems departments. Unallocated assets include corporate cash and cash equivalents, deferred income taxes, the net book value of corporate facilities and related information systems, and other corporate long-lived assets.

Income tax information by reportable segment has not been included as income taxes are calculated at a company-wide level and are not allocated to each reportable segment.

 

54


Table of Contents

Segment Information

 

In thousands    E-commerce      Retail      Unallocated     Total  

Fiscal 2015

          

Net revenues 1

   $   2,522,580       $   2,453,510       $      $   4,976,090   

Depreciation and amortization expense

     32,056         83,027         52,677        167,760   

Operating income

     562,081         239,288         (312,735     488,634   

Assets 2

     625,951         1,049,892         741,584        2,417,427   

Capital expenditures

     22,293         102,717         77,925        202,935   

Fiscal 2014

          

Net revenues 1

   $ 2,370,694       $ 2,328,025       $              —      $ 4,698,719   

Depreciation and amortization expense

     32,116         80,154         50,003        162,273   

Operating income

     560,396         248,535         (306,666     502,265   

Assets 2

     600,503         1,028,293         701,481        2,330,277   

Capital expenditures

     41,633         97,247         65,920        204,800   

Fiscal 2013

          

Net revenues 1

   $ 2,115,022       $ 2,272,867       $      $ 4,387,889   

Depreciation and amortization expense

     25,588         78,423         45,784        149,795   

Operating income

     502,143         248,894         (298,939     452,098   

Assets 2

     517,086         975,994         843,654        2,336,734   

Capital expenditures

     38,195         89,331         66,427        193,953   

 

1   Includes net revenues related to our international operations (including our operations in Canada, Australia, the United Kingdom and our franchise businesses) of approximately $298.9 million, $235.8 million and $215.5 million in fiscal 2015, fiscal 2014 and fiscal 2013, respectively.
2   Includes long-term assets related to our international operations of approximately $61.7 million, $58.3 million and $61.4 million in fiscal 2015, fiscal 2014 and fiscal 2013, respectively.

Note M: Derivative Financial Instruments

We have retail and/or e-commerce businesses in Canada, Australia and the United Kingdom, and operations throughout Asia and Europe, which expose us to market risk associated with foreign currency exchange rate fluctuations. Substantially all of our purchases and sales are denominated in U.S. dollars, which limits our exposure to this risk. To mitigate this risk, we hedge a portion of our foreign currency exposure with foreign currency forward contracts in accordance with our risk management policies. We do not enter into such contracts for speculative purposes.

The assets or liabilities associated with the derivative instruments are measured at fair value and recorded in either other current assets or other current liabilities. As discussed below, the accounting for gains and losses resulting from changes in fair value depends on whether the derivative instrument is designated as a hedge and qualifies for hedge accounting in accordance with the Financial Accounting Standards Board Accounting Standards Codification (“ASC”) 815, Derivatives and Hedging .

Cash Flow Hedges

We enter into foreign currency forward contracts designated as cash flow hedges (to sell Canadian dollars and purchase U.S. dollars) for forecasted inventory purchases in U.S. dollars by our foreign subsidiaries. These hedges generally have terms of up to 12 months. All hedging relationships are formally documented, and the forward contracts are designed to mitigate foreign currency exchange risk on hedged transactions. We record the effective portion of changes in the fair value of our cash flow hedges in other comprehensive income (“OCI”) until the earlier of when the hedged forecasted inventory purchase occurs or the respective contract reaches maturity. Subsequently, as the inventory is sold to the customer, we reclassify amounts previously recorded in OCI to cost of goods sold. Changes in the fair value of the forward contract related to interest charges (or forward points) are excluded from the assessment and measurement of hedge effectiveness and are recorded immediately

 

55


Table of Contents

in other income (expense), net. Based on the rates in effect as of January 31, 2016, we expect to reclassify a net gain of approximately $1,171,000 from OCI to cost of goods sold over the next 12 months.

We also enter into non-designated foreign currency forward contracts (to sell Australian dollars and purchase U.S. dollars) to reduce the exchange risk associated with our assets and liabilities denominated in a foreign currency. Any foreign exchange gains (losses) related to these contracts are recognized in other income (expense), net.

As of January 31, 2016, and February 1, 2015, we had foreign currency forward contracts outstanding (in U.S. dollars) with notional values as follows:

 

In thousands    Jan. 31, 2016      Feb. 1, 2015  

Contracts designated as cash flow hedges

   $ 24,500       $ 15,900   

Contracts not designated as cash flow hedges

   $ 40,000       $ 21,000   

Hedge effectiveness is evaluated prospectively at inception, on an ongoing basis, as well as retrospectively using regression analysis. Any measureable ineffectiveness of the hedge is recorded in other income (expense), net. No gain or loss was recognized for cash flow hedges due to hedge ineffectiveness and all hedges were deemed effective for assessment purposes for fiscal 2015, fiscal 2014 and fiscal 2013.

The effect of derivative instruments in our Consolidated Financial Statements, pre tax, was as follows:

 

In thousands   Fiscal 2015     Fiscal 2014     Fiscal 2013  

Net gain recognized in OCI

  $ 1,454      $ 1,153      $ 870   

Net gain reclassified from OCI into cost of goods sold

  $ 1,605      $ 573      $ 129   

Net foreign exchange gain (loss) recognized in other income (expense):

     

Instruments designated as cash flow hedges 1

  $ (66   $ (155   $ (109

Instruments not designated or de-designated 2

  $ 2,838      $ (1,795   $ 906   

 

1   Changes in fair value of the forward contract related to interest charges (or forward points).
2   Changes in fair value for instruments not designated as cash flow hedges as well as de-designated instruments.

The fair values of our derivative financial instruments are presented below. All fair values were measured using Level 2 inputs as defined by the fair value hierarchy described in Note N.

 

In thousands   Balance sheet location   Jan. 31, 2016     Feb. 1, 2015  

Derivatives designated as hedging instruments:

     

Cash flow hedge foreign currency forward contracts

  Other current assets   $ 866      $ 1,015   

Cash flow hedge foreign currency forward contracts

  Other current liabilities     (115     (9
Total, net       $ 751      $ 1,006   

Derivatives not designated as hedging instruments:

     

Foreign currency forward contracts

  Other current assets   $      $ 427   

Foreign currency forward contracts

  Other current liabilities     (471       
Total, net       $ (471   $ 427   

We record all derivative assets and liabilities on a gross basis. They do not meet the balance sheet netting criteria as discussed in ASC 210, Balance Sheet , because we do not have master netting agreements established with our derivative counterparties that would allow for net settlement.

 

56


Table of Contents

Note N: Fair Value Measurements

Fair value is the price that would be received from selling an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date.

We determine the fair value of financial and non-financial assets and liabilities using the fair value hierarchy established by ASC 820, Fair Value Measurement , which defines three levels of inputs that may be used to measure fair value, as follows:

 

  Level 1: inputs which include quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities;

 

  Level 2: inputs which include observable inputs other than Level 1 inputs, such as quoted prices in active markets for similar assets or liabilities; quoted prices for identical or similar assets or liabilities in markets that are not active; or other inputs that are observable or can be corroborated by observable market data for substantially the full term of the asset or liability; and

 

  Level 3: inputs which include unobservable inputs that are supported by little or no market activity and that are significant to the fair value of the underlying asset or liability.

The fair values of our cash and cash equivalents are based on Level 1 inputs, which include quoted prices in active markets for identical assets.

Foreign Currency Derivatives and Hedging Instruments

We use the income approach to value our derivatives using observable Level 2 market data at the measurement date and standard valuation techniques to convert future amounts to a single present value amount, assuming that participants are motivated but not compelled to transact. Level 2 inputs are limited to quoted prices that are observable for the assets and liabilities, which include interest rates and credit risk ratings. We use mid-market pricing as a practical expedient for fair value measurements. Key inputs for currency derivatives are the spot rates, forward rates, interest rates and credit derivative market rates.

The counterparties associated with our foreign currency forward contracts are large credit-worthy financial institutions, and the derivatives transacted with these entities are relatively short in duration, therefore, we do not consider counterparty concentration and non-performance to be material risks at this time. Both we and our counterparties are expected to perform under the contractual terms of the instruments. None of the derivative contracts entered into are subject to credit risk-related contingent features or collateral requirements.

Property and Equipment

We review the carrying value of all long-lived assets for impairment, primarily at a store level, whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value of an asset may not be recoverable. We measure these assets at fair value on a nonrecurring basis using Level 3 inputs as defined in the fair value hierarchy. The fair value is based on the present value of estimated future cash flows using a discount rate that approximates our weighted average cost of capital.

There were no transfers between Level 1, 2 or 3 categories during fiscal 2015 and fiscal 2014.

 

57


Table of Contents

Note O. Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income

Changes in accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) by component, net of tax, are as follows:

 

In thousands    Foreign Currency
Translation
    Cash Flow
Hedges
    Accumulated Other
Comprehensive
Income (Loss)
 

Balance at February 3, 2013

   $                 13,633      $             —      $                   13,633   

Foreign currency translation adjustments

     (7,850            (7,850

Change in fair value of derivative financial instruments

            870        870   

Reclassification adjustment for realized gains on derivative financial instruments 1

            (129     (129

Other comprehensive income (loss)

     (7,850     741        (7,109

Balance at February 2, 2014

     5,783        741        6,524   

Foreign currency translation adjustments

     (9,305            (9,305

Change in fair value of derivative financial instruments

            806        806   

Reclassification adjustment for realized gains on derivative financial instruments 1

            (573     (573

Other comprehensive income (loss)

     (9,305     233        (9,072

Balance at February 1, 2015

     (3,522     974        (2,548

Foreign currency translation adjustments

     (7,958            (7,958

Change in fair value of derivative financial instruments

            1,074        1,074   

Reclassification adjustment for realized gains on derivative financial instruments 1

            (1,184     (1,184

Other comprehensive income (loss)

     (7,958     (110     (8,068

Balance at January 31, 2016

   $ (11,480   $ 864      $ (10,616

 

1   Refer to Note M for additional disclosures about reclassifications out of accumulated other comprehensive income and their corresponding effects on the respective line items in the Consolidated Statements of Earnings.

 

58


Table of Contents

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

To the Board of Directors and Stockholders of Williams-Sonoma, Inc.:

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Williams-Sonoma, Inc. and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of January 31, 2016 and February 1, 2015, and the related consolidated statements of earnings, comprehensive income, stockholders’ equity and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended January 31, 2016. We also have audited the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of January 31, 2016, based on criteria established in Internal Control — Integrated Framework (2013)  issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. The Company’s management is responsible for these consolidated financial statements, for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting, and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying “Management’s Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting.” Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements and an opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement and whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audits of the financial statements included examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audits also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinions.

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed by, or under the supervision of, the company’s principal executive and principal financial officers, or persons performing similar functions, and effected by the company’s board of directors, management, and other personnel to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of the inherent limitations of internal control over financial reporting, including the possibility of collusion or improper management override of controls, material misstatements due to error or fraud may not be prevented or detected on a timely basis. Also, projections of any evaluation of the effectiveness of the internal control over financial reporting to future periods are subject to the risk that the controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

 

59


Table of Contents

In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Williams-Sonoma, Inc. and subsidiaries as of January 31, 2016 and February 1, 2015, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended January 31, 2016, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. Also, in our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of January 31, 2016, based on the criteria established in Internal Control — Integrated Framework (2013)  issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.

As discussed in Note A to the consolidated financial statements, the Company changed its method of accounting for deferred income taxes in 2015 due to the adoption of ASU 2015-17, “Balance Sheet Classifications of Deferred Taxes.”

/s/ DELOITTE & TOUCHE LLP

San Francisco, California

March 31, 2016

 

60


Table of Contents

Quarterly Financial Information

(Unaudited)

 

In thousands, except per share amounts                                  

Fiscal 2015

    

 

First

Quarter

  

  

    

 

Second

Quarter

  

  

    

 

Third

Quarter

  

  

    

 

Fourth

Quarter

  

  

    

 

Full

Year

  

  

Net revenues

     $1,030,676       $ 1,127,028       $ 1,232,082       $ 1,586,304       $ 4,976,090   

Gross profit

     378,841         406,625         451,188         607,560         1,844,214   

Operating income

     71,928         83,343         110,683         222,680         488,634   

Net earnings

     44,790         53,668         70,482         141,128         310,068   

Basic earnings per share 1

     $         0.49       $ 0.59       $ 0.78       $ 1.57       $ 3.42   

Diluted earnings per share 1

     $         0.48       $ 0.58       $ 0.77       $ 1.55       $ 3.37   

Fiscal 2014

    

 

First

Quarter

  

  

    

 

Second

Quarter

  

  

    

 

Third

Quarter

  

  

    

 

Fourth

Quarter

  

  

    

 

Full

Year

  

  

Net revenues

     $   974,330       $ 1,039,102       $ 1,143,162       $ 1,542,125       $ 4,698,719   

Gross profit

     368,408         382,098         431,407         618,591         1,800,504   

Operating income

     74,326         85,336         104,720         237,883         502,265   

Net earnings

     46,162         50,747         64,908         147,037         308,854   

Basic earnings per share 1

     $         0.49       $ 0.54       $ 0.70       $ 1.60       $ 3.30   

Diluted earnings per share 1

     $         0.48       $ 0.53       $ 0.68       $ 1.57       $ 3.24   

 

1   Due to differences between quarterly and full year weighted average share count calculations, and the effect of quarterly rounding to the nearest cent per share, full year earnings per share may not equal the sum of the quarters.

 

ITEM 9. CHANGES IN AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS ON ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE

None.

 

ITEM 9A. CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

Evaluation of Disclosure Controls and Procedures

As of January 31, 2016, an evaluation was performed by management, with the participation of our Chief Executive Officer (“CEO”) and our Chief Financial Officer (“CFO”), of the effectiveness of our disclosure controls and procedures. Based on that evaluation, our management, including our CEO and CFO, concluded that our disclosure controls and procedures are effective to ensure that information we are required to disclose in reports that we file or submit under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is accumulated and communicated to our management, including our CEO and CFO, as appropriate, to allow for timely discussions regarding required disclosures, and that such information is recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the time periods specified in the rules and forms of the SEC.

Management’s Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

Our management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over the company’s financial reporting. These internal controls are designed to provide reasonable assurance that the reported information is fairly presented, that disclosures are adequate and that the judgments inherent in the preparation of financial statements are reasonable. There are inherent limitations in the effectiveness of any internal control, including the possibility of human error and the circumvention or overriding of controls. Further, because of changes in conditions, the effectiveness of any internal control may vary over time.

Our management assessed the effectiveness of the company’s internal control over financial reporting as of January 31, 2016. In making this assessment, we used the criteria set forth by the Committee of Sponsoring

 

61


Table of Contents

Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO) in Internal Control-Integrated Framework (2013). Based on our assessment using those criteria, our management concluded that, as of January 31, 2016, our internal control over financial reporting is effective.

Our independent registered public accounting firm audited the Consolidated Financial Statements included in this Annual Report on Form 10-K and the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Their audit report appears on pages 59 through 60 of this Annual Report on Form 10-K.

Changes in Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

There was no change in our internal control over financial reporting that occurred during our most recent fiscal quarter that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, our internal control over financial reporting.

 

ITEM 9B. OTHER INFORMATION

On October 28, 2015, the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors approved the amendment and restatement of the 2012 EVP Level Management Retention Plan (the “EVP Retention Plan”), effective November 16, 2015 (the “Effective Date”). The amended and restated EVP Retention Plan extends the term of the plan through November 15, 2018 and provides for substantially the same severance benefits as the prior EVP Retention Plan. The EVP Retention Plan applies to executives at the Executive Vice President level and above, other than to the Company’s President and Chief Executive Officer, who is covered under an individual agreement. The Compensation Committee may, in its discretion, allow an employee below the level of Executive Vice President to participate.

The amended and restated EVP Retention Plan provides for “double trigger” severance benefits. If within 18 months following a Change of Control, the participant’s employment with the Company is terminated involuntarily by the Company without Cause, or voluntarily by the participant for Good Reason, as such terms are defined in the EVP Retention Plan, a participant would be entitled to receive the following:

 

    200% of the participant’s annual base salary as in effect immediately prior to the Change of Control, or the participant’s termination, whichever is greater, to be paid over 24 months;
    200% of the participant’s average annual bonus received in the last 36 months, to be paid over 24 months;
    100% vesting of the participant’s outstanding equity awards with service-based vesting, or performance-based vesting with a fixed or zero payout, and a pro-rata portion of the participant’s outstanding equity awards with variable performance-based vesting will immediately become fully vested at the target performance level; and
    in lieu of continued employment benefits (other than as required by law), payments of $3,000 per month for 12 months.

The participant’s receipt of the severance benefits discussed above is contingent on the participant signing, and not revoking, a release of claims against the Company and the participant’s continued compliance with certain post-termination obligations in favor of the Company.

In the event that the severance payments and other benefits payable to the participant under the EVP Retention Plan would be subject to IRS Code Section 280G “parachute payment” excise taxes, then the participant’s severance payments and other benefits will be either (i) delivered in full or (ii) delivered to a lesser extent such that no portion of the benefits are subject to the excise tax, whichever is greater on an after-tax basis.

 

62


Table of Contents

PART III

 

ITEM 10. DIRECTORS, EXECUTIVE OFFICERS AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Information required by this Item is incorporated by reference herein to information under the headings “Election of Directors,” “Information Concerning Executive Officers,” “Audit and Finance Committee Report,” “Corporate Governance — Corporate Governance Guidelines and Code of Business Conduct and Ethics,” “Corporate Governance — Audit and Finance Committee” and “Section 16(a) Beneficial Ownership Reporting Compliance” in our Proxy Statement.

 

ITEM 11. EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

Information required by this Item is incorporated by reference herein to information under the headings “Corporate Governance — Compensation Committee,” “Corporate Governance — Director Compensation,” and “Executive Compensation” in our Proxy Statement.

 

ITEM 12. SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS

Information required by this Item is incorporated by reference herein to information under the headings “Security Ownership of Principal Stockholders and Management” and “Equity Compensation Plan Information” in our Proxy Statement.

 

ITEM 13. CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS, AND DIRECTOR INDEPENDENCE

Information required by this Item is incorporated by reference herein to information under the heading “Certain Relationships and Related Transactions” in our Proxy Statement.

 

ITEM 14. PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

Information required by this Item is incorporated by reference herein to information under the headings “Committee Reports — Audit and Finance Committee Report” and “Proposal 4 — Ratification of Selection of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm — Deloitte Fees and Services” in our Proxy Statement.

 

63


Table of Contents

PART IV

 

ITEM 15. EXHIBITS AND FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES

 

(a)(1) Financial Statements:

The following Consolidated Financial Statements of Williams-Sonoma, Inc. and subsidiaries and the related notes are filed as part of this report pursuant to Item 8:

Consolidated Statements of Earnings for the fiscal years ended January 31, 2016, February 1, 2015 and February 2, 2014

Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income for the fiscal years ended January 31, 2016, February 1, 2015 and February 2, 2014

Consolidated Balance Sheets as of January 31, 2016 and February 1, 2015

Consolidated Statements of Stockholders’ Equity for the fiscal years ended January 31, 2016, February 1, 2015 and February 2, 2014

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the fiscal years ended January 31, 2016, February 1, 2015 and February 2, 2014

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

Quarterly Financial Information

 

(a)(2) Financial Statement Schedules: Schedules have been omitted because they are not required, are not applicable, or because the required information, where material, is included in the financial statements, notes, or supplementary financial information.

 

(a)(3) Exhibits: See Exhibit Index on pages 66 through 70.

 

(b) Exhibits: See Exhibit Index on pages 66 through 70.

 

(c) Financial Statement Schedules: Schedules have been omitted because they are not required or are not applicable.

 

64


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.

 

      WILLIAMS-SONOMA, INC.

Date: March 31, 2016

    By  

/s/    L AURA J. A LBER

        Chief Executive Officer

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the registrant and in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

 

Date: March 31, 2016   

/s/    A DRIAN D.P. B ELLAMY

   Adrian D.P. Bellamy
   Chairman of the Board of Directors
Date: March 31, 2016   

/s/    L AURA J. A LBER

   Laura J. Alber
   Chief Executive Officer
   (principal executive officer)
Date: March 31, 2016   

/s/    J ULIE P. W HALEN

   Julie P. Whalen
   Chief Financial Officer
   (principal financial officer and principal accounting officer)
Date: March 31, 2016   

/s/    R OSE M ARIE B RAVO

   Rose Marie Bravo
   Director
Date: March 31, 2016   

/s/    P ATRICK J. C ONNOLLY

   Patrick J. Connolly
   Director
Date: March 31, 2016   

/s/    A DRIAN T. D ILLON

   Adrian T. Dillon
   Director
Date: March 31, 2016   

/s/    A NTHONY A. G REENER

   Anthony A. Greener
   Director
Date: March 31, 2016   

/s/    T ED W. H ALL

   Ted W. Hall
   Director
Date: March 31, 2016   

/s/    S ABRINA S IMMONS

   Sabrina Simmons
   Director
Date: March 31, 2016   

/s/    J ERRY D. S TRITZKE

   Jerry D. Stritzke
   Director
Date: March 31, 2016   

/s/    L ORRAINE T WOHILL

   Lorraine Twohill
   Director

 

65


Table of Contents

EXHIBIT INDEX TO ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 10-K

FOR THE

FISCAL YEAR ENDED JANUARY 31, 2016

 

EXHIBIT NUMBER    EXHIBIT DESCRIPTION
CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION AND BYLAWS
  3.1    Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.1 to the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K as filed with the Commission on May 25, 2011, File No. 001-14077)
  3.2    Amended and Restated Bylaws (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.1 to the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K as filed with the Commission on February 2, 2016, File No. 001-14077)
INSTRUMENTS DEFINING THE RIGHTS OF SECURITY HOLDERS, INCLUDING INDENTURES
  4.1    Form of Common Stock Certificate (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.1 to the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K as filed with the Commission on May 25, 2011, File No. 001-14077)
FINANCING AGREEMENTS
10.1    Sixth Amended and Restated Credit Agreement, dated November 19, 2014, between the Company and Bank of America, N.A., as administrative agent, letter of credit issuer and swingline lender, Wells Fargo Bank, National Association, as syndication agent, JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A., MUFG Union Bank, NA and U.S. Bank, National Association, as co-documentation agents, and the lenders party thereto (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended February 1, 2015 as filed with the Commission on April 2, 2015, File No. 001-14077)
10.2    Reimbursement Agreement between the Company, Williams-Sonoma Singapore Pte. Ltd. and Bank of America, N.A., dated as of August 30, 2013 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the period ended November 3, 2013 as filed with the Commission on December 12, 2013, File No. 001-14077)
10.3    First Amendment to Reimbursement Agreement between the Company, Williams-Sonoma Singapore Pte. Ltd. and Bank of America, N.A., dated as of August 29, 2014 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the period ended November 2, 2014 as filed with the Commission on December 5, 2014, File No. 001-14077)
10.4    Second Amendment to Reimbursement Agreement between the Company, Williams-Sonoma Singapore Pte. Ltd. and Bank of America, N.A., dated as of August 28, 2015 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the period ended November 1, 2015 as filed with the Commission on December 11, 2015, File No. 001-14077)
10.5    Reimbursement Agreement between the Company, Williams-Sonoma Singapore Pte. Ltd. and Wells Fargo Bank, N.A., dated as of August 30, 2013 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the period ended November 3, 2013 as filed with the Commission on December 12, 2013, File No. 001-14077)

 

66


Table of Contents
EXHIBIT NUMBER    EXHIBIT DESCRIPTION
10.6    First Amendment to Reimbursement Agreement between the Company, Williams-Sonoma Singapore Pte. Ltd. and Wells Fargo Bank, N.A., dated as of August 29, 2014 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the period ended November 2, 2014 as filed with the Commission on December 5, 2014, File No. 001-14077)
10.7    Second Amendment to Reimbursement Agreement between the Company, Williams-Sonoma Singapore Pte. Ltd. and Wells Fargo Bank, N.A., dated as of August 28, 2015 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the period ended November 1, 2015 as filed with the Commission on December 11, 2015, File No. 001-14077)
10.8    Reimbursement Agreement between the Company, Williams-Sonoma Singapore Pte. Ltd. and U.S. Bank National Association, dated as of August 30, 2013 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.3 to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the fiscal quarter ended November 3, 2013 as filed with the Commission on December 12, 2013, File No. 001-14077)
10.9    First Amendment to Reimbursement Agreement between the Company, Williams-Sonoma Singapore Pte. Ltd. and U.S. Bank National Association, dated as of August 29, 2014 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.3 to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the fiscal quarter ended November 2, 2014 as filed with the Commission on December 5, 2014, File No. 001-14077)
10.10    Second Amendment to Reimbursement Agreement between the Company, Williams-Sonoma Singapore Pte. Ltd. and U.S. Bank National Association, dated as of August 28, 2015 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.3 to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the period ended November 1, 2015 as filed with the Commission on December 11, 2015, File No. 001-14077)
STOCK PLANS
10.11+    Williams-Sonoma, Inc. 2000 Nonqualified Stock Option Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4 to the Company’s Registration Statement on Form S-8 as filed with the Commission on October 27, 2000, File No. 333-48750)
10.12+    Williams-Sonoma, Inc. 2001 Long-Term Incentive Plan, as amended (incorporated by reference to Exhibit D to the Company’s definitive proxy statement on Schedule A as filed on April 7, 2011, File No. 001-14077)
10.13+    Forms of Notice of Grant and Stock Option Agreement under the Company’s 2000 Nonqualified Stock Option Plan and 2001 Long-Term Incentive Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the period ended October 31, 2004 as filed with the Commission on December 10, 2004, File No. 001-14077)
10.14+    Form of Williams-Sonoma, Inc. 2001 Long-Term Incentive Plan Stock-Settled Stock Appreciation Right Award Agreement for Director Grants (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.31 to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended February 3, 2008 as filed with the Commission on April 3, 2008, File No. 001-14077)
10.15+    Form of Williams-Sonoma, Inc. 2001 Long-Term Incentive Plan Stock-Settled Stock Appreciation Right Award Agreement for Employee Grants (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 to the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Commission on March 22, 2010, File No. 001-14077)

 

67


Table of Contents
EXHIBIT NUMBER    EXHIBIT DESCRIPTION
10.16+    Williams-Sonoma, Inc. 2001 Long-Term Incentive Plan Stock-Settled Stock Appreciation Right Award Agreement for CEO Grant (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.38 to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended February 1, 2009 as filed with the Commission on April 2, 2009, File No. 001-14077)
10.17+    Form of Williams-Sonoma, Inc. 2001 Long-Term Incentive Plan Restricted Stock Unit Award Agreement for Grants to Non-Employee Directors (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the period ended May 4, 2014 as filed with the Commission on June 12, 2014, File No. 001-14077)
10.18+    Form of Williams-Sonoma, Inc. 2001 Long-Term Incentive Plan Restricted Stock Unit Award Agreement for Grants to Employees (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the period ended May 4, 2014 as filed with the Commission on June 12, 2014, File No. 001-14077)
10.19+    Form of Williams-Sonoma, Inc. 2001 Long Term Incentive Plan Performance Stock Unit Award Agreement for Grants to Employees (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.15 to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended February 2, 2014 as filed with the Commission on April 3, 2014, File No. 001-14077)
OTHER INCENTIVE PLANS
10.20+    Williams-Sonoma, Inc. 2001 Incentive Bonus Plan, as amended (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Definitive Proxy Statement on Schedule 14A as filed with the Commission on April 6, 2012, File No. 001-14077)
10.21+    Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Pre-2005 Executive Deferral Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.40 to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended February 1, 2009 as filed with the Commission on April 2, 2009, File No. 001-14077)
10.22+    Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Amended and Restated Executive Deferred Compensation Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.19 to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended February 1, 2015 as filed with the Commission on April 2, 2015, File No. 001-14077)
  10.23+*    Williams-Sonoma, Inc. 401(k) Plan, as amended and restated effective January 1, 2016
PROPERTIES
10.24    Memorandum of Understanding between the Company and the State of Mississippi, Mississippi Business Finance Corporation, Desoto County, Mississippi, the City of Olive Branch, Mississippi and Hewson Properties, Inc., dated August 24, 1998 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.6 to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the period ended August 2, 1998 as filed with the Commission on September 14, 1998, File No. 001-14077)
10.25    Olive Branch Distribution Facility Lease, dated December 1, 1998, between the Company as lessee and WSDC, LLC (the successor-in-interest to Hewson/Desoto Phase I, L.L.C.) as lessor (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.3D to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended January 31, 1999 as filed with the Commission on April 30, 1999, File No. 001-14077)

 

68


Table of Contents
EXHIBIT NUMBER    EXHIBIT DESCRIPTION
10.26    First Amendment, dated September 1, 1999, to the Olive Branch Distribution Facility Lease between the Company as lessee and WSDC, LLC (the successor-in-interest to Hewson/Desoto Phase I, L.L.C.) as lessor, dated December 1, 1998 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.3B to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended January 30, 2000 as filed with the Commission on May 1, 2000, File No. 001-14077)
10.27    Lease for an additional Company distribution facility located in Olive Branch, Mississippi between Williams-Sonoma Retail Services, Inc. as lessee and SPI WS II, LLC (the successor-in-interest to Hewson/Desoto Partners, L.L.C.) as lessor, dated November 15, 1999 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.14 to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended January 30, 2000 as filed with the Commission on May 1, 2000, File No. 001-14077)
EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENTS
10.28+    Amended and Restated Employment Agreement with Laura Alber, dated September 6, 2012 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.4 to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the period ended October 28, 2012 as filed with the Commission December 7, 2012, File No. 001-14077)
10.29+    Amended and Restated Management Retention Agreement with Laura Alber, dated September 6, 2012 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.5 to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the period ended October 28, 2012 as filed with the Commission December 7, 2012, File No. 001-14077)
  10.30+*    Amended and Restated 2012 EVP Level Management Retention Plan
OTHER AGREEMENTS
10.31+    Form of Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Indemnification Agreement (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended July 31, 2011 as filed with the Commission on September 9, 2011, File No. 001-14077)
OTHER EXHIBITS
21.1*    Subsidiaries
23.1*    Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
CERTIFICATIONS
31.1*    Certification of Chief Executive Officer, pursuant to Rule 13a-14(a) and Rule 15d-14(a) of the Securities Exchange Act, as amended
31.2*    Certification of Chief Financial Officer, pursuant to Rule 13a-14(a) and Rule 15d-14(a) of the Securities Exchange Act, as amended
32.1*    Certification of Chief Executive Officer, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002
32.2*    Certification of Chief Financial Officer, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002

 

69


Table of Contents
EXHIBIT NUMBER    EXHIBIT DESCRIPTION
XBRL
101.INS*    XBRL Instance Document
101.SCH*    XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema Document
101.CAL*    XBRL Taxonomy Extension Calculation Linkbase Document
101.DEF*    XBRL Taxonomy Extension Definition Linkbase Document
101.LAB*    XBRL Taxonomy Extension Label Linkbase Document
101.PRE*    XBRL Taxonomy Extension Presentation Linkbase Document

 

* Filed herewith.

 

+ Indicates a management contract or compensatory plan or arrangement.

 

70

Exhibit 10.23

 

 

WILLIAMS-SONOMA, INC.

401(k) PLAN

As Amended and Restated Effective January 1, 2016


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

          Page  

PREAMBLE

     1   

ARTICLE I — DEFINITIONS

     2   

1.1

   “Account”      2   

1.2

   “Age 50 Catch-up Contributions”      2   

1.3

   “Age 50 Catch-up Contributions Account”      2   

1.4

   “Associate”      2   

1.5

   “Beneficiary”      3   

1.6

   “Beneficiary Designation Form”      3   

1.7

   “Board of Directors or Board”      3   

1.8

   “Borrower”      3   

1.9

   “Casual Associate”      3   

1.10

   “Code”      3   

1.11

   “Company”      3   

1.12

   “Company Stock”      3   

1.13

   “Company’s Controlled Group”      3   

1.14

   “Compensation”      3   

1.15

   “Contribution Election”      5   

1.16

   “Disability”      5   

1.17

   “Effective Date”      6   

1.18

   “Eligible Associate”      6   

1.19

   “Eligibility Computation Periods”      6   

1.20

   “Eligible Pay”      6   

1.21

   “Eligible Retirement Plan”      6   

1.22

   “Eligible Rollover Distribution”      7   

1.23

   “Employer”      8   

1.24

   “Employment Commencement Date”      8   

1.25

   “ERISA”      8   

1.26

   “Excess Contributions”      8   

1.27

   “Excess Deferrals”      8   

1.28

   “Fiduciaries”      8   

1.29

   “Full-Time Regular Associate”      9   

1.30

   “IRS Highly Compensated Employee”      9   

1.31

   “Hour of Service”      9   

1.32

   “Investment Election”      11   

1.33

   “Investment Fund”      11   

1.34

   “Leave of Absence”      11   

1.35

   “Matching Contributions”      11   

1.36

   “Matching Contributions Account”      11   

1.37

   “Non-highly Compensated Employee”      11   

1.38

   “Normal Retirement Age”      11   

1.39

   “Part-Time Associate”      11   

 

-i-


TABLE OF CONTENTS

(continued)

 

          Page  

1.40

   “Participant”      11   

1.41

   “Participant Response System”      11   

1.42

   “Period of Severance”      12   

1.43

   “Plan”      12   

1.44

   “Plan Administrator”      12   

1.45

   “Plan Year”      12   

1.46

   “Pre-tax Contributions”      12   

1.47

   “Pre-tax Contributions Account”      12   

1.48

   “Prior 2005 Employee QNEC Account”      12   

1.49

   “Prior 2005 Company Special Matching Contribution Account”      12   

1.50

   “Profit Sharing Contributions”      13   

1.51

   “Profit Sharing Contribution Account”      13   

1.52

   “Reemployment Commencement Date”      13   

1.53

   “Rollover Contribution”      13   

1.54

   “Rollover Contributions Account”      13   

1.55

   “Separation from Service” or “Separates from Service”      13   

1.56

   “Service Cutoff Date”      14   

1.57

   “Spouse”      14   

1.58

   “Start Date”      14   

1.59

   “Surviving Spouse”      14   

1.60

   “Temporary Associate”      14   

1.61

   “Trust”      14   

1.62

   “Trust Agreement”      14   

1.63

   “Trustee”      14   

1.64

   “U.S.” or “United States”      15   

1.65

   “Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund”      15   

1.66

   “Year of Vesting Service”      15   

ARTICLE II — PARTICIPATION

     16   

2.1

   Eligibility      16   

2.2

   Resumption After Separation from Service.      17   

2.3

   Termination of Participation.      17   

2.4

   Acquisitions and Divestitures      18   

ARTICLE III — CONTRIBUTIONS

     19   

3.1

   Contribution Elections      19   

3.2

   Pre-tax Contributions      20   

3.3

   Matching Contributions      21   

3.4

   No Current After-tax Contributions or Profit Sharing Contributions      24   

3.5

   Rollover Contributions      24   

3.6

   Military Leave      24   

3.7

   Contributions Subject to Deductibility      24   

3.8

   Allocation of Contributions      25   

3.9

   Valuation, Earnings, Losses and Investment Expenses      25   

 

-ii-


TABLE OF CONTENTS

(continued)

 

          Page  

3.10

   Return of Contributions      25   

ARTICLE IV — INVESTMENTS

     27   

4.1

   Participant Investment Provisions      27   

4.2

   Investment Elections      28   

4.3

   Investment Funds Other Than the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund      30   

4.4

   Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund      30   

4.5

   Investment of Loan Repayments and Restoration of Forfeitures      35   

ARTICLE V — VESTING

     36   

5.1

   Pre-tax Contributions, Rollover Contributions      36   

5.2

   Matching Contributions and Profit Sharing Contributions      36   

5.3

   Forfeitures      36   

5.4

   Allocation of Forfeitures      37   

5.5

   Restoration of Forfeited Account      37   

5.6

   Vesting After a Break in Service      37   

5.7

   Retention of Pre-Break Service      38   

ARTICLE VI — IN-SERVICE WITHDRAWALS

     39   

6.1

   Withdrawals After Attaining Age 591/2      39   

6.2

   Hardship Withdrawals      39   

6.3

   In-Service Withdrawal Procedures and Restrictions      41   

ARTICLE VII — LOANS

     42   

7.1

   General Rule      42   

7.2

   Amount of Loan      42   

7.3

   Interest Rate, Security and Fees      43   

7.4

   Source of Loans      44   

7.5

   Repayment and Term      44   

7.6

   Deemed Distributions      47   

7.7

   Additional Rules      47   

ARTICLE VIII — DISTRIBUTIONS

     48   

8.1

   Eligibility for Distribution Upon Separation From Service or Disability      48   

8.2

   Form of Payment      48   

8.3

   Amount of Distribution      48   

8.4

   Cashout Distributions and Automatic Rollovers      48   

8.5

   Distribution Upon Death      49   

8.6

   Commencement of Payments      50   

8.7

   Direct Rollovers      55   

8.8

   Qualified Domestic Relations Orders      56   

8.9

   Beneficiary Designation      56   

8.10

   Incompetent or Lost Distributee      58   

 

-iii-


TABLE OF CONTENTS

(continued)

 

          Page  

ARTICLE IX — INVESTMENT OF THE TRUST

     60   

9.1

   Trust Agreement      60   

9.2

   Appointment of Investment Managers      60   

9.3

   Investment Manager Powers      60   

9.4

   Power to Direct Investments      60   

9.5

   Exclusive Benefit Rule      61   

ARTICLE X — PLAN ADMINISTRATION

     61   

10.1

   Allocation of Responsibility Among Fiduciaries for Plan and Trust Administration      61   

10.2

   Administration      62   

10.3

   Claims Procedure      62   

10.4

   Records and Reports      66   

10.5

   Administrative Powers and Duties      66   

10.6

   Rules and Decisions      67   

10.7

   Procedures      67   

10.8

   Authorization of Benefit Distributions      67   

10.9

   Application and Forms for Distributions      67   

10.10

   Certain Operational Mistakes      67   

ARTICLE XI — AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION

     68   

11.1

   Amendment of the Plan      68   

11.2

   Right to Terminate the Plan or Discontinue Contributions      68   

11.3

   Effect of Termination or Discontinuance of Contributions      68   

11.4

   Effect of a Partial Termination      69   

11.5

   Plan Merger      69   

11.6

   Additional Participating Employers      69   

11.7

   Withdrawal of a Participating Employer      69   

ARTICLE XII — MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

     70   

12.1

   Action by the Company      70   

12.2

   No Right to Be Retained in Employment      70   

12.3

   Rights to Trust Assets      70   

12.4

   Non-Alienation of Benefits      70   

12.5

   Requirement to Provide Information to Plan Administrator      71   

12.6

   Source of Benefit Payments      71   

12.7

   Indemnification      71   

12.8

   Construction      72   

12.9

   Governing Law      73   

ARTICLE XIII — DOLLAR LIMITATION ON PRE-TAX CONTRIBUTIONS

     74   

13.1

   Treatment of Excess Deferrals      74   

13.2

   Coordination With Other Arrangements In Which Earnings are Deferred      74   

ARTICLE XIV — NONDISCRIMINATION RULES: ADP AND ACP TESTS

     76   

 

-iv-


TABLE OF CONTENTS

(continued)

 

          Page  

14.1

   Definitions Applicable to the Nondiscrimination Rules      76   

14.2

   Actual Deferral Percentage Test      77   

14.3

   More Than One Employer-Sponsored Plan Subject to the ADP Test      78   

14.4

   Recharacterization of Pre-tax Contributions      78   

14.5

   Treatment of Excess Contributions      78   

14.6

   QNECs      79   

14.7

   Actual Contribution Percentage Test      80   

14.8

   More Than One Plan Subject to the Actual Contribution Test      81   

14.9

   Required Plan Aggregation for Purposes of the ADP and ACP Test      81   

14.10

   Required Plan Disaggregation for Purposes of the ADP and ACP Test      82   

14.11

   Treatment of Excess Aggregate Contributions      82   

14.12

   Coverage Testing      83   

ARTICLE XV — CODE § 415 LIMITATION

     84   

15.1

   Definitions Applicable to the Code § 415 Limitation      84   

15.2

   Limitation on Annual Additions      85   

15.3

   Applicable Regulations      86   

ARTICLE XVI — TOP HEAVY PROVISIONS

     87   

16.1

   Definitions Applicable to the Top Heavy Provisions      87   

16.2

   Application of Article XVI      90   

16.3

   Minimum Contributions      90   

ARTICLE XVII — REJUVENATION MERGER

     92   

17.1

   Merger      92   

17.2

   Participation      92   

17.3

   Service      92   

17.4

   Accounts      92   

17.5

   Vesting      93   

17.6

   Loans      93   

 

-v-


WILLIAMS-SONOMA, INC. 401(k) PLAN

PREAMBLE

The Williams-Sonoma, Inc. 401(k) Plan (“Plan”) permits eligible associates to defer receipt of their compensation on a pre-tax basis in order to promote retirement savings. The Plan also provides for matching contributions to be made on the basis of the pre-tax contributions. The Plan provides for distributions in the event of termination of employment. In addition, in-service withdrawals are permitted at age 59-1/2 or on account of hardship, and loans are available to eligible associates who are not on leaves of absence.

The Plan consists of: (1) a profit-sharing plan containing a cash or deferred arrangement and a matching contribution arrangement that are intended to meet the requirements for qualification and tax-exemption under Code § § 401(a), 401(k) and 401(m) and (2) an employee stock ownership plan (the “ESOP”) that is intended to qualify as a stock bonus plan under Code § 401(a) and to meet the requirements for employee stock ownership plans under Code § 4975(e)(7) and ERISA § 407(d)(6). The ESOP portion of the Plan is that portion of the Plan which, as of any applicable date, is invested in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund. The profit sharing and ESOP portions of the Plan constitute a single plan under Treasury Regulation § 1.414(l)-1(b)(1).

The Plan was originally established February 1, 1989 as the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Employee Profit Sharing and Stock Incentive Plan. It was later renamed the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Associate Stock Incentive Plan and effective April 21, 2006, the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. 401(k) Plan.

 

-1-


ARTICLE I—DEFINITIONS

Where the following, boldfaced words and phrases appear in this Plan with initial capitals, they shall have the meaning set forth below.

 

1.1 “Account” means the sum of a Participant’s Matching Contributions Account, Pre-tax Contributions Account, Age 50 Catch-up Contributions Account, Rollover Contributions Account and Profit Sharing Contributions Account, which sum constitutes the Participant’s total interest in the Trust.

 

1.2 “Age 50 Catch-up Contributions” means Pre-tax Contributions made pursuant to Section 3.2(d).

 

1.3 “Age 50 Catch-up Contributions Account” means the separate subaccount of a Participant’s Account to which Age 50 Catch-up Contributions and any income or loss thereon are credited.

 

1.4 “Associate” means any person who is receiving compensation as a common law employee for personal services rendered in the employment of the Employer.

 

  (a) No self-employed individual shall be an Associate under this Plan by virtue of his or her self-employment (except as provided in (c) below). An individual shall not be considered to be in “employment” unless the individual is classified by the Employer as being in employment.

 

  (b) If a former Associate’s termination of employment did not constitute a Separation from Service, such individual shall be treated as a current Associate for purposes of the withdrawal provisions of Article VI and the loan provisions of Article VII.

 

  (c) The term “Associate” shall also include an individual who performs services for the Employer (other than an associate of the Employer), who pursuant to an agreement between the Employer and any other person (“leasing organization”) has performed services for the Employer (and related persons determined in accordance with Code § 414(n)(6)) determined on a substantially full-time basis for a period of at least one year, and such services are performed under the primary direction or control by the Employer. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if such leased employees constitute less than 20% of the Employer’s Non-highly Compensated Employees within the meaning of Code § 414(n)(1)(C)(ii), the term “Associate” shall not include those leased employees covered by a plan described in Code § Section 414(n)(5).

 

-2-


1.5 “Beneficiary” means the person designated by a Participant pursuant to the specific procedures established by the Plan Administrator for this purpose, or such other person who becomes entitled to a benefit under the Plan, in accordance with Section 8.9.

 

1.6 “Beneficiary Designation Form” means a form prescribed by the Plan Administrator for designating Beneficiaries.

 

1.7 “Board of Directors or Board” means the Board of Directors of the Company.

 

1.8 “Borrower” means a Participant who has made an application for or who has received a loan from the Plan in accordance with Section 7.1.

 

1.9 “Casual Associate” means an Associate who is classified as a casual associate by the Associate’s Employer and who is not in an ineligible classification under Section 2.1(b).

 

1.10 “Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

 

1.11 “Company” means Williams-Sonoma, Inc., a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of California, or its successor or successors.

 

1.12 “Company Stock” means shares of common stock of Williams-Sonoma, Inc.

 

1.13 “Company’s Controlled Group” means the controlled group of organizations of which the Company is a part, as defined by Code § 414 and regulations issued thereunder. An entity shall be considered a member of the Company’s Controlled Group only during the period it is one of the group of organizations described in the preceding sentence.

 

1.14 “Compensation” means:

 

  (a) For purposes of the Actual Deferral Percentage test and the Actual Contribution Percentage test in Article XIV, any definition of compensation permissible under Code § 414(s), as chosen by the Plan Administrator for each Plan Year.

 

  (b) For all other purposes, including Section 1.30 and Articles XV and XVI, an Associate’s W-2 wages as reported or reportable (determined without regard to any rules that limit the remuneration included in wages based on the nature or location of the employment or the services performed such as the exception for agricultural labor in Code § 3401(a)(2)) as described in Treasury Regulation § 1.415(c)-2(d)(3). Such Compensation shall also include contributions that are made by an Employer that are not includible in gross income under Code §§ 125 (cafeteria plan salary reduction amounts), 402(g)(3) (pre-tax deferrals) and 132(f)(4) (qualified transportation benefits).

 

  (i)

Except as described in paragraph (ii), Compensation for the Plan Year must be actually paid or made available to the Associate (or, if earlier, includible in the gross income of the Associate) within the Plan Year and it must be paid or treated as paid prior to his severance from employment within the meaning of Treasury Regulation § 1.415(a)-1(1)(5).

 

-3-


 

Notwithstanding the foregoing, Compensation for a Plan Year shall include amounts earned but not paid during the Plan Year solely because of the timing of payroll periods and pay dates if the following requirements are satisfied:

 

  (A) these amounts are paid during the first few weeks of the next Plan Year;

 

  (B) the amounts are included on a uniform and consistent basis with respect to all similarly situated Associates, and

 

  (C) no such Compensation is included in more than one Plan Year.

 

  (ii) (A) Notwithstanding paragraph (i), any amount described in subparagraph (B) or (C) does not fail to be Compensation for an Associate merely because it is paid after his severance from employment provided that it is paid by the later of 2-1/2 months after his severance from employment or the end of the Plan Year that includes the date of his severance from employment.

 

  (B) An amount is described in this subparagraph if

 

  (I) it is regular compensation for services during the Associate’s regular working hours or compensation for services outside the Associate’s regular working hours (such as overtime or shift differential, commissions, bonuses or other similar payments), and

 

  (II) the payment would have been paid to the Associate prior to his severance from employment if he had continued employment with the Company or any member of the Company’s Controlled Group.

 

  (C) An amount is described in this subparagraph if it is

 

  (I) payment for unused accrued bona fide sick, vacation or other leave, but only if the Associate would have been able to use the leave if his employment had continued, or

 

  (II) received by the Associate pursuant to a nonqualified unfunded deferred compensation plan, but only if the payment would have been paid to the Associate at the same time if the Associate had continued in employment with the Company or a member of the Company’s Controlled Group and only to the extent it is includible in the Associate’s gross income;

 

-4-


provided, however, that such amounts would have been included in the definition of Compensation if they were paid prior to the Associate’s severance from employment with the Company or any member of the Company’s Controlled Group.

 

  (iii) Compensation shall include payments to:

 

  (A) an individual who does not currently perform services for the Company or a member of the Company’s Controlled Group by reason of qualified military service (as defined in Code § 414(u)(1)) to the extent those payments do not exceed the amounts the individual would have received if he had continued to perform services for the Company or any member of the Company’s Controlled Group rather than entering into qualified military service; or

 

  (B) an Associate who is permanently and totally disabled within the meaning of Code § 22(e)(3) if the conditions described in Treasury Regulation § 415(c)-2(g)(4)(ii) are satisfied.

 

  (iv) Compensation shall not include the following post-severance payments:

 

  (A) severance payments or parachute payments within the meaning of Code § 280G(b)(2) if they are paid after severance from employment; and

 

  (B) post-severance payments from a nonqualified unfunded deferred compensation plan unless the payments would have been paid at that time without regard to the Associate’s severance from employment.

 

  (c) Notwithstanding the above, a Participant’s Compensation for a Plan Year shall not exceed, for 2015, $265,000 (or such higher dollar amount as may permissibly apply for the Plan Year pursuant to adjustments in the dollar limitation under Code § 401(a)(17) announced by the Secretary of the Treasury).

In the case of a Plan Year of less than 12 months, the limitation specified in the previous sentence shall be adjusted by first dividing the limit by 12 and then multiplying the resulting quotient by the number of months in the Plan Year.

 

1.15 “Contribution Election” means the election made by an Eligible Associate or Participant selecting the percentage of Eligible Pay to be deferred and contributed to the Plan by the Employer as a Pre-tax Contribution.

 

1.16

“Disability” means the total and permanent incapacity of a Participant to perform the usual duties of employment for an Employer due to physical impairment or legally established mental incompetence. “Disability” shall be determined on evidence that the Participant has become entitled to receive primary benefits as a disabled employee under the Social Security Act in effect on the date of disability. If Participant’s incapacity is

 

-5-


 

due to alcohol, drugs, or other substance abuse, the Participant must be enrolled or have completed a rehabilitation program approved by the Company for such disability to constitute a “Disability.”

 

1.17 “Effective Date” means January 1, 2016, the date that this restatement of the Plan is first effective. Certain identified provisions are effective on different dates, as noted herein. The Plan itself was first effective February 1, 1989.

 

1.18 “Eligible Associate” means an Associate who has met the eligibility and entry date requirements to be a Participant under Article II, without regard to whether the Associate has elected to make Pre-tax Contributions. For purposes of the nondiscrimination tests in Article XIV, an Associate with no Compensation for a Plan Year shall not be treated as an Eligible Associate for that Plan Year.

 

1.19 “Eligibility Computation Periods” mean: (i) the twelve-consecutive-month period that begins on the Associate’s Start Date, (ii) the first Plan Year that begins on or after such Associate’s Start Date, and (iii) each succeeding Plan Year.

 

1.20 “Eligible Pay” means the amount of regular, recurring compensation of an Associate, including base salary and hourly wages plus overtime pay and differential wage payments described in Code §§ 414(u)(12)(A) and (D). “Eligible Pay” is determined prior to reduction for any Pre-tax Contributions made on behalf of the Participant and for any amount allocated to a cafeteria plan maintained pursuant to Code § 125. “Eligible Pay” does not include any other items of compensation, such as: (a) commissions, (b) bonuses paid at the discretion of the Company, (c) the value of stock options granted to or exercised by an Associate or former Associate during the Plan Year, (d) car allowances, (e) expense reimbursements, (f) nonqualified deferred compensation deferred by or paid to an Associate or former Associate, or (g) amounts described in Sections 1.14(b)(i)—(iv) (except to the extent such amounts are differential wage payments described above). Eligible pay is further limited by the same dollar limitations that are set forth in subsection (b) of the definition of “Compensation” in this Article I. Eligible Pay does not include earnings during periods in which the Associate is not an Eligible Associate.

 

1.21 “Eligible Retirement Plan” means:

 

  (a) an individual retirement account described in Code § 408(a),

 

  (b) an individual retirement annuity described in Code § 408(b),

 

  (c) an annuity plan described in Code § 403(a),

 

  (d) a qualified trust described in Code § 401(a),

 

  (e) an annuity contract described in Code § 403(b),

 

  (f) an eligible plan under Code § 457(b) which is maintained by a state, political subdivision of a state, or any agency or instrumentality of a state or political subdivision of a state and which agrees to separately account for amounts transferred into such 457(b) plan from this Plan, or

 

-6-


  (g) a Roth IRA (described in Code § 408A) (subject to the applicable rules for such rollovers). Under no circumstances is the Plan Administrator responsible for assuring that the distributee is eligible to make a direct rollover to a Roth IRA.

The definition of an “Eligible Retirement Plan” shall apply in the case of a Eligible Rollover Distribution to a Participant, his Spouse or former spouse who is the alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations order, as defined in Code § 414(p).

However, in the case of an Eligible Rollover Distribution to a Beneficiary who is not the Participant’s Spouse or former spouse under a qualified domestic relations order, Eligible Retirement Plan shall mean only an individual retirement account described in Code § 408(a) or an individual retirement annuity described in Code § 408(b). A direct rollover to a Beneficiary who is not the Participant’s Spouse or former spouse under a qualified domestic relations order must be accomplished through a direct trustee-to-trustee transfer to an Eligible Retirement Plan described in the preceding sentence.

 

1.22 “Eligible Rollover Distribution” means:

 

  (a) Any distribution under the Plan of all or any portion of a Participant’s Account, other than:

 

  (i) A distribution that is one of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (made not less frequently than annually) made for the life (or life expectancy) of the Participant (or the Participant’s Surviving Spouse) or the joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of the Participant (or the Participant’s Surviving Spouse) and the Participant’s (or the Participant’s Surviving Spouse’s) designated beneficiary;

 

  (ii) A distribution for a specified period of ten years or more;

 

  (iii) A distribution required under Code § 401(a)(9) (see Section 8.6(d));

 

  (iv) A hardship distribution described in Code § 401(k)(2)(B)(i)(IV) (see Section 6.2); or

 

  (v) The portion of any distribution in excess of the amount that would be includible in gross income were it not rolled over to an Eligible Retirement Plan (disregarding for this purpose, the exclusion from income applicable to net unrealized appreciation when employer securities are distributed).

 

  (b)

Notwithstanding subsection (a)(v), an Eligible Rollover Distribution may include after-tax contributions only to the extent such distribution is transferred to an Eligible Retirement Plan described in Section 1.21(a), (b), (d) or (e). Any such transfer of after-tax contributions to an Eligible Retirement Plan described in

 

-7-


 

Section 1.21(d) or (e) must be accomplished through a direct trustee-to-trustee transfer which provides for separate accounting for amounts so transferred (including separately accounting for the portion of such distribution which is includable in gross income and the portion of the such distribution which is not so includable). However, as described in Section 1.53, after-tax contributions are not accepted as Rollover Contributions to the Plan.

 

1.23 “Employer” means the Company and any subsidiary which is authorized by the Company to participate herein.

 

1.24 “Employment Commencement Date” means the date on which the Associate first performs an Hour of Service for which the Associate is paid or entitled to payment for the performance of duties for the Employer or any other employer within the Company’s Controlled Group.

 

1.25 “ERISA” means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended.

 

1.26 “Excess Contributions” means, with respect to any Plan Year, the aggregate amount of Pre-tax Contributions paid to the Trustee for a Plan Year on behalf of IRS Highly Compensated Employees in excess of the Actual Deferral Percentage test limits set forth in Section 14.2.

 

1.27 “Excess Deferrals” means, with respect to any Plan Year, the aggregate amount of Pre-tax Contributions contributed on behalf of Participants in excess of the annual limitation on Pre-tax Contributions set forth in Section 3.2(b).

 

1.28 “Fiduciaries” means:

 

  (a) The named fiduciaries as defined in § 402 of ERISA who shall be the Company (but solely with respect to its power to designate successor Trustees), the Plan Administrator and the Trustee; and

 

  (b) Other parties designated as fiduciaries, as defined in § 3(21) of ERISA, by such named fiduciaries in accordance with the terms of the Plan and the Trust Agreement;

provided that a party shall be a Fiduciary only with respect to its specific responsibilities in connection with the Plan and Trust.

 

-8-


1.29 “Full-Time Regular Associate” means an Associate who is classified as a full-time regular associate by the Associate’s Employer and who is not in an ineligible classification under Section 2.1(b).

 

1.30 “IRS Highly Compensated Employee” means any Associate of the Company’s Controlled Group (whether or not eligible for participation in the Plan) who, for the applicable Plan Year:

 

  (a) Was a five-percent owner (as defined in Code § 416(i)) for the applicable Plan Year or the immediately preceding Plan Year, or

 

  (b) Received Compensation in excess of $120,000 or such other amount as may apply for the preceding Plan Year pursuant to adjustments in the compensation amount under Code § 414(q)(1)(B) announced by the Secretary of Treasury.

Associates who are nonresident aliens and who receive no earned income from any employer within the Company’s Controlled Group which constitutes income from sources within the United States shall be disregarded for all purposes of this Section.

 

1.31 “Hour of Service” means, with respect to any applicable computation period,

 

  (a) Performance of Duties . Each hour for which the Associate is paid or entitled to payment for the performance of duties for the Employer or any other employer within the Company’s Controlled Group;

 

  (b) Paid Leave . Each hour for which the Associate is paid or entitled to payment by the Employer or any other employer within the Company’s Controlled Group on account of a period during which no duties are performed, whether or not the employment relationship has terminated, due to vacation, holiday, illness, incapacity (including disability), layoff, jury duty, military duty or leave of absence, but not more than 501 hours for any single continuous period, provided that no hours shall be credited on account of any period during which the Associate performs no duties and receives payment solely for the purpose of complying with unemployment compensation, workers’ compensation or disability insurance laws;

 

  (c) Back Pay . Each hour for which back pay, irrespective of mitigation of damages, is either awarded or agreed to by the Employer or any other employer within the Company’s Controlled Group, excluding any hours credited under subsection (a) or (b), which shall be credited to the computation period or periods to which the award, agreement or payment pertains rather than to the computation period in which the award, agreement or payment is made;

 

  (d)

Parental Leave . Solely for purposes of determining whether an Associate has incurred a break in service, each hour for which an Associate would normally be credited under subsection (a) or (b) above during a period of parental leave but not more than 501 hours for any single continuous period. However, the number

 

-9-


 

of hours credited to an Associate under this subsection (d) during the computation period in which the parental leave began, when added to the hours credited to an Associate under subsections (a) through (c) above during that computation period, shall not exceed 501. If the number of hours credited under this subsection (d) for the computation period in which the parental leave began is zero, the provisions of this subsection (d) shall apply as though the parental leave began in the immediately following computation period. For this purpose, a parental leave means a period in which the Associate is absent from work immediately following his or her active employment because of the Associate’s pregnancy, the birth of the Associate’s child or the placement of a child with the Associate in connection with the adoption of that child by the Associate, or for purposes of caring for that child for a period beginning immediately following such birth or placement; and

 

  (e) Family and Medical Leave Act . Solely for purposes of determining whether an Associate has incurred a break in service, each hour for which an Associate would normally be credited under subsection (a) or (b) above, and not otherwise credited under subsection (d) above, during a period of unpaid leave for the birth, adoption or placement of a child, to care for a spouse or an immediate family member with a serious illness or for the Associate’s own illness pursuant to the Family and Medical Leave Act of 1993 and the regulations thereunder.

Hours of Service to be credited to an individual under subsections (b), (c), (d) and (e) above will be calculated by the Plan Administrator by reference to the individual’s most recent work schedule. The Hours of Service credited shall be determined as required by Department of Labor regulations §§ 2530.200b-2(b) and (c), and the rules set forth in such Sections are hereby incorporated by reference.

 

-10-


1.32 “Investment Election” means the election by which a Participant directs the investment of his or her Account in accordance with Section 4.2.

 

1.33 “Investment Fund” means any of the funds described in Article IV into which a Participant’s Account may be invested.

 

1.34 “Leave of Absence” shall mean any absence authorized by an Employer under the Employer’s standard personnel practices, whether paid or unpaid, to the extent the leave does not exceed one year (unless otherwise required by applicable law). A Leave of Absence shall include an absence from work because of reasons covered by, and only while the absence is protected by, the Family and Medical Leave Act of 1993 and its regulations (“FMLA”). For the avoidance of doubt, if your absence from work is not protected by FMLA or any other federal or state law, you will not be considered to be on a Leave of Absence for any periods after the one-year anniversary of your absence from work.

 

1.35 “Matching Contributions” means the contributions made by the Employer to a Participant’s Matching Contributions Account pursuant to Section 3.3.

 

1.36 “Matching Contributions Account” means the separate subaccount of a Participant’s Account which reflects the amount attributable to a Participant’s Matching Contributions and earnings and losses thereon.

 

1.37 “Non-highly Compensated Employee” means an Associate who is not a IRS Highly Compensated Employee.

 

1.38 “Normal Retirement Age” means age 65.

 

1.39 “Part-Time Associate” means an Associate who is classified as a part-time associate by the Associate’s Employer and who is not in an ineligible classification under Section 2.1(b).

 

1.40 “Participant” means an individual who has commenced participation in the Plan by electing to make Pre-tax Contributions and has not terminated participation, as determined under Section 2.1.

 

1.41

“Participant Response System” means the Participant Response System established by the Company or a third party vendor to permit Participants to manage their Account and communicate with the Plan Administrator, Trustee, recordkeeper and/or delegate thereof. As determined by the Plan Administrator, this system may take any form ( e.g. , it may include an interactive telephone participant response system, either menu-driven or with a live attendant, a paper document system, an internet site, an intranet site, or an e-mail protocol). The system may allow Participants to commence participation in the Plan (in accordance with Section 2.1), to make and change their Contribution Elections (in accordance with Section 3.1(c)), to make and change their Investment Elections (in accordance with Section 4.2), to apply for an in-service withdrawal (in accordance with Article VI), to apply for a plan loan (in accordance with Article VII), and to request a

 

-11-


 

distribution (in accordance with Article VIII). Different features of the Participant Response System may be used for different purposes (e.g., Participants may be allowed to use the internet for some purposes but may be required to contact a live telephone attendant to initiate a loan), may be offered to different groups of Participants, and may be made available only in limited circumstances (e.g., a live telephone attendant may only be available during limited hours). The Participant Response System may require Participants to use security protocols, including a “personal identification number” (“PIN”). Unless the Participant uses the form or protocol that is specifically permitted by the Plan Administrator for the purpose in question, the Participant’s communication shall not be deemed to be made through the Participant Response System.

 

1.42 “Period of Severance” means the period of time commencing on an Associate’s Service Cutoff Date and ending on the Associate’s next Reemployment Commencement Date during which the Associate is not employed by the Company’s Controlled Group.

 

1.43 “Plan” means this Plan, the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. 401(k) Plan, as it may be amended and restated from time to time. This Plan may also be referred to as the “401(k) Plan.”

 

1.44 “Plan Administrator” means the Administrative Committee. The Administrative Committee shall consist of one or more persons appointed by the Board or the Human Resources Committee of the Board. As Plan Administrator, the Administrative Committee shall have authority to administer the Plan as provided in Article X. The Plan Administrator may interact with Participants and Beneficiaries through the party currently designated as recordkeeper for the Plan. Therefore, to the extent authorized by the Plan Administrator, any communication by a Participant or Beneficiary with such recordkeeper shall be deemed to be a communication with the Plan Administrator, and any communication by the recordkeeper with a Participant and Beneficiary shall be deemed to be a communication by the Plan Administrator.

 

1.45 “Plan Year” means the calendar year.

 

1.46 “Pre-tax Contributions” means contributions made by an Employer on behalf of a Participant in accordance with his or her Contribution Election pursuant to Article III.

 

1.47 “Pre-tax Contributions Account” means the separate subaccount of a Participant’s Account to which Pre-tax Contributions and any income or loss thereon are credited.

 

1.48 “Prior 2005 Employee QNEC Account” means the separate subaccount of a Participant’s Account to which pre-2005 qualified nonelective contributions, and any income or loss thereon, were credited.

 

1.49 “Prior 2005 Company Special Matching Contribution Account” means the separate subaccount of a Participant’s Account to which certain pre-2005 corrective matching contributions, and any income or loss thereon, are credited.

 

-12-


1.50 “Profit Sharing Contributions” means profit sharing contributions made to the Plan by an Employer on behalf of a Participant before January 1, 1997. Effective January 1, 1997, the Company will not make any further Profit Sharing Contributions.

 

1.51 “Profit Sharing Contribution Account” means the separate subaccount of a Participant’s Account to which any Profit Sharing Contributions and any income or loss thereon are credited.

 

1.52 “Reemployment Commencement Date” means the date on which an Associate first performs an Hour of Service for the Employer or any other employer within the Company’s Controlled Group following a Period of Severance.

 

1.53 “Rollover Contribution” means a contribution made in accordance with Section 3.5, by an Eligible Associate to the Plan:

 

  (a) Which consists only of the taxable portion of a cash distribution from –

 

  (i) A qualified plan under Code § 401(a),

 

  (ii) A qualified annuity under Code § 403(a),

 

  (iii) An individual retirement account or an individual retirement annuity (collectively, an “IRA”) described in Code § 408(a) or 408(b); or

 

  (iv) An annuity contract under Code § 403(b) and an eligible plan under Code § 457(b), which is maintained by a state, political subdivision of a state, or any agency or instrumentality of a state or political subdivision of a state.

 

  (b) Which is an “eligible rollover distribution” as defined in Code § 402(c)(4); and

 

  (c) Which is contributed to the Plan not later than 60 days after the Eligible Associate receives it (or such later date as is permitted by the Secretary of the Treasury on account of the recipient’s hardship pursuant to Code § 402(c)(3)(B)), in the event the Eligible Associate receives the distribution from the other plan, annuity, account or contract instead of electing its direct rollover to this Plan.

Accordingly, an Eligible Associate’s after-tax contributions to, and hardship distributions from, another plan or arrangement are not eligible for rollover into this Plan. The Plan Administrator shall determine whether a requested contribution constitutes a Rollover Contribution.

 

1.54 “Rollover Contributions Account” means the separate subaccount of a Participant’s Account or an Account established on behalf of an Eligible Associate to which Rollover Contributions and any income or loss thereon are credited.

 

1.55

“Separation from Service” or “Separates from Service” means the termination of the Associate’s employment relationship with the Company’s Controlled Group, including by quit, resignation, discharge, retirement, disability, or layoff. For purposes of the

 

-13-


 

Plan’s limitations on the right of a Participant to take an in-service distribution from the Plan pursuant to Code § 401(k)(2)(B) (e.g., as the term is used in Section 8.1 (eligibility for distribution upon separation from service)), “Separation from Service” means separation from employment as that phrase is defined for purposes of Code § 401(k)(2)(B).

 

1.56 “Service Cutoff Date” means the earliest of:

 

  (a) The Associate’s Separation from Service date,

 

  (b) The 12-month anniversary of the date the Associate was otherwise first absent from employment,

 

  (c) The last day of the 24-month period following the date the Associate is first absent from employment on account of parental leave (as defined in the definition of Hour of Service in this Article I), and

 

  (d) The date that an Associate fails to return from a family or medical leave under the Family and Medical Leave Act of 1993.

 

1.57 “Spouse” means the person to whom an Associate is lawfully married.

 

1.58 “Start Date” means;

 

  (a) In connection with an Associate’s initial hire, his or her Employment Commencement Date; and

 

  (b) In connection with determining an Associate’s Plan eligibility after his or her rehire, the date the Associate is credited, following rehire, with an Hour of Service for the performance of duties for the Employer or any other employer within the Company’s Controlled Group.

 

1.59 “Surviving Spouse” means the Spouse of a Participant as of the date of the Participant’s death.

 

1.60 “Temporary Associate” means an Associate who is classified as a temporary associate by the Associate’s Employer and who is not in an ineligible classification under Section 2.1(b).

 

1.61 “Trust” means the trust fund or funds which hold the assets of the Plan and are established by the Trust Agreement.

 

1.62 “Trust Agreement” means the trust agreement or agreements entered into between the Company and the Trustee to provide for holding the Plan assets.

 

1.63

“Trustee” means the individual(s) or corporation(s) appointed pursuant to the Trust Agreement. The Trustee may be changed from time to time, including by adoption of a new or amended Trust Agreement. The Trustee may interact with Participants and

 

-14-


 

Beneficiaries through the party currently designated as recordkeeper for the Plan. Therefore, to the extent authorized by the Trustee, any communication by a Participant or Beneficiary with such recordkeeper shall be deemed to be a communication with the Trustee, and any communication by the recordkeeper with a Participant and Beneficiary shall be deemed to be a communication by the Trustee.

 

1.64 “U.S.” or “United States” means the 50 states and the District of Columbia.

 

1.65 “Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund” means a stock fund that invests primarily in Company Stock and that is required to be available as an Investment Fund under this Plan, as described in Article IV.

 

1.66 “Year of Vesting Service” means a 365 day “period of service” (as defined below), but excluding service before February 1, 1988. Separate periods of service shall be aggregated in calculating Years of Vesting Service. A period of service means the period commencing on the Associate’s Employment Commencement Date or Reemployment Commencement Date and ending on the next Service Cutoff Date, and shall include a Period of Severance (post-February 1, 1988) that lasts no more than 12 consecutive months.

 

-15-


ARTICLE II—PARTICIPATION

 

2.1 Eligibility.

An Associate who meets the eligibility requirements in this Article II is an Eligible Associate. If the Eligible Associate elects to make Pre-tax Contributions pursuant to Section 3.1, the Eligible Associate will become a Participant.

 

  (a) Eligible Associates . Each Associate shall be eligible to participate in the Plan as soon as administratively practicable (e.g., 30 days) after the later of:

 

  (i) Such Associate’s Start Date, and

 

  (ii) Such Associate’s 21st birthday.

 

  (b) Excluded Classifications . Notwithstanding the preceding provisions of this Section 2.1, no Associate shall be an Eligible Associate or Participant hereunder while such Associate is:

 

  (i) Neither a citizen nor a resident of the United States, and derives no earned income from the Employer that would constitute income from sources within the United States;

 

  (ii) A member of a collective bargaining unit covered by a collective bargaining agreement with respect to which retirement benefits were the subject of good-faith bargaining between the employee representatives and the Employer and that does not specifically provide for coverage of such Associate under this Plan;

 

  (iii) Not a common law employee of an Employer;

 

  (iv) Any individual classified by an Employer as an independent contractor;

 

  (v) Any individual classified by an Employer as a leased employee within the meaning of Code § 414(n) unless: (A) the leasing organization is an Employer, (B) the recipient organization is a member of the Company’s Controlled Group, and (C) the individual is otherwise eligible;

 

  (vi) An Associate who is eligible to participate in one or more employee benefit plans of a third party with whom an Employer has contracted for the provision of the Associates’ services; or

 

  (vii) An Associate whose worksite location (as specified by his or her Employer) is within the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico.

 

-16-


For purposes of this Section, it is expressly intended that individuals whom an Employer classifies as independent contractors (under subsection (b)(iv) above) and any other individuals classified as excluded associates under this Section cannot be Eligible Associates until the Plan Administrator affirmatively changes their classification. Therefore, an independent contractor or any other individual who is reclassified by a court, administrative agency, governmental unit, tribunal or other party as an Eligible Associate will nevertheless not be considered an Eligible Associate hereunder for periods before the Plan Administrator implements the reclassification decision, even if the decision applies retroactively.

 

  (c) Special Rule—Prior Status as an Eligible Associate . When an Associate’s eligibility subsequent to a reclassification or rehire depends on the Associate’s status as an Eligible Associate prior to the reclassification or rehire, the Associate will be treated as having been an Eligible Associate prior to the reclassification or rehire if the Associate had attained the applicable age and service milestones prior to such time. Accordingly, such an Associate’s status as an Eligible Associate after the reclassification or rehire shall not be affected by the Associate’s having been reclassified or Separated from Service before such Associate’s prior status as an Eligible Associate could be implemented “as soon as administratively practicable” in accordance with subsection (a) above.

 

2.2 Resumption After Separation from Service.

If an Associate has a Separation from Service and later resumes employment, the individual will become an Eligible Associate in accordance with the provisions of Section 2.1(a) (with the Associate’s Start Date determined in accordance with the rule for rehires in Section 1.58(b)).

 

2.3 Termination of Participation.

 

  (a) A Participant shall cease to be a participant in the Plan upon the earliest of:

 

  (i) The payment to him or her of all vested benefits due to him or her under the Plan;

 

  (ii) His or her Separation from Service with no vested benefits under the Plan; or

 

  (iii) His or her death.

A Participant shall cease to be eligible to make Pre-tax Contributions upon ceasing to be an Eligible Associate.

 

  (b)

An Associate’s Service shall not be considered terminated for purposes of this Plan if the Associate has been on a Leave of Absence, provided that the Associate returns to the employ of the Employer at the expiration of the Leave of Absence. An Associate’s employment shall likewise not be deemed to have been terminated while the Associate is a member of the Armed Forces of the United States, as

 

-17-


 

provided in Code § 414(u), if he or she returns to the service of the Employer within ninety (90) days (or such longer period as may be prescribed by law) from the date he or she first became entitled to discharge.

 

2.4 Acquisitions and Divestitures.

A written agreement between an Employer and a party that is not part of the Company’s Controlled Group regarding the purchase or sale of a “business” (as defined below) may provide for the termination or commencement of the participation of Associates in this Plan. Absent specific provision in such agreement to the contrary:

 

  (a) Each Associate of a business that is sold will cease being eligible for this Plan upon such sale; and

 

  (b) No Associate of a business that is acquired is eligible for this Plan except as the Plan Administrator may specify.

Unless otherwise specifically provided therein, for purposes of Article XI (amendment and termination of the Plan), approval and execution of a written agreement of acquisition or divesture by one or more Employers is approval by the Company of the designation of Plan eligibility under such agreement and authorization from the Company to the Plan Administrator to carry out the provisions and intent of such agreement. For purposes of this Section 2.4, “business” means a business unit, division or subsidiary.

 

-18-


ARTICLE III—CONTRIBUTIONS

 

3.1 Contribution Elections.

An Eligible Associate who wishes to make a Contribution Election shall contact the Participant Response System and specify the percentage of Eligible Pay to be reduced and contributed to the Plan as Pre-tax Contributions each pay period. The amount of such election shall be governed by Section 3.2. In the event an Eligible Associate makes a Contribution Election, it will be designated for contribution by the Employer to the Trust on behalf of the Participant, and for deposit in his or her Pre-tax Contributions Account (or Catch-up Contributions Account in the case of contributions made pursuant to Section 3.2(d) below). All amounts deposited to a Participant’s Pre-tax Contributions Account and Catch-up Contributions Account shall at all times be fully vested.

 

  (a) Timing . A Pre-tax Contribution Election shall be effective as soon as administratively practicable following the date the Plan receives the Pre-tax Contribution Election (e.g., usually by the third paycheck thereafter); provided , however , that no election shall be effective prior to the date the Associate is an Eligible Associate, or in the case of a Participant who ceases to be an Eligible Associate, the first date such Associate again is an Eligible Associate.

 

  (b) Valid Investment Election . While the Plan contemplates that each Eligible Associate who makes a Pre-tax Contribution Election ordinarily will have a valid Investment Election in effect, the Plan generally will accept Pre-tax Contribution Elections before a valid Investment Election has been submitted unless otherwise prohibited by rules adopted by the Plan Administrator. See Section 4.1(b) (default investment elections).

 

  (c) Election Applies to Future Eligible Pay . An Eligible Associate’s Pre-tax Contribution Election shall only apply to Eligible Pay that becomes currently available after the date of the Pre-tax Contribution Election, and before the date the Participant’s Pre-tax Contribution Election is considered revoked.

 

  (d) Automatic Application to Changes in Eligible Pay . A Participant’s Pre-tax Contribution Election shall apply automatically to any increases or decreases in the Participant’s Eligible Pay.

 

  (e) Changes to Elections . A Participant may increase, decrease or revoke his or her Pre-tax Contribution Election on a prospective basis by contacting the Participant Response System. Changes in a Participant’s Pre-tax Contribution Election shall be effective as soon as administratively practicable following the date the Participant’s revised Pre-tax Contribution Election is received. If a Participant’s Pre-tax Contributions terminate because an annual limit is reached ( e.g. , if the Participant reaches one of the dollar limits in Section 3.2(b)), the Pre-tax Contributions will restart the following January 1 unless the Participant affirmatively revokes or changes his or her Pre-tax Contribution Election.

 

-19-


  (f) Changes in Eligible Associate Status . If a Participant with a Pre-tax Contribution Election in effect:

 

  (i) Ceases to be an Eligible Associate, and then again becomes an Eligible Associate, a new Pre-tax Contribution Election shall be required; or

 

  (ii) Goes on unpaid leave and then again returns as an Eligible Associate, the Participant’s Pre-tax Contribution Election shall be given effect following the return to pay status.

 

  (g) Negative Elections . The Plan Administrator has the authority to provide for automatic elections (see Internal Revenue Service Rulings 2000-8 and 98-30).

 

3.2 Pre-tax Contributions.

The amount of Pre-tax Contributions a Participant may defer is subject to the remainder of this Section, as well as the limitations in Articles XIV (ADP/ACP nondiscrimination tests) and XV (Code § 415 maximum contribution limitations).

 

  (a) Plan’s Percentage Limit for Regular Pre-Tax Contributions . Subject to a special limitation for certain IRS Highly Compensated Employees in subsection (c) below, each Participant who is an Eligible Associate may elect to reduce his or her Eligible Pay for a pay period by at least 1% and not more than 75% in whole percentages, and have that amount contributed to the Trust by the Employer as a Pre-tax Contribution. A separate rule applies to Age 50 Catch-up Contributions, which are addressed in subsection (d) below.

 

  (b) Annual Dollar Limit for Regular Pre-Tax Contributions . An Associate’s Pre-tax Contributions plus any elective deferrals made under any other Employer-sponsored cash or deferred arrangement for a calendar year shall not exceed, for calendar year 2015 or later, $18,000 (or such higher amount as is permitted under the cost-of-living provisions of Code § 402(g)(4)).

 

  These limits do not apply to Age 50 Catch-up Contributions, which are addressed in subsection (d) below.

 

  (c) IRS Highly Compensated Employee Limits for regular Pre-Tax Contributions .

 

  (i) Participants who are IRS Highly Compensated Employees for the relevant Plan Year shall not be eligible to make Pre-tax Contributions that exceed the designated percentage (defined in subparagraph (ii) below) of such Participants’ total Eligible Pay for a pay period.

 

  (ii)

The ‘designated percentage’ for purposes of this paragraph is seven percent or such other percentage as is designated by the Compensation

 

-20-


 

Committee for this purpose by resolutions and is communicated to affected Participants, which percentage shall be at least four percent and no greater than ten percent.

 

  (d) Age 50 Catch-up Contributions . Notwithstanding subsections (a), (b) and (c) above, each Participant who is an Eligible Associate and who attains age 50 before the close of a Plan Year may elect to reduce his or her Eligible Pay for a pay period by at least 1% and not more than 60% and have that amount contributed to the Plan by the Employer as an Age 50 Catch-up Contribution in accordance with and subject to the limitations of Code § 414(v).

 

  (i) The amount of the Age 50 Catch-up Contribution for a calendar year may not exceed, for calendar years 2015 and later, $6,000 (or such higher amount as is permitted under the cost-of-living provisions of Code § 414(v)(2)(C)), when combined with any catch-up contributions made under Code § 414(v) to any other plan or arrangement of the Employer.

 

  (ii) Age 50 Catch-up Contributions made pursuant to this subsection shall be treated as Pre-tax Contributions under the Plan, except as otherwise provided below.

 

  (A) Age 50 Catch-up Contributions shall not be taken into account for purposes of the dollar limitations in Section 3.2(b), the limitations on certain IRS Highly Compensated Employees in Section 3.2(c), or for determining Matching Contributions under Section 3.3.

 

  (B) The Plan shall not be treated as failing to satisfy the provisions of Article XIV (ADP/ACP nondiscrimination tests), Article XVI (top heavy), Code § 401(a)(4) (nondiscrimination in contributions), Code § 401(a)(17) (limit on compensation taken into account) or Code § 410(b) (nondiscrimination in coverage) by reason of such Age 50 Catch-up Contributions.

 

  (C) Age 50 Catch-up Contributions may be made in the same pay periods as regular Pre-tax Contributions under Section 3.1(a). At the end of the Plan Year the Plan Administrator will determine if any Age 50 Catch-up Contributions will need to be recharacterized as regular Pre-tax Contributions under Section 3.1(a) or vice versa, pursuant to the requirements of Code section 414(v) and the regulations thereunder.

 

3.3 Matching Contributions.

The Employer shall make discretionary Matching Contributions to the Matching Contributions Accounts of each Participant in the Plan who makes Pre-tax Contributions, subject to the following rules, and subject to Articles XIII (Code § 415) and XIV (nondiscrimination).

 

-21-


  (a) Eligibility Rule for Matching Contributions . To be eligible to receive Matching Contributions, a Participant must complete the one-year eligibility requirement in paragraph (i) below, the quarterly entry date requirement in paragraph (ii) below, and the June 30/December 31 requirement in paragraph (iii) below.

 

  (i) One-Year Eligibility Requirement .

 

  (A) Full-Time Associates : Each Full-Time Associate who becomes a Participant must complete a 365-day period of service commencing on the Associate’s Employment Commencement Date (or Reemployment Commencement Date) and ending on the next Service Cutoff Date. Separate periods of service shall be aggregated in calculating years of eligibility service. A Participant’s period of service shall include a Period of Severance that lasts no more than 12 consecutive months.

 

  (B) Associates other than Full-Time Associates : Each Associate other than a Full-Time Associate who becomes a Participant must complete 1,000 Hours of Service within an Eligibility Computation Period. For purposes of the 1,000 Hours of Service requirement, all Hours of Service completed as an Associate with the Company’s Controlled Group are counted. An Associate who becomes eligible to receive a Matching Contribution based on employment as a Full-Time Associate under Section 3.3(a)(i), and who is then reclassified as an Associate other than a Full-Time Associate, shall continue to be treated as eligible to receive Matching Contributions while so classified (without regard to whether the Associate has satisfied the 1,000 Hours of Service requirement).

 

  (ii) Quarterly Entry Date . The Participant will be eligible to receive Matching Contributions with respect to Pre-tax Contributions the Participant makes in pay periods that begin after the calendar quarter in which the Participant meets the one-year eligibility requirement in paragraph (i) above, subject to the remainder of this paragraph and paragraph (iii) below. To provide for this, the Plan will have January 1, April 1, July 1 and October 1 entry dates for the Plan’s matching contribution feature. Ordinarily an Associate must be employed by an Employer on an applicable entry date to enter on that date into eligibility for matching contributions. However, if an Associate would have entered into eligibility on an entry date (but for having terminated service prior to such date), then the Associate will enter into eligibility for matching contributions (subject to paragraph (iii) below) immediately on the date of the Associate’s rehire into a position that is eligible to make Pre-tax Contributions to the Plan.

 

  (iii) June 30/December 31 Employment .

 

-22-


  (A) January 1 to June 30 . To receive an allocation of Matching Contributions with respect to eligible Pre-tax Contributions that a Participant makes between January 1 and June 30 of a calendar year, the Participant must be an Associate on June 30 of that calendar year.

 

  (B) July 1 to December 31 . To receive an allocation of Matching Contributions with respect to eligible Pre-tax Contributions that a Participant makes between July 1 and December 31 of a calendar year, the Participant must be an Associate on December 31 of that calendar year.

 

  (b) Matching Contribution Formula . Matching Contributions on behalf of each Participant shall equal 50% of the Participant’s Pre-tax Contributions made from pay checks paid during a calendar half, i.e. , January 1 to June 30, or July 1 to December 31 (excluding Age 50 Catch-up Contributions) that do not exceed 6% of the Participant’s Eligible Pay from such pay checks ( i.e. , the maximum Pre-tax Contribution is 3% of Eligible Pay that is paid in the calendar half).

 

  (c) Timing of Matching Contributions .

 

  (i) The Company shall make such Matching Contributions at such times as may be determined by the Plan Administrator in its discretion (provided that such times shall be substantially uniform among all Participants).

 

  (ii) A Participant’s Matching Contribution is made solely on the basis of the measuring periods specified in subsection (a) above and is not made with reference to Pre-tax Contributions for the full Plan Year.

 

  (d) Excess Deferrals and Excess Contributions . Notwithstanding anything in this Section to the contrary, Matching Contributions will be forfeited to the extent they are made with respect to Pre-tax Contributions which are Excess Deferrals or Excess Contributions. For this purpose, any Excess Deferrals and Excess Contributions are deemed to have been made with respect to Pre-tax Contributions that are not otherwise eligible for Matching Contributions to the maximum extent possible, pursuant to rules determined by the Plan Administrator.

 

  (e) Changes in Matching Contributions Formula . The Company shall have the authority to change the Matching Contributions formula at any time.

 

  (f)

2013 Rejuvenation Matching Contribution . Notwithstanding anything in this Section to the contrary, the Company shall make a one-time Matching Contribution on behalf of each Rejuvenation Participant equal to the difference between the matching contribution the Rejuvenation Participant would have received had the Rejuvenation Participant been a Participant of the Plan from January 1, 2013 through July 15, 2013 and the matching contribution that the

 

-23-


 

Rejuvenation Participant received under the Rejuvenation Plan for the period January 1, 2013 through July 15, 2013. For purposes of calculating the 2013 Rejuvenation Matching Contribution, the Plan Administrator shall assume that each Rejuvenation Participant has made a Pre-Tax Contribution to the Plan equal to the Rejuvenation Participant’s Elective Deferral Contribution made to the Rejuvenation Plan.

 

3.4 No Current After-tax Contributions or Profit Sharing Contributions.

 

  (a) After-Tax Contributions . Participants shall not be permitted to make after-tax contributions to the Plan.

 

  (b) Profit Sharing Contributions . The Employer does not currently make Profit Sharing Contributions to the Plan and does not anticipate making Profit Sharing Contributions in the future. The Employer made Profit Sharing Contributions to the Plan prior to 1997, and these Profit Sharing Contributions were allocated to the Profit Sharing Contributions Accounts of those Participants who received them.

 

3.5 Rollover Contributions.

 

  (a) An Eligible Associate may contribute eligible Rollover Contributions to the Plan. Only Eligible Associates are permitted to make Rollover Contributions.

 

  (b) The Plan Administrator may accept a Rollover Contribution provided the Plan Administrator determines, in its discretion, that the contribution meets all of the requirements to qualify as an eligible Rollover Contribution, and provided that the Plan Administrator receives any information it requires regarding the Rollover Contribution.

 

3.6 Military Leave.

Notwithstanding any provision of this Plan to the contrary, contributions, benefits and service credit with respect to qualified military service will be provided in accordance with Code § 414(u). Notwithstanding the restrictions on distributions in Section 8.1, the Plan will permit “qualified reservist distributions” to Participants called to active duty after September 11, 2001, to the extent permitted by Code § 401(k)(2)(B)(i)(V). See also Section 2.3(b) for rules concerning termination of employment in the context of military leave.

 

3.7 Contributions Subject to Deductibility.

The Employer’s obligation to make any contributions under this Plan is expressly conditioned on its ability to deduct such contributions under Code § 404.

 

-24-


3.8 Allocation of Contributions.

 

  (a) Pre-tax Contributions and Matching Contributions . A Participant’s Pre-tax Contributions and any Matching Contributions shall be allocated to a Participant’s Pre-tax Contributions Account, Age 50 Catch-up Contributions Account and Matching Contributions Account, as applicable, as soon as practicable after each pay period.

 

  (b) Rollover Contribution . A Participant’s Rollover Contribution shall be allocated to the Participant’s Rollover Contributions Account as soon as practicable after the date such Rollover Contribution is made.

 

3.9 Valuation, Earnings, Losses and Investment Expenses.

 

  (a) Valuation . Participants’ Accounts shall be valued, and earnings and losses allocated, as of the end of each normal business day. A normal business day shall not include any business day when business is not conducted (or is otherwise restricted) as determined by the Plan Administrator due to abnormal conditions (e.g., an emergency or disruption affecting the Company, the Employer, the recordkeeper, the Trustee, a geographical region, the U.S. or the financial markets), and in such case transfers, transactions, loans, withdrawals and distributions otherwise allowed under this Plan will not be allowed but shall be pended.

 

  (b) Expenses .

 

  (i) “Investment expenses” (as defined below) shall be allocated on the same date as earnings and losses are allocated as provided in subsection (a), and shall be allocated in proportion to the final account balances in the Investment Fund as of the preceding valuation date. “Investment expenses” means all expenses related to the management and maintenance, on a separate basis, of the individual Investment Funds, but shall not include general fees for management and maintenance of the Trust as a whole.

 

  (ii) The Plan Administrator may specify the rules for charging non-investment expenses to the Plan.

 

3.10 Return of Contributions.

Upon written demand by the Employer, the Trustee shall return any Pre-tax Contributions, Matching Contributions and QNECs (to the extent provided for in Section 14.6) contributed by the Employer to this Plan under any one of the circumstances described in (a) and (b):

 

  (a) If a contribution is determined to:

 

-25-


  (i) Be made due to a mistake of fact, the contribution may be returned, adjusted for losses but not earnings, within one year after it is contributed.

 

  (ii) Not be deductible under Code § 404, the portion of the contribution that is disallowed may be returned to the Employer, adjusted for losses but not earnings, within one year after the disallowance.

 

  (iii) Violate Code § 415, if permitted under the Employee Plans Compliance Resolution System (or any successor thereof), such contribution (or portion thereof) may be returned to the Employer to the extent necessary to satisfy the rules of Code § 415 and the applicable Treasury Regulations thereunder as provided in Article XV, and

 

  (iv) Violate Code §§ 401(k)(3) or 402(g)(1), such contribution (or portion thereof) may be returned to the Employer to the extent necessary to satisfy the rules in such Code sections as provided in Article XIV, subject to the rules of Code §§ 401(k)(8) and 402(g)(2).

 

  (b) If Pre-tax Contributions are returned to the Employer in accordance with subsections (a)(i), (ii) or (iii) above, Participants’ Pre-tax Contribution Elections with respect to such returned contributions shall be adjusted retroactively to the beginning of the period for which such contributions were made. As a result, amounts returned in accordance with these subsections shall not be counted in determining a Participant’s Actual Deferral Percentage for purposes of the limitations in Article XIV. The Pre-tax Contributions so returned shall be distributed in cash to those Participants for whom such contributions were made.

 

-26-


ARTICLE IV—INVESTMENTS

 

4.1 Participant Investment Provisions.

 

  (a) Participation Investment Direction . Each Participant shall, in accordance with the procedures set forth in Section 4.2, have the right to direct the Trustee with respect to the investment or reinvestment of the assets comprising the Participant’s Account among the Investment Funds, except as limited by the following historical and transitional provisions:

 

  (i) Matching Contribution Pre-November 1, 2005 and Transitional Rule : All amounts allocated to a Participant’s Matching Contributions Account and Profit Sharing Contributions Account before November 1, 2005 were required to be invested in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund in the case of allocations to Participant Accounts.

 

  (A) Transitional Rule for Existing Account Balance . A Participant’s existing balance in his or her Matching Contribution Account as of November 1, 2005 shall remain invested in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund until the time of the Participant’s (or Beneficiary’s or alternate payee’s, if applicable) first investment direction covering the Participant’s existing Account balance that is made after October 31, 2005; from that time forward, a single investment election will govern the Participant’s entire existing Account balance as of the time of the election.

 

  (B) Transitional Rule for Future Allocations . The Participant’s investment direction for future Pre-Tax Contributions that is in effect on December 1, 2005 shall also govern the Participant’s allocations of Matching Contributions made thereafter, until such time as the Participant makes a new investment election with respect to any future allocations; from that time forward a single investment election will govern both the Participant’s future Matching Contributions and Pre-Tax contributions.

 

  (ii) Pre-August 1, 2003 Rule : Effective for pay periods that began on or before August 1, 2003, Pre-tax Contributions invested in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund were subject to the limitations set forth in subsection (c) below.

After a Participant’s death, the Participant’s Beneficiary shall have the right to direct the Trustee with respect to the investment or reinvestment of the assets comprising the Participant’s Account to the same extent that the Participant had during his or her life. As necessary to accomplish this result, a reference in this

 

-27-


Article to a Participant shall also be deemed to be a reference to the Participant’s Beneficiary.

 

  (b) Most Recent Direction Controls . In the event the Participant does not give the Trustee timely direction regarding the investment or reinvestment of the Participant’s Account, the Trustee shall invest any new contributions made to the Participant’s Account in accordance with the Participant’s most recently submitted Investment Election; provided , however , to the extent it is not possible to continue to invest in accordance with the Participant’s Investment Election (for example, because the Plan has ceased to offer the investment), the affected portion of the Participant’s Account shall be invested in accordance with Section 4.2(d) (Default Investment Fund).

 

  (c) Pre August 2, 2003 Rules for Changing the Investment of Pre-tax Contributions . For pay periods that began on or before August 1, 2003, the following restrictions governed transfers of Pre-tax Contributions from the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund to the Plan’s other Investment Funds. Anytime on or after November 1, 2002, Participants could transfer to another Investment Fund the portion of their Pre-tax Contributions invested in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund as of October 31, 2002. Anytime on or after January 4, 2003, Participants could transfer to another Investment Fund the portion of their Pre-tax Contributions invested in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund as of December 31, 2002. Anytime on or after April 3, 2003, Participants could transfer to another Investment Fund the portion of their Pre-tax Contributions invested in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund as of March 31, 2003. Anytime on or after July 3, 2003, Participants could transfer to another Investment Fund the portion of their Pre-tax Contributions invested in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund as of June 30, 2003. Except as otherwise provided in this paragraph, for pay periods that began on or before August 1, 2003 Participants could not transfer any amounts from the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund to the Plan’s other Investment Funds.

 

4.2 Investment Elections.

Investment Elections shall specify separately how (i) the Participant’s existing Account, and (ii) the Participant’s new contributions shall be invested in the available Investment Funds. The investment of a Participant’s existing account is also referred to in the Plan as a “reinvestment election” or “reallocation election.” Separate Investment Elections also are permitted for Rollover Contributions.

 

  (a) 1% Increments . An Investment Election with respect to new contributions to the Plan shall be made in increments of 1% (or such other percentage as the Plan Administrator shall determine from time to time). An Investment Election to reallocate amounts already in a Participant’s Account shall also be made in increments of 1% (or such other percentage that the Plan Administrator shall determine from time to time).

 

-28-


  (b) Procedural Requirements . Participants may make or change their Investment Elections by contacting the Participant Response System and following the requirements of the Participant Response System for making or changing Investment Elections. A Participant’s change in Investment Election shall be effective with respect to new contributions only, unless the Participant also makes a new Investment Election with respect to amounts already in his or her Account.

 

  (c) Timing . A Participant’s initial or changed Investment Election shall be effective as soon as administratively practicable on or following the date the Plan receives the Participant’s Investment Election.

 

  (d) Default Investment Fund . Subject to Section 4.1(a)(i), any amounts credited to an Account for which no Investment Election has been received will be invested in a default Investment Fund chosen by the Plan Administrator for such purpose.

 

  (e) Participant Responsible for Selection of Investment Funds . Each Participant is solely responsible for his or her selection of Investment Funds and transfers among the available Investment Funds. Neither the Trustee, the Plan Administrator, the Company, the Employer, any of the officers or supervisors of the Employer or the Company, nor any Fiduciary is empowered or authorized to advise a Participant regarding the Participant’s Investment Election, and such individuals and entities shall have no liability for any loss or diminution in value resulting from the Participant’s exercise of such investment responsibility. The fact that an Investment Fund is offered under the Plan shall not be construed as a recommendation that Participants invest in such Investment Fund.

 

  (f) Rule 16b-3(f) Compliance . To the extent necessary to ensure compliance with Rule 16b-3(f) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”), the Company may arrange for tracking of any transaction defined in Rule 16b-3(b)(1) of the Exchange Act involving the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund, and the Company may bar any such transaction to the extent it would not be exempt under Rule 16b-3(f) of the Exchange Act. To the extent the Company exercises its authority to bar a transaction under this subsection, the provisions of this subsection shall apply notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (e).

 

  (g) Blackout Periods . The Plan will comply with § 306 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 which in part requires the Plan to give advance notice of “blackout periods” (as defined in Department of Labor regulation § 2520.101-3(d)(1)) to affected Participants and Beneficiaries ( i.e. , to Participants and Beneficiaries whose rights under the Plan to direct or diversify assets credited to their Accounts, to obtain loans from the Plan, or to obtain distributions from the Plan are suspended, limited or restricted by the blackout period).

 

  (i) The Company (with the consent of the Trustee) is authorized to impose blackout periods pursuant to this subsection (g) whenever the Company determines that circumstances warrant.

 

-29-


  (ii) In addition, the Company imposes quarterly blackout periods on insider trading in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund as needed (as determined by the Company), timed to coincide with the release of the Company’s quarterly earnings reports. The commencement and termination of these blackout periods in each quarter, the parties to which they apply and the activities they restrict shall be as set forth in the official insider trading policy promulgated by the Company from time to time. These quarterly blackouts are “regularly scheduled” within the meaning of Department of Labor regulation § 2520.101-3(d)(1)(ii)(B).

 

4.3 Investment Funds Other Than the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund.

This Section 4.3 applies to Plan Investment Funds other than the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund. The rules governing the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund are set forth in Section 4.4.

 

  (a) In General . As of the Effective Date, the Plan Administrator selected specific Investment Funds that were made available to Participants. From time to time after the Effective Date, in accordance with the investment policies and objectives established by the Plan Administrator, the Plan Administrator may add, cease offering or make changes in the operation and management of any of these Investment Funds at any time, and the Plan Administrator shall have the authority to specify rules and procedures as to how Investment Elections shall be adjusted to reflect the addition, deletion or change in the Investment Funds offered under the Plan. Pending allocation to the Investment Funds, contributions to the Plan may be held uninvested or may, on an interim basis, be invested, in whole or in part, in cash or cash equivalents. Except as otherwise provided herein (or in rules adopted by the Plan Administrator from time to time), dividends, interest, and other distributions received on the assets held by the Trustee in respect of any Investment Fund shall be reinvested in the respective Investment Fund.

 

  (b) Maintaining Liquidity . For the purpose of providing liquidity in certain Investment Funds, the Trustee may invest a portion of each such Investment Fund in cash or short-term securities. If the liquid assets held by these Investment Funds are insufficient to satisfy the immediate demand for liquidity under the Plan, the Trustee, in consultation with the Plan Administrator, may temporarily limit or suspend transfers of any type (including withdrawals and distributions) to or from any affected Investment Fund. In any such case, the Plan Administrator shall temporarily change the Plan’s valuation cycle (pursuant to Section 3.10) or, in its discretion, the valuation cycle for a specific Investment Fund. During this period, contributions to any affected Investment Fund may be redirected to any default Investment Fund chosen by the Trustee for such purpose and instructions and transfers may be pended.

 

4.4 Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund.

This Section 4.4 governs the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund.

 

-30-


  (a) Required Investment Option . The Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund is required to be available to Participants as an Investment Fund pursuant to the terms of the Plan. No provision of the Plan is to be construed to confer discretion or authority in the Trustee or any Fiduciary to remove the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund as an Investment Fund or to limit Participants’ access to invest therein.

 

  (b) Investment in Company Stock . The Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund shall be invested primarily in Company Stock. The Trustee shall direct the investment of a portion of the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund into cash or short-term securities to the extent necessary to maintain a level of liquidity that is reasonably expected to permit trades into and out of the fund.

 

  (c) Unit Accounting . A Participant’s interest in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund shall be based on the ratio of his or her own investment in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund to the aggregate investment of all Participants in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund, and shall be denominated in whole and fractional “units.” The value of a unit will fluctuate in response to various factors, including Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund earnings, losses and expenses. Shares of Company Stock held in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund and dividends and other distributions on Company Stock are not specifically allocated to Participant Accounts.

 

  (d) Voting and Tender Rights . Shares of Company Stock held by the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund will be voted (or tendered, in the event a tender or exchange offer is made with respect to Company Stock) as follows:

 

  (i) The Trustee shall determine the number of units of the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund allocated to each Participant’s Account and, in turn, determine the number of Fund shares of Company Stock that pertain to these units. The Trustee shall then solicit Participants’ instructions as to how such Company Stock shall be voted (or tendered) and shall vote such Company Stock in accordance with each such instruction (or tender to the extent instructed to do so). The Trustee shall not vote (or tender) any Company Stock for which it does not receive such voting (or affirmative tender) instructions. The Trustee shall maintain the confidentiality of instructions received from Participants related to the vote (or tender) of Company Stock.

 

  (e) Dividends and Other Adjustments to the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund . The receipt of dividends or other distributions on Company Stock by the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund shall have no effect on the number of units in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund, and shall be subject to the following provisions.

 

  (i) All cash dividends on shares of Company Stock in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund shall be credited to the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund and shall be used to purchase additional shares of Company Stock or to meet reasonable liquidity demands.

 

-31-


  (ii) Any Company Stock received by the Trustee as a stock dividend or stock split, or as the result of a reorganization or other recapitalization, shall be credited to the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund.

 

  (iii) Any other property (other than cash or shares of Company Stock) received by the Trustee (e.g., shares of stock in another company) shall be credited to the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund. Such other property shall be sold by the Trustee and the proceeds used to purchase additional shares of Company Stock or to meet reasonable liquidity demands. In the event of a significant distribution of such other property, the Plan Administrator may implement special arrangements for the holding or disposition of such other property by the Plan. Any rights to subscribe to additional shares of Company Stock shall be sold by the Trustee and the proceeds credited to the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund.

 

  (f) Purchase and Sale of Company Stock . Shares of Company Stock shall be purchased or sold for the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund in the open market or in privately negotiated transactions. In the unusual event that the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund is acquiring or liquidating a block of stock that is so large that its purchase or sale, in the ordinary course, is expected to disrupt an orderly market in Company Stock, the Trustee (or its designated agent) may limit the daily volume of purchases and sales of Company Stock by the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund to the extent necessary to preserve an orderly market.

 

  (g) Eligible Individual Account Plan . The Trustee is authorized to invest and hold up to 100% of the assets of the Trust in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund. Shares of Company Stock in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund are “qualifying securities” as that term is defined in ERISA. Accordingly, this Plan is an “eligible individual account plan” as defined in ERISA § 407(d)(3). The Trustee may purchase Company Stock from the Employer or any other source, and such Company Stock purchased by the Trustee may be outstanding, newly issued, or treasury shares. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any purchase by the Trustee of any shares of Company Stock from any “party in interest” as defined in ERISA § 3(14), or from any “disqualified person” as defined in Code § 4975(e)(2), shall not be made at a price that exceeds “adequate consideration” as defined in ERISA § 3(18) and no commissions shall be paid with Plan assets on such purchase. The Trustee and all Plan fiduciaries are expressly excused from the requirements of diversification as to the investment of the Trust in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund.

 

  (h)

ESOP . As of the end of the day on April 21, 2006, interests in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund shall be transferred to the ESOP, which shall be a stock bonus plan under Code § 401(a), which is intended to qualify as an employee stock ownership plan under Code § 4975(e)(7) and ERISA § 407(d)(6) (“ESOP”).

 

-32-


 

All Pre-tax Contributions, Rollover Contributions, Matching Contributions and any other contributions and elective deferrals that are made during a Plan Year that are invested in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund shall be added to the ESOP. In addition, any transfers into the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund from another Investment Fund shall be added to the ESOP, and any transfers out of the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund and into another Investment Fund shall be subtracted from the ESOP. The remaining part of the Plan is intended to be a profit sharing plan which meets the requirements for qualification under Code §§ 401(a) and 401(k).

 

  (i) Separate Portion . The ESOP Portion is maintained as a separate portion of the Plan as authorized by Treas. Reg. § 54.4975-11(a)(5), but shall be aggregated with the remainder of the Plan for purposes of the ADP and ACP tests in Article XIV.

 

  (ii) Diversification . The ESOP meets the diversification requirements of Code § 401(a)(28), to the extent applicable, by Plan design since under Section 4.1(a), a Participant may self-direct the investment of 100% of the Participant’s Account.

 

  (iii) Valuations . While it is expected that all shares of distributed Williams-Sonoma, Inc. stock will be readily tradable on an established securities market, valuations of any shares of distributed Williams-Sonoma, Inc. stock that are not so readily tradable will be made by an independent appraiser (within the meaning of Code § 401 (a)(28)(C)).

 

  (iv) Suspense Account Not Required . The ESOP is not required to provide for the establishment and maintenance of a suspense account pursuant to Treasury Regulation section 54.4975-11(c), nor for the protections and rights described in Treasury Regulation section 54.4975-11(a)(3)(i) ( e.g. , put options), because no Plan assets were acquired with an exempt loan.

 

  (v) Distribution in Employer Securities . The distribution provisions of Code § 409(h) (requiring a Participant to be given the opportunity to have his or her Account distributed in the form of employer securities) are met by Plan design because a Participant can transfer his or her entire Plan investment into the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund before taking a distribution, and can take distributions in the form of shares of Williams-Sonoma, Inc. stock pursuant to Section 8.2(c) to extent the distributed amounts are held in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund immediately before the distribution.

 

  (vi) Election to Receive Dividends on ESOP . The Plan Administrator shall prescribe rules and procedures that allow each Participant with an interest in the ESOP to elect to have the vested Cash Dividends allocated to the Participant paid directly to him or her rather than paid to the Plan for reinvestment in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund in the ESOP.

 

-33-


  (A) Rules and Procedures . Such rules and procedures that are prescribed by the Plan Administrator shall be in accordance with the terms of the Plan or, to the extent not specified in the Plan, with the requirements that must be satisfied in order for a federal income tax deduction to be allowed under Code § 404(k) with respect to the amount of cash dividends (including the requirement that the election to receive cash dividends be irrevocable for the period to which it applies).

 

  (B) Minimum Amount . The Plan Administrator shall be allowed to prescribe an amount of Cash Dividends (after application of any processing fee described in subparagraph (C)) below which distributions of Cash Dividends to electing Participants shall not be made, but rather shall be subject to the default rules of paragraph (D) below, subject to increase by the Plan Administrator in its sole discretion (provided that any such increase does not cause it to exceed the level that would permit the Company to deduct such dividends).

 

  (C) Processing Fee . The Plan Administrator shall be allowed to prescribe a processing fee for processing and paying Cash Dividends to electing Participants, subject to increase by the Plan Administrator in its sole discretion (provided that any such increase does not cause it to exceed the level that would permit the Company to deduct such dividends).

 

  (D) In the event:

 

  (I) A Participant does not complete a Payment Election, or

 

  (II) The amount of a Participant’s Cash Dividends is less than the minimum amount established by the Plan Administrator under paragraph (vi)(B) above,

the Participant’s Cash Dividends shall be automatically paid to the Plan, allocated to the ESOP and reinvested in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund.

 

  (vii)

A Participant may make a Payment Election by contacting the record keeper. A Payment Election shall be irrevocable once accepted by the Plan Administrator and only valid for the quarter (or such other time period consisting of not more than one year as is prescribed by the Plan Administrator) to which it applies. A Participant’s Payment Election shall be effective as soon as administratively practicable following the date the Plan receives the Participant’s Payment Election. A Payment Election must be completed by the Participant within the time prescribed for such purpose and pursuant to the rules and procedures adopted by the Plan

 

-34-


 

Administrator from time to time. Any Payment Election that is not completed as required by the Plan Administrator shall be considered null and void.

 

  (viii) Cash Dividends that are paid or reinvested pursuant to Code § 404(k)(2)(A)(iii) and the provisions of this Section shall not be considered to be Annual Additions for purposes of Code § 415(c), Pre-tax Contributions for purposes of Code § 402(g), elective contributions for purposes of Code § 401(k) or employee contributions for purposes of Code § 401(m).

 

  (ix) Definitions. For purposes of this Section 4.4(h) the following phrases shall have the meanings ascribed to them below:

 

  (A) “Cash Dividends” shall mean the cash dividends that are paid on or after April 21, 2006 by the Company with respect to the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. stock in the ESOP.

 

  (B) “ESOP” shall mean the Plan’s holdings in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund, which constitutes an employee stock ownership plan under Code § 4975(e)(7). The ESOP shall invest primarily in employer securities, within the meaning of Code § 409(l), and shall consist of the Company Stock and other assets that are determined by the Plan Administrator to be a part of the ESOP.

 

  (C) “Payment Election” shall mean a completed election made under subsection (c) pursuant to which a Participant has affirmatively elected to have his or her Cash Dividends paid to the Participant in cash outside the Plan.

 

4.5 Investment of Loan Repayments and Restoration of Forfeitures.

Any loan repayments shall be invested in the Investment Funds that have been selected by the Participant for new contributions as in effect on the date such repayments are received. Any repayments in connection with forfeiture restorations under Section 5.5 shall be invested as specified in the Participant’s Investment Election described in such Section. If because of special circumstances a Participant’s investment cannot be carried out in accordance with the two preceding sentences, Section 4.2(d) (default Investment Fund) shall govern.

 

-35-


ARTICLE V—VESTING

 

5.1 Pre-tax Contributions, Rollover Contributions.

A Participant shall be at all times 100% vested in amounts credited to his or her Pre-tax Contributions Account, Age 50 Catch-up Contributions Account and Rollover Contributions Account.

 

5.2 Matching Contributions and Profit Sharing Contributions.

 

  (a) Vesting Schedule . Matching Contributions and Profit Sharing Contributions shall become vested in accordance with the following schedule:

 

Years of Vesting Service

 

Vested Percentage

Less than 1   0%
At least 1 but less than 2   20%
At least 2 but less than 3   40%
At least 3 but less than 4   60%
At least 4 but less than 5   80%
5 or more   100%

 

  (b) 100% Vesting Provisions . Notwithstanding anything in this Section 5.2 to the contrary, a Participant shall become 100% vested in his or her Matching Contributions Account and Profit Sharing Account upon the Participant’s death, Disability, or attainment of Normal Retirement Age while the Participant is an Associate.

Notwithstanding anything in this Section 5.2 to the contrary, a Participant shall become 100% vested in his or her Matching Contributions Account and Profit Sharing Account upon the Participant’s death, Disability, or attainment of Normal Retirement Age while the Participant is an Associate. In addition, if a Participant who is absent from employment while performing qualified military service in accordance with Code §414(u) and Treasury Regulations issued thereunder, becomes disabled or dies while performing such service, the Participant’s Beneficiary shall receive the same benefits that such Beneficiary would have received had the Participant returned to employment with the Employer within the time required by law following such qualified military service and became disabled or died immediately following his return to such employment.

 

5.3 Forfeitures.

 

  (a) If a Participant Separates from Service prior to the time he or she is 100% vested in his or her Account, the non-vested portion of the Participant’s Account shall be forfeited upon the earlier of:

 

-36-


  (i) The Participant’s incurring a Period of Severance that lasts at least 60 consecutive months, or

 

  (ii) The distribution from the Plan of the vested portion of the Participant’s Account on Separation from Service.

For purposes of this Section, a Participant who Separates from Service at a time when he or she has no vested portion shall be deemed to receive a distribution of his or her vested portion on Separation from Service.

 

5.4 Allocation of Forfeitures.

Any amounts forfeited under Section 5.3 shall be used to pay any administrative expenses of the Plan, restore any forfeitures required pursuant to Section 5.5, and offset future Employer contributions to the Plan.

 

5.5 Restoration of Forfeited Account.

 

  (a) In the case of a Participant or former Participant who receives (or is deemed to receive) a distribution of the vested portion of his or her Account and who again becomes an Eligible Associate before incurring a Period of Severance that lasts at least 60 consecutive months, the forfeited amount shall be restored to such Participant’s Account (without regard to any gains and losses).

 

  (b) The Plan Administrator shall restore the forfeited portion of a Participant’s Account from the amount of forfeitures available under the Plan. To the extent the amount of available forfeitures is insufficient to enable the Plan Administrator to make the required restoration, the Employer must contribute, without regard to any requirement or condition of Articles XIII through XVI, the additional amount necessary to enable the Plan Administrator to make the required restoration.

 

  (c) If a Participant does not make an Investment Election and does not have an Investment Election in effect, then Section 4.2(d) (default Investment Fund) shall govern.

 

  (d) The Participant is responsible for notifying the Plan Administrator of his or her forfeited Account balance and his or her pre-break Years of Vesting Service.

 

  (e) If the Participant’s Period of Severance lasts at least 60 consecutive months, the forfeited amount shall not be restored.

 

5.6 Vesting After a Break in Service.

If a Participant has a Separation from Service prior to the time he or she is 100% vested in his or her Account and again becomes an Eligible Associate without incurring a Period of Severance that lasts at least 60 continuous months, such Associate’s post-break Years of Vesting Service shall be taken into account for purposes of determining his or her vested percentage in his or her: (i) restored Account balance, if such Associate’s Account is restored in accordance with Section 5.5, or (ii) existing Account balance, if no distributions have been made.

 

-37-


5.7 Retention of Pre-Break Service.

All Years of Vesting Service before a Period of Severance shall be taken into account for purposes of vesting in post-break Employer contributions except as provided in the next sentence. Effective in the case of Participants who are nonvested at the time a Period of Severance begins and who terminate before August 1, 2003 following the Period of Severance, Years of Vesting Service before the Period of Severance shall not be taken into account if the Period of Severance lasts 60 consecutive months or longer and if it equals or exceeds the aggregate number of Years of Vesting Service before the Period of Severance. For this purpose, a nonvested Participant is a Participant who does not have any nonforfeitable right under the Plan to an Account. In all cases, the Associate must notify the Company of his or her pre-break Service to make sure the Associate is properly credited with all Service to which he or she is entitled.

 

-38-


ARTICLE VI—IN-SERVICE WITHDRAWALS

Except as otherwise provided in this Article VI, a Participant may not take a withdrawal while an Associate of the Company’s Controlled Group.

 

6.1 Withdrawals After Attaining Age 59-1/2.

A Participant may take a withdrawal from his or her vested interest in his or her Account at any time and for any reason after reaching age 59-1/2.

 

6.2 Hardship Withdrawals.

A Participant who is an Associate of the Company’s Controlled Group may receive a hardship withdrawal of all or a portion of his or her Pre-tax Contributions Account (but not the earnings thereon), Age-50 Catch-up Contributions Account (but not the earnings thereon) and Rollover Contributions Account (including the earnings thereon); provided such Participant furnishes proof, satisfactory to the Plan Administrator, that the withdrawal is necessary to alleviate an immediate and heavy financial need (as determined in accordance with subsection (b) below) and that the amount of the withdrawal does not exceed the amount necessary to satisfy such financial need (as determined in accordance with subsection (c) below).

 

  (a) Administrative Rules . The determination by the Plan Administrator of the existence of an immediate and heavy financial need and of the amount necessary to meet such need shall be made in a nondiscriminatory and uniform manner. The Plan Administrator shall not allow a hardship withdrawal to be made to a Participant unless the requirements of this Section are satisfied. No Participant may take more than one hardship withdrawal in any Plan Year, or any hardship withdrawal in an amount less than $500. Hardship withdrawals are made only in the form of a single lump sum cash distribution.

 

  (b) Immediate and Heavy Financial Need . Subject to subsection (c), a Participant shall be deemed to have an immediate and heavy financial need if the Participant needs the hardship withdrawal for one of the following reasons:

 

  (i) Medical expenses described in Code § 213(d) which are incurred by the Participant, the Participant’s Spouse, dependents (as defined in Code § 152) or, effective on the date indicated below, Beneficiary(ies), or necessary for such persons to obtain medical care described in Code § 213(d) without regard to whether the expenses exceed 7.5% of adjusted gross income;

 

  (ii) Costs directly related to the purchase of a principal residence for the Participant (excluding mortgage payments);

 

-39-


  (iii) Payment of tuition and related educational fees for the next 12 months of post-secondary education for the Participant or for the Participant’s Spouse, children, dependents (as defined in Code § 152, and for taxable years beginning after 2004, without regard to section 152(b)(1), (b)(2) and (d)(1)(B)) or, effective on the date indicated below, Beneficiary(ies);

 

  (iv) Payments necessary to prevent the eviction of the Participant from his or her principal residence or to prevent foreclosure on the mortgage of the Participant’s principal residence; or

 

  (v) Payments for burial or funeral expenses for the Participant’s deceased parents, spouse, children, dependents, and for taxable years beginning after 2004, without regard to section 152 (d)(1)(B) or, effective on the date indicated below, Beneficiary(ies);

 

  (vi) Expenses for the repair of damage to the Participant’s principal residence that would qualify for the casualty deduction under section 165 (determined without regard to whether the loss exceeds 10% of adjusted gross income).

 

  (vii) Any need prescribed by the Internal Revenue Service in a revenue ruling, notice or other document of general applicability which satisfies the Internal Revenue Service’s safe harbor definition of hardship.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, a financial need shall not fail to qualify as immediate and heavy merely because such need was reasonably foreseeable or voluntarily incurred by the Participant.

 

  (c) Distribution Necessary to Satisfy the Need . A distribution will be considered as necessary to satisfy an immediate and heavy financial need of the Participant only if all of the following are true:

 

  (i) The Participant has: (A) obtained all distributions (other than hardship distributions), including the total amount available for withdrawal under Section 6.1 (withdrawals after age 59-1/2), and (B) has also taken all nontaxable loans, under all plans maintained by the Employer.

 

  (ii) The Participant must certify in writing to the Plan Administrator that the immediate and heavy financial need (including amounts necessary to pay any federal, state or local income taxes or penalties reasonably anticipated to result from the distribution) cannot reasonably be relieved: (A) through reimbursement or compensation by insurance or otherwise, (B) by liquidation of the Participant’s assets, (C) by cessation of Pre-tax Contributions, (D) by other distributions or nontaxable (at the time of the loan) plan loans from this Plan or other plans maintained by the Employer, or (E) by borrowing from commercial sources on reasonable commercial terms in an amount sufficient to satisfy the need. A need cannot reasonably be relieved if the effect of the action would be to increase the amount of the need.

 

-40-


  (iii) A Participant who receives a hardship withdrawal under this Section shall not be permitted to have Pre-tax Contributions made on his or her behalf until 6 months after the hardship distribution is made. To resume Pre-Tax Contributions, the Participant must contact the Participant Response System and make a new Contribution Election. This ban on Pre-tax Contributions shall also apply to elective deferrals under any other Employer-sponsored plan.

 

6.3 In-Service Withdrawal Procedures and Restrictions.

 

  (a) Participants shall request an in-service withdrawal from the Plan by contacting the Participant Response System and submitting a request that complies with guidelines established by the Plan Administrator.

 

  (b) In-service withdrawals shall be distributed as soon as administratively practicable following the date the Plan Administrator: (i) receives a request for an in-service withdrawal referred to in subsection (a) above which meets the Plan Administrator’s guidelines regarding form and content, and (ii) determines that the applicable requirements for the withdrawal are met.

 

  (c) All withdrawals shall be paid in a lump sum payment in cash or cash equivalent, except that a Participant who qualifies for an age 59-1/2 distribution under Section 6.1 may elect to take his entire distribution from the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund in whole shares of Company Stock as provided in Section 8.2(c).

 

  (d) In-service withdrawals shall be taken from the Participant’s subaccounts in the following order of priority:

 

  (i) Pre-tax Contributions Account;

 

  (ii) Rollover Contributions Account;

 

  (iii) Vested amounts in the Matching Contributions Account,

 

  (iv) Profit Sharing Contribution Account,

 

  (v) Catch-Up Contribution Account,

 

  (vi) Prior 2005 Employee QNEC Account, and

 

  (vii) Prior 2005 Company Special Matching Contribution Account,

(to the extent each such Accounts are available for in-service withdrawal), and shall be taken from the Investment Funds in which such amounts are invested on a pro rata basis.

 

-41-


ARTICLE VII—LOANS

 

7.1 General Rule

An Eligible Associate who is a Full-Time Regular Associate or Part-Time Associate and who is not on a Leave of Absence, may borrow a portion of his or her vested Account, subject to the remainder of this Article VII.

 

  (a) Limited to One Loan . A Participant is not permitted to have more than one loan from the Plan outstanding at any time.

 

  (b) Limitation in the Case of a Prior Defaulted Loan . A Participant who has had a deemed distribution (as would result from a prior defaulted loan) is subject to the restrictions in Section 7.3(c) on taking a new loan from the Plan.

 

  (c) Reasonably Equivalent Basis . Loans shall be made available to all eligible Participants on a reasonably equivalent basis and shall not be made available to IRS Highly Compensated Employees or to shareholders in an amount greater than is made available to other Participants.

 

  (d) Loan Initiation and Promissory Note . To initiate a loan, the Participant must contact the Participant Response System. Each loan shall be evidenced by a written promissory note signed by the Borrower. The promissory note shall be deemed to incorporate the provisions of this Article VII and any administrative rules established by the Plan Administrator.

 

7.2 Amount of Loan.

A loan may be made in an amount (not less than $1,000) which, when added to the outstanding balance of all prior loans (including outstanding interest) to the Borrower under the Plan, does not exceed the lesser of:

 

  (a) $50,000, reduced by the excess, if any, of:

 

  (i) The highest outstanding balance of the Borrower’s loans from the Plan during the one-year period ending on the day before the date such loan was made, minus

 

  (ii) The outstanding balance of the Borrower’s loans from the Plan on the date on which such loan was made; or

 

  (b) One-half of the present value of the Borrower’s non-forfeitable accrued benefit under the Plan.

For purposes of applying the limitation in (a) above, the Plan and all other “qualified employer plans” (as defined in Code § 72(p)(4)) maintained by an employer within the

 

-42-


Company’s Controlled Group shall be treated as a single plan, and any loan that has been deemed distributed pursuant to Section 7.6 shall be considered outstanding until it has been repaid (whether by plan loan offset or otherwise). Loans must be taken in an amount that is in an increment of $1 or such other amount as is established by the Plan Administrator for this purpose.

 

7.3 Interest Rate, Security and Fees.

 

  (a) Interest Rate . Loans shall be made at the “prime rate” plus one percentage point, or such other interest rate as may be designated by the Plan Administrator for this purpose. The prime rate shall be determined as of the date the loan is made or such other date as is established by the Plan Administrator for this purpose. The applicable prime rate shall be the rate as announced in the Wall Street Journal (or to the extent the Wall Street Journal ceases to be published, such other newspaper as is selected by the Plan Administrator), or such other rate as is selected by the Plan Administrator for this purpose.

 

  (b) Security . Loans shall be secured by the vested portion of the Borrower’s Account. As of immediately after the origination of a loan, no more than 50% of the Participant’s vested Account may be used as security for the loan.

 

  (c) Consequences of Deemed Distribution . If a Participant has a loan that is deemed distributed pursuant to Section 7.6 as a result of the failure to make timely payments, then:

 

  (i) Until the Participant has repaid the loan that was deemed distributed (whether by plan loan offset or otherwise):

 

  (A) The Participant shall not be eligible to take future loans from this Plan, and

 

  (B) The Plan Administrator shall require any new loan issued to such Participant to include such enhanced security for the Plan as it deems appropriate, determined in light of the prior default (e.g., the Plan Administrator may require payroll deductions for the life of the loan).

 

  (ii) The Plan Administrator shall have the authority to suspend Participants from taking new loans for a period of time after a Participant has had a deemed distribution. The suspension period shall be determined from time to time by the Plan Administrator and shall be uniform and consistent for all Participants.

 

  (d) Loan Fees . The Plan Administrator may charge a loan initiation fee and an ongoing loan maintenance fee that shall be assessed against the Participant’s Account, the amount of which shall be subject to change.

 

-43-


  (e) Reamortization . A Participant is not permitted to initiate a loan reamortization. The Plan Administrator may authorize a loan reamortization under circumstances to be determined from time to time by the Plan Administrator (e.g., when loan repayments are not started promptly because of administrative error) under rules that shall be uniform and consistent for all Participants.

 

7.4 Source of Loans.

Amounts borrowed shall be taken from vested amounts in the Borrower’s subaccounts in the following order of priority:

 

  (a) Pre-tax Contributions Account;

 

  (b) Rollover Contributions Account;

 

  (c) Matching Contributions Account,

 

  (d) Profit Sharing Contribution Account,

 

  (e) Catch-up Contribution Account,

 

  (f) Prior 2005 Employee QNEC Account, and

 

  (g) Prior 2005 Company Special Matching Contribution Account,

and shall be taken from the Investment Funds in which such amounts are invested on a pro rata basis (except that, to the extent the Participant’s right to take a loan from an Investment Fund is suspended, limited or restricted by a blackout period described in Section 4.2(g), amounts in such Investment Fund shall be disregarded for purposes of this pro rata basis rule and shall not be available for borrowing).

 

7.5 Repayment and Term.

 

  (a) Loan Repayment . Loans shall be amortized in substantially level payments, made not less frequently than quarterly, for a period of not less than 12 months and not more than 5 years; provided , however , that a “principal residence loan” (as defined below) may be amortized over a period not to exceed 15 years, and subject to the special rule for military leave (see clause (iii) below).

 

  (i) Principal Residence Loan . A “principal residence loan” means a loan made in accordance with this Section 7.5 to acquire or construct any dwelling unit which, within a reasonable time, will be used as the principal residence of the Participant (such use to be determined at the time the loan is made). A Participant requesting a principal residence loan shall provide copies of any documents relating to the purchase of such principal residence which the Plan Administrator may deem necessary to verify that the proceeds of such loan will be used to acquire or construct a principal residence.

 

-44-


  (ii) Suspension During Leave of Absence . Loan repayments shall be suspended for up to one year for a Participant on a Leave of Absence lasting at least one month (or such other minimum period as shall be established by the Plan Administrator for this purpose) either without pay from the Employer or at a rate of pay (after applicable employment tax withholdings) that is less that the amount of the installment payments required under the terms of the loan, to the extent permitted by applicable Treasury Regulations. In no event shall the suspension period cause the loan to exceed the maximum 5 or 15 year term set forth in subsection (a) above. In the event loan repayments are suspended during a Leave of Absence:

 

  (A) When the suspension of loan repayments ends, the Participant’s remaining loan payments shall be recalculated in substantially level payments automatically by the Plan Administrator or recordkeeper as follows: Any unpaid interest that accrued during the Leave of Absence shall be incorporated into the principal balance that is owed, the original term of the loan shall be extended by the length of the Leave of Absence (but in no event shall the total term, including the extension, exceed the maximum 5 or 15 year term set forth in subsection (a) above), and the original interest rate shall be retained.

 

  (B) During the period of the Leave of Absence, interest shall accrue during the Leave of Absence at the rate determined by the Plan Administrator for this purpose, applying reasonable commercial principles and with the object of providing adequate protection for the Plan’s interest based on all the facts and circumstances.

See clause (iii) below for special rules governing military leave.

 

  (iii) Suspension During Military Leave . Loan repayments shall be suspended for a Participant on military leave as permitted under Code § 414(u)(4), even if such suspension exceeds the maximum 5 or 15 year term provided for in Section 7.5(a). Such suspended loan repayments shall, upon the Participant’s completion of the military leave, resume under the following rules:

 

  (A) The rules that apply to repayment of loans following a Leave of Absence shall apply to a suspension during military leave (including the automatic recalculation of loan repayments), except as otherwise provided in this Article. The suspension period can cause the loan to exceed the maximum 5 or 15 year term set forth in subsection (a) above. The total loan term shall be extended on rehire up to a period that is equal to (I) the original term of the loan, plus (II) the period of military leave (even if such term exceeds the maximum 5 or 15 year term provided for in Section 7.5(a)).

 

-45-


  (B) The interest rate shall be capped at 6% during the period in which a Participant is on military leave to the extent required under Section 207 of the Servicemembers Civil Relief Act of 2003 (taking into account any fees referred to in (d) below).

 

  (C) The loan must be repaid in full, including interest that accrues during the period of military service, not later than the end of the period that is equal to the greater of the maximum 5 or 15 year period, or: (A) the original term of the loan, plus (B) the period of military service.

 

  (b) Payroll Deduction and Direct Payment . Loans shall be repaid by means of payroll deduction from the Borrower’s earnings, starting promptly following the processing of the loan, subject to paragraph (ii) below. If payroll deductions for the loan payments do not start promptly following the processing of the loan, the Participant is responsible to notify the Plan Administrator.

 

  (i) Loan repayment shall be made in accordance with the terms and procedures established by the Plan Administrator from time to time and applied on a uniform, nondiscriminatory basis.

 

  (ii) A Participant shall make loan repayments by direct payment (rather than payroll withholding) if the Participant:

 

  (A) Is a Temporary Associate,

 

  (B) Is a Casual Associate, or

 

  (C) Falls more than one month behind in payments (or such other minimum period as shall be established by the Plan Administrator for this purpose) for any reason (including not receiving sufficient earnings to cover the loan payment by payroll withholding, e.g., as might happen if the Participant shifts to a reduced-hours schedule so that the Participant’s earnings are insufficient to cover the loan payment). This does not apply to a suspension during a Leave of Absence provided for in (a)(ii) above or during military leave provided for in (a)(iii) above.

If loan repayments are made by direct repayment, they shall be made pursuant to the terms and procedures established by the Plan Administrator and applied on a uniform, nondiscriminatory basis. Once a Participant begins making loan repayments by direct payment under this Section, the Participant will not be eligible to resume repayment by payroll deduction. (Participants returning from a Leave of Absence or military leave shall be eligible to resume payroll withholding unless they are otherwise described in this subsection (b)(ii)).

 

-46-


  (c) Prepayment . A Participant may repay an outstanding loan in full at any time without penalty.

 

  (d) Loan Due on Termination of Employment . In the event a Participant terminates employment with the Company, the entire loan (both outstanding principal and interest) is due and payable immediately (subject to the cure period in Section 7.6(b)).

 

7.6 Deemed Distributions.

 

  (a) General Rule . If the Plan Administrator determines that a Borrower’s loan repayments are in arrears, then the amount of such loan (plus any accrued interest) shall be deemed distributed as of the end of the cure period described in subsection (b) below, if the arrearage has not been corrected by that time. The value of the Borrower’s Account shall be offset and reduced to reflect the deemed distribution as of the later of date of the deemed distribution, or the date the Participant Separates from Service, Retires, dies or becomes disabled. If a loan is deemed to be distributed, additional interest shall continue to accrue following the deemed distribution date on the portion of the loan that is not repaid as of that date. This additional interest shall not be considered an additional deemed distribution, but it shall be taken into account in determining the amount of the Participant’s outstanding indebtedness to the Plan.

 

  (b) Cure Period . The failure to make any loan payment when otherwise due in accordance with the terms of the loan shall not result in a deemed distribution under subsection (a) if such loan payment is otherwise made by the last day of the calendar quarter following the calendar quarter in which the loan payment was due (the “cure period”). The determination of when a deemed distribution occurs under subsection (a) shall be made by the Plan Administrator applying reasonable commercial principles and with the object of providing adequate protection for the Plan’s interest based on all the facts and circumstances.

 

  (c) Administrative Provisions . The provisions of this Section and Section 7.1(b) reflect how Plan loans are intended to be administered for purposes of determining their taxability under the Code. These provisions are not requirements for purposes of the prohibited transaction rules of the Code and ERISA or for purposes of the qualification rules of the Code.

 

7.7 Additional Rules.

The Plan Administrator may establish rules and procedures regarding loans to Participants which may be more restrictive than the rules and procedures set forth in this Article VII. Any such rules and procedures must be in writing and be applied on a uniform, nondiscriminatory basis. In addition, they shall be deemed to be a part of the Plan for purposes of the loan regulations issued by the Department of Labor.

 

-47-


ARTICLE VIII—DISTRIBUTIONS

 

8.1 Eligibility for Distribution Upon Separation From Service or Disability.

A Participant who Separates from Service or suffers a Disability shall be entitled to receive a distribution of the vested portion of his or her Account.

 

8.2 Form of Payment.

Distributions shall be in one lump sum payment, except that a Participant who is required to commence distributions under Section 8.6(d) (distributions at age 70  1 / 2 ) may instead elect to receive installment payments in the amount of the minimum required distributions provided for therein.

 

  (a)

The Participant may elect to defer receipt of the distribution until the April 1st following the calendar year he or she attains age 70  1 / 2 , subject to the cashout rules in Section 8.4.

 

  (b) All distributions shall be in cash or cash equivalent, except as provided in subsection (c).

 

  (c)

A Participant receiving a lump sum distribution under this Article VIII or a withdrawal under Section 6.1 (withdrawals after attaining age 59  1 / 2 ) may elect to receive his or her entire interest in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund in whole shares of Company Stock (but with cash or cash equivalent paid for any fractional shares, uninvested cash or amounts invested for liquidity purposes). For such an election to be effective, the Participant must make this election in the manner and form specified by the Plan Administrator from time to time.

 

8.3 Amount of Distribution.

The amount of any distribution that is based on the value of a Participant’s Account, or a portion thereof, shall be determined with reference to the value of such Account (or portion thereof) as of the time the payment of the distribution is processed.

 

8.4 Cashout Distributions and Automatic Rollovers.

If the vested portion of the Account of a Participant who has a Separation from Service does not exceed $5,000, excluding Rollover Contributions, (“small dollar cashout”) on the date payment of the distribution is processed, or on a determination date established by the Plan Administrator in each calendar quarter thereafter, the Participant’s Account shall be distributed in a lump sum “cashout distribution” to the Participant as soon as administratively practical thereafter. In the event of a mandatory distribution greater than $1,000 in accordance with the provisions of this Section 8.4, if the Participant does not elect to have such distribution paid directly to an Eligible Retirement Plan specified by the Participant in a direct rollover or to receive the distribution directly in accordance

 

-48-


with this Section 8.4 and Section 8.7, then the Plan Administrator will pay the distribution in a direct rollover to an individual retirement plan designated by the Plan Administrator. The cashout shall be in cash, except that a Participant may elect to receive his or her entire interest in the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund (if any) in whole shares of Williams-Sonoma stock as provided in Section 8.2(c) provided the Participant so elects within 30 days, as permitted by the Plan’s recordkeeper. See Section 8.5(d) for rules applicable to Beneficiaries.

 

8.5 Distribution Upon Death.

 

  (a) Death Before Distributions Commence . Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (i) (optional deferral of distribution commencement), if a Participant dies before distributions begin from his or her Account, 100% of the Participant’s Account shall be paid to his or her Beneficiary in one lump sum following notice to the Plan Administrator of the Participant’s death. For this purpose, distributions are considered to begin no later than the Participant’s Required Beginning Date.

 

  (i) Optional Deferral of Distribution Commencement . The Participant’s Beneficiary may elect to defer receipt of the lump sum distribution until the fifth-anniversary of the Participant’s death (subject to subparagraph (A) (applicable rules), subparagraph (B) (surviving spouse rules), Section 8.4 (cashout rules) and the rules in Code § 401(a)(9).

 

  (A) Applicable Rules . Such deferral election must be made within 30 days of when the Plan notifies the Beneficiary that he or she is recognized as a Beneficiary (or such later time as the Plan Administrator shall prescribe). The Beneficiary may revoke the deferral election at any time and elect in lieu thereof to receive an immediate lump sum distribution of the balance in the Participant’s Account.

 

  (B)

Additional Deferral Option for Surviving Spouse . If the Surviving Spouse is the sole Beneficiary, the Surviving Spouse may elect to defer distribution of the lump sum distribution until the April 1st following the date the Participant would have attained age 70  1 / 2 . A Surviving Spouse who makes such a deferral election shall be eligible to revoke such election at any time and in lieu thereof receive a lump sum distribution of the balance of the Participant’s Account.

 

  (C)

Death of Surviving Spouse Before Distributions Begin . If the Participant’s Surviving Spouse is the Participant’s sole Beneficiary and the Surviving Spouse dies after the Participant but before distributions begin to either the Participant or the Surviving Spouse, the fifth-anniversary election will apply as if the Surviving Spouse were the Participant. For this purpose, distributions are

 

-49-


 

considered to begin on the date distributions are required to begin to the Surviving Spouse under paragraph (B) (which allows the Surviving Spouse to defer until the Participant would have attained age 70  1 / 2 ).

 

  (b) Death After Distributions Commence . If a Participant dies after distribution of his or her Account has commenced in the form of installment payments (i.e., pursuant to Section 8.6(d), Code section 401(a)(9) distributions), the remaining portion of such Participant’s Account shall be distributed to the Participant’s Beneficiary in a lump sum. Payment of this lump sum cannot be deferred.

 

  (c) Proof of Death . The Plan Administrator may require and rely upon such proof of death and such evidence of the right of any Beneficiary or other person to receive the value of a deceased Participant’s Account as the Plan Administrator may deem proper and its determination of death and of the right of that Beneficiary or other person to receive payment shall be conclusive.

 

  (d) Cashout Distributions and Automatic Rollovers . Rules similar to the rules in Section 8.4 (Cashout Distributions and Automatic Rollovers) shall apply in the case of any Beneficiary of a deceased Participant for whom the vested portion of the Participant’s Account does not exceed the small dollar cashout amount described in such Section, pursuant to rules established by the Plan Administrator for this purpose.

 

  (e) Definitions . For purposes of this Section 8.5, the definitions of Distribution Calendar Year, Life Expectancy, Participant’s Account Balance, and Required Beginning Date in Section 8.6(d) apply.

 

8.6 Commencement of Payments.

 

  (a) General Time of Commencement . Subject to the remaining provisions of this Section, following a Participant’s Separation from Service, the distribution of the Participant’s Account shall commence as soon as practicable after the earlier of:

 

  (i) The receipt of a distribution request from the Participant (or his or her Beneficiary, in the case of a distribution at death) that meets all the requirements applied by the Plan Administrator (including any requirement for Participant consent applicable under subsection (b)); or

 

  (ii) In the case of a distribution that is made pursuant to the cashout rules of Section 8.4, as soon as practicable following the Participant’s Separation from Service or the applicable quarterly review date applicable thereunder.

Participants may request a distribution by contacting the Participant Response System and submitting a request that complies with guidelines established by the Plan Administrator. If a Participant has a Separation from Service and again becomes an Associate prior to the date the distribution is deemed to be processed by the Plan’s current recordkeeper, the Participant shall not receive a distribution.

 

-50-


  (b) Participant Consent .

 

  (i) Participant consent is a pre-condition for commencing distributions unless the distribution is made: (A) pursuant to the cashout rules of Section 8.4, (B) in connection with a Participant’s death, or (C) pursuant to the Code § 401(a)(9) requirements of subsection (d) below

 

  (ii) Except as provided in paragraph (iii) below, a Participant’s consent to receive a distribution shall not be valid unless the Participant gives consent: (A) after the Participant has received the notice required under Treas. Reg. § 1.411(a)-11(c), and (B) within a reasonable time before the effective date of the commencement of the distribution as prescribed by such regulations. A Participant’s consent shall be in writing or, if authorized by the Plan Administrator, provided through an electronic medium that meets the requirements of Treas. Reg. § 1.411(a)-11(f).

 

  (iii) Once a Participant or Beneficiary has made an appropriate distribution request through the Participant Response System and the Plan Administrator has received notice of the Participant’s death (if applicable), such distribution may commence less than 30 days after the notice required under Treas. Reg. § 1.411(a)-11(c) is given, provided that: (A) the Plan Administrator clearly informs the Participant that he or she has a right to a period of at least 30 days after receiving the notice to consider the decision of whether or not to elect a distribution (and, if applicable, a particular distribution option), and (B) the Participant, after receiving the notice, affirmatively elects a distribution.

 

  (c) Code § 401(a)(14) Provisions . In the case of a Participant who has filed a claim to commence benefits in accordance with applicable regulations under Code § 401(a)(14), including Treas. Reg. § 1.401(a)-14(a) thereof, distribution of the Participant’s interest in the Plan shall commence no later than the 60th day after the close of the latest of the following:

 

  (i) The Plan Year in which the Participant attains age 65,

 

  (ii) The Plan Year in which occurs the tenth anniversary of the date his participation commenced, or

 

  (iii) The Plan Year in which occurs the Participant’s Separation from Service.

 

  (d) Code Section 401(a)(9) Provisions . All distributions required under the Plan will be determined and made in accordance with the Treasury Regulations under Code § 401(a)(9). Notwithstanding the other provisions of the Plan, distributions may be made under a designation made before January 1, 1984, in accordance with section 242(b)(2) of the Tax Equity and Fiscal Responsibility Act (TEFRA) and the provisions of the Plan that relate to section 242(b)(2) of TEFRA.

 

-51-


  (i) A Participant’s entire interest will be distributed, or begin to be distributed, to the Participant no later than the Participant’s Required Beginning Date. If the Participant dies before distributions begin, the Participant’s entire interest will be distributed, or begin to be distributed, no later than as follows:

 

  (A)

If the Participant’s surviving spouse is the Participant’s sole Designated Beneficiary, then distributions to the surviving spouse will begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar during which the Participant died, or by December 31 of the calendar year in which the Participant would have attained age 70  1 / 2 , if later.

 

  (B) If the Participant’s surviving spouse is not the Participant’s sole Designated Beneficiary, then distributions to the Designated Beneficiary will begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which the Participant died.

 

  (C) If there is no Designated Beneficiary as of September 30 of the year following the year of the Participant’s death, the Participant’s entire interest will be distributed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant’s death.

 

  (D) If the Participant’s surviving spouse is the Participant’s sole Designated Beneficiary and the surviving spouse dies after the Participant but before distributions to the surviving spouse begin, this Section 8.6(d)(i), other than section 8.6(d)(i)(A), will apply as if the surviving spouse were the Participant.

For purposes of this Section 8.6(d)(i) and Section 8.6(d)(iii), unless Section 8.6(d)(i)(D) applies, distributions are considered to begin on the Participant’s Required Beginning Date. If Section 8.6(d)(i)(D) applies, distributions are considered to begin on the date distributions are required to begin to the surviving spouse under Section 8.6(d)(i)(A) If distributions under an annuity purchased from an insurance company irrevocably commence to the Participant before the Participant’s Required Beginning Date (or to the Participant’s surviving spouse before the date distributions are required to begin to the surviving spouse under Section 8.6(d)(i)(A)), the date distributions are considered to begin is the date distributions actually commence.

Unless the Participant’s interest is distributed in the form of an annuity purchased from an insurance company or in a single sum on or before the Required Beginning Date, as of the first Distribution Calendar Year distributions will be

 

-52-


made in accordance with Sections 8.6(d)(iii) and 8.6(d)(iv). If the Participant’s interest is distributed in the form of an annuity purchased from an insurance company, distributions thereunder will be made in accordance with the requirements of Code § 401(a)(9)and the Treasury Regulations.

 

  (ii) During the Participant’s lifetime, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each Distribution Calendar Year is the lesser of

 

  (A) the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s account balance by the distribution period in the Uniform Lifetime Table set forth in Treasury Regulation § 1.401(a)(9)-9, using the Participant’s age as of the Participant’s birthday in the Distribution Calendar Year; or

 

  (B) if the Participant’s sole designated Beneficiary for the Distribution Calendar Year is the Participant’s spouse, the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s account balance by the number in the Joint and Last Survivor Table set forth in Treasury Regulation § 1.401(a)(9)-9, using the Participant’s and spouse’s attained ages as of the Participant’s and spouse’s birthdays in the Distribution Calendar Year.

Required minimum distributions will be determined under this Section 8.6(d)(ii) beginning with the first Distribution Calendar Year and up to and including the Distribution Calendar Year that includes the Participant’s date of death.

 

  (iii) If the Participant dies on or after the date distributions begin and there is a Designated Beneficiary, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each Distribution Calendar Year after the year of the Participant’s death is the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s Account Balance by the longer of the remaining Life Expectancy of the Participant or the remaining Life Expectancy of the Participant’s Designated Beneficiary, determined as follows:

 

  (A) The Participant’s remaining Life. Expectancy is calculated using the age of the Participant in the year of death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.

 

  (B) If the Participant’s surviving spouse is the Participant’s sole Designated Beneficiary, the remaining Life Expectancy of the surviving spouse is calculated for each Distribution Calendar Year after the year of the Participant’s death using the surviving spouse’s age as of the spouse’s birthday in that year. For Distribution Calendar Years after the year of the surviving spouse ‘s death, the remaining Life Expectancy of the surviving spouse is calculated using the age of the surviving spouse as of the spouse’s birthday in the calendar year of the spouse’s death, reduced by one for each subsequent calendar year.

 

-53-


  (C) If the Participant’s surviving spouse is not the Participant’s sole Designated Beneficiary, the Designated Beneficiary’s remaining Life Expectancy is calculated using the age of the Beneficiary in the year following the year of the Participant’s death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.

If the Participant dies on or after the date distributions begin and there is no Designated Beneficiary as of September 30 of the year after the year of the Participant’s death, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each Distribution Calendar Year after the year of the Participant’s death is the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s Account Balance by the Participant’s remaining Life Expectancy calculated using the age of the Participant in the year of death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.

 

  (iv) If the Participant dies before the date distributions begin and there is a Designated Beneficiary, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each Distribution Calendar Year after the year of the Participant’s death is the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s Account Balance by the remaining Life Expectancy of the Participant’s Designated Beneficiary, determined as provided in Section 8.6(d)(iii).

If the Participant dies before the date distributions begin and there is no Designated Beneficiary as of September 30 of the year following the year of the Participant’s death, distribution of the Participant’s entire interest will be completed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant’s death.

If the Participant dies before the date distributions begin, the Participant’s surviving spouse is the Participant’s sole Designated Beneficiary, and the surviving spouse dies before distributions are required to begin to the surviving spouse under Section 8.6(d)(i)(A), this Section 8.6(d)(iv) will apply as if the surviving spouse were the Participant.

 

  (v) The following definitions will apply for purposes of this Section 8.6(d):

 

  (A) “Designated Beneficiary” means the individual who is designated as the Beneficiary, as such term is defined in Section 1.5, and is the designated Beneficiary under Code §401(a)(9) and Treasury Regulation § 1.401(a)(9)-1, Q&A-4.

 

  (B)

“Distribution Calendar Year” means a calendar year for which a minimum distribution is required. For distributions beginning before the Participant’s death, the first Distribution Calendar Year is the calendar year immediately preceding the calendar year which

 

-54-


 

contains the Participant’s Required Beginning Date. For distributions beginning after the Participant’s death, the first Distribution Calendar Year is the calendar year in which distributions are required to begin under this Section 8.6. The required minimum distribution for the Participant’s first Distribution Calendar Year will be made on or before the Participant’s Required Beginning Date. The required minimum distribution for other Distribution Calendar Years, including the required minimum distribution for the Distribution Calendar Year in which the Participant’s Required Beginning Date occurs, will be made on or before December 31 of that Distribution Calendar Year.

 

  (C) “Life Expectancy” means the life expectancy as computed by use of the Single Life Table in Treasury Regulation § 1.401(a)(9)-9.

 

  (D) “Participant’s Account Balance” means the account balance as of the last valuation date in the calendar year immediately preceding the Distribution Calendar Year (valuation calendar year) increased by the amount of any contributions made and allocated or forfeitures allocated to the account balance as of dates in the valuation calendar year after the valuation date and decreased by distributions made in the valuation calendar year after the valuation date. The account balance for the valuation calendar year includes any amounts rolled over or transferred to the plan either in the valuation calendar year or in the Distribution Calendar Year if distributed or transferred in the valuation calendar year.

 

  (E)

“Required Beginning Date” shall mean April 1 of the calendar year following the later of (i) the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70  1 / 2 ; or (ii) the calendar year in which the Participant retires. However if the Participant is a five-percent owner with respect to the plan year ending in the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70  1 / 2 , “Required Beginning Date” shall mean April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70  1 / 2 .

 

8.7 Direct Rollovers.

A Participant (or an alternate payee or Beneficiary) may elect to have any portion of a distribution from this Plan that is an Eligible Rollover Distribution paid directly to an Eligible Retirement Plan by submitting a request through the Participant Response System. Notwithstanding the foregoing, effective for distributions before August 1, 2007 the Plan will not permit direct rollovers on behalf of a Beneficiary unless the Beneficiary is the Participant’s Surviving Spouse.

 

-55-


8.8 Qualified Domestic Relations Orders.

The Plan Administrator shall establish reasonable procedures to determine the qualified status of a domestic relations order in accordance with the requirements of Code § 414(p) and ERISA § 206(d) (“qualified domestic relations order”).

 

  (a) Distributions .

 

  (i) An alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations order may receive a distribution from this Plan prior to the date the Participant to whom the order relates attains the earliest retirement age under the Plan, even if this precedes the Participant’s Separation from Service.

 

  (ii) An alternate payee will be eligible for periodic installments under Section 8.2 only to the extent the Participant would be eligible for such installment payments by separating from service and receiving a payout on the proposed distribution date selected by the alternate payee.

 

  (iii) For purposes of Section 8.6(d) (Code § 401(a)(9) provisions), an alternate payee’s separate interest in the Plan shall be distributed beginning not later than the Participant’s required beginning date and shall be paid out based on the life expectancy of the alternate payee.

 

  (b) Investment Elections . Under rules to be adopted by the Plan Administrator from time to time, amounts credited to an Account maintained on behalf of an alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations order shall be initially invested pursuant to the Participant’s Investment Election. Thereafter, the alternate payee may change such Investment Election by contacting the Participant Response System.

 

  (c) Cashout Distributions and Automatic Rollovers . Rules similar to the rules in Section 8.4 (Cashout Distributions and Automatic Rollovers) shall apply in the case of any alternate payee for whom the vested portion of the Participant’s Account does not exceed the small dollar cashout amount described in such Section, pursuant to rules established by the Plan Administrator for this purpose.

 

8.9 Beneficiary Designation.

 

  (a) A Participant may designate a Beneficiary to receive the value of his or her Account following the Participant’s death by following the specific procedures established by the Plan Administrator for this purpose. The Participant may change the designation by following the same procedures. Such a designation shall supersede any beneficiary designations previously filed by the Participant (or Beneficiary, if applicable).

 

  (b)

Notwithstanding subsection (a) above, if a Participant dies leaving a Surviving Spouse before the complete distribution of his or her Account, the Participant’s Beneficiary shall be the Participant’s Surviving Spouse, unless such Surviving

 

-56-


Spouse has consented to the designation of another Beneficiary in a writing that acknowledges the effect of such consent and that is witnessed by a notary public or Plan representative, or as otherwise provided by applicable law and permitted by the Plan Administrator. The Surviving Spouse’s consent shall not be required if:

 

  (i) The Plan Administrator is unable to locate the Participant’s Spouse;

 

  (ii) The Participant is legally separated or the spouse has abandoned the Participant and the Participant has a court order to that effect; or

 

  (iii) Other circumstances exist under which the Secretary of the Treasury will excuse the consent requirement.

If the Participant’s Spouse is legally incompetent to give consent, the Spouse’s legal guardian may give consent (even if the Participant is the legal guardian). Consent by a Spouse, or establishment that a Spouse’s consent cannot be obtained, shall only be effective with respect to such individual Spouse.

 

  (c) If a Participant does not have a Beneficiary or if the Beneficiary predeceases the Participant, then the Participant shall be deemed to have designated a Beneficiary or Beneficiaries in the following order of priority, and the Plan Administrator shall direct the Trustee to pay benefits under this Plan to such Beneficiary or Beneficiaries:

 

  (i) To the Participant’s surviving spouse;

 

  (ii) To the Participant’s surviving children in equal shares;

 

  (iii) To the Participant’s surviving parents in equal shares;

 

  (iv) To the Participant’s surviving siblings in equal shares;

 

  (v) To the Participant’s surviving nieces and nephews in equal shares; or

 

  (vi) To the Participant’s estate.

 

  (d) If the Beneficiary survives the Participant, but dies prior to the complete distribution of the Participant’s Account, the Plan Administrator shall direct the Trustee to pay the amounts remaining in the Participant’s Account to the Beneficiary’s estate (unless the Plan Administrator establishes written rules that allow a Beneficiary to name another Beneficiary, in which case amounts remaining in the Participant’s Account shall be paid to such Beneficiary if so designated through a Beneficiary Designation Form).

 

  (e) If the Plan Administrator, after reasonable inquiry, is unable within one year to determine whether or not any designated Beneficiary survived the event that entitled him or her to receive a distribution of any benefit under the Plan, the Plan Administrator shall conclusively presume that such Beneficiary died prior to the date he or she was entitled to a distribution.

 

-57-


  (f) If the Participant designates more than one Beneficiary (whether such individuals are primary Beneficiaries or contingent Beneficiaries), the following rules shall apply regarding distributions:

 

  (i) If the Participant has designated one or more primary Beneficiaries and one or more contingent Beneficiaries, no contingent Beneficiary shall be entitled to any portion of a distribution if the Participant is survived by any person designated as a primary Beneficiary.

 

  (ii) If the Participant has designated two primary Beneficiaries and only one of the primary Beneficiaries survives the Participant, the surviving primary Beneficiary shall be entitled to 100% of the Participant’s Account upon the death of the Participant, regardless of whether any contingent Beneficiaries have been designated.

 

  (iii) If the Participant designates three or more primary Beneficiaries, and any of the primary Beneficiaries predecease the Participant, then upon the death of the Participant:

 

  (A) In the case where the Beneficiary Designation Form used to designate the Beneficiaries states that the surviving primary Beneficiaries shall share equally in the portion of the Account that would have been allocated to the deceased primary Beneficiary, then the Beneficiary Designation Form shall govern, and

 

  (B) In all other cases, the deceased primary Beneficiary’s share of the Participant’s Account shall be allocated to the surviving primary Beneficiaries in a pro rata fashion based upon the allocations made to the surviving primary Beneficiaries. For example, if primary Beneficiaries A, B, and C have been allocated 60%, 20%, and 20% of the Participant’s Account, respectively, and C predeceases the Participant, then A and B shall be entitled to 75% and 25% of the Account, respectively.

If all primary Beneficiaries predecease the Participant and contingent Beneficiaries have been designated, then the rules in paragraphs (ii) and (iii) above shall apply with respect to allocating the Participant’s Account among the contingent Beneficiaries.

 

8.10 Incompetent or Lost Distributee.

 

  (a)

If the Plan Administrator determines that a Participant or Beneficiary entitled to a distribution hereunder is unable to care for his or her affairs because of illness or accident or because he or she is a minor, then, unless a claim is made for the

 

-58-


benefit by a duly appointed legal representative, the Plan Administrator may direct that such distribution be paid to such distributee’s spouse, child, parent or other blood relative, or to a person with whom such distributee resides. Any such payment, when made, shall be a complete discharge of the liabilities of the Plan therefore.

 

  (b) In the event that the Plan Administrator, after reasonable and diligent effort, cannot locate any person to whom a payment or distribution is due under the Plan, and no other distributee has become entitled to such distribution pursuant to any provision of the Plan, the Participant’s Account in respect of which such payment or distribution is to be made shall be forfeited six months after the date in which such payment or distribution first becomes due or such later date as the Plan Administrator prescribes (but in all events prior to the time such Account would otherwise escheat under any applicable State law); provided, however, that any Account so forfeited shall be reinstated, in accordance with subsection (e) of this Section, if such person subsequently makes a valid claim for such benefit.

 

  (c) The Plan Administrator shall be deemed to have made a reasonable and diligent effort to locate a person if it has sent notification describing the relative values of the optional forms of benefit available under the Plan (including any right to defer such distribution) and the risk of forfeiture of such benefit, or a small dollar cashout distribution under Section 8.4, by certified or registered mail to the last known address of such person.

 

  (d) If a Participant or Beneficiary whose Account is forfeited pursuant to subsection (b) of this Section makes a valid claim for benefits, the Plan Administrator shall restore the Participant’s Account to the same dollar amount as the dollar amount forfeited, unadjusted for any gains or losses occurring subsequent to the date of the forfeiture. Such amounts shall be restored from the amount of forfeitures that the Employer would have otherwise allocated to Participants. To the extent the amount of available forfeitures is insufficient to enable the Plan Administrator to make the required restoration, the Employer must contribute, without regard to any requirement or condition of Articles XIII through XVI, the additional amount necessary to enable the Plan Administrator to make the required restoration.

 

  (e) Accounts restored under this Section 8.10 shall be distributed no later than 60 days after the close of the Plan Year in which the Account is restored (provided the Participant is not employed by the Company’s Controlled Group at such time).

 

-59-


ARTICLE IX—INVESTMENT OF THE TRUST

 

9.1 Trust Agreement.

The assets of the Plan shall be held in the Trust by one or more Trustees selected by the Company and pursuant to the terms of a Trust Agreement. The Trust Agreement shall provide that:

 

  (a) Subject to Participants’ Investment Elections and the terms of the Plan, the assets of the Trust shall be invested and reinvested in such investments as either the Trustee or investment managers appointed by the Plan Administrator deem advisable from time to time; and

 

  (b) The Plan Administrator has concurrent authority, exercisable at its sole discretion, to direct the Trustee as to the sale or purchase of particular assets.

 

9.2 Appointment of Investment Managers.

The Plan Administrator shall have authority to appoint investment managers to manage all or a portion of the Trust. Any investment manager appointed by the Plan Administrator shall be:

 

  (a) An investment adviser under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940;

 

  (b) A bank as defined in the Investment Advisors Act of 1940; or

 

  (c) An insurance company qualified to perform investment management services under the laws of more than one State, and must acknowledge in writing that it is a fiduciary with respect to the Plan.

 

9.3 Investment Manager Powers.

Subject to the Investment Elections made by Participants and to the terms of the Plan and the investment management agreement, an investment manager shall have the power to invest and reinvest the Trust assets (including the authority to acquire and dispose of Plan assets) for which it has been given discretionary authority, as it deems advisable.

 

9.4 Power to Direct Investments.

The Company retains no authority or responsibility over the management, acquisition or disposition of Plan assets except with respect to the Company’s power to select, retain and replace Trustees.

 

-60-


9.5 Exclusive Benefit Rule.

Except as otherwise provided in the Plan, no part of the corpus or income of the funds of the Plan shall be used for, or diverted to, purposes other than for the exclusive benefit of Participants and other persons entitled to benefits under the Plan. No person shall have any interest in or right to any part of the assets held under the Plan, or any right in, or to, any part of the assets held under the Plan, except to the extent expressly provided by the Plan.

ARTICLE X—PLAN ADMINISTRATION

 

10.1 Allocation of Responsibility Among Fiduciaries for Plan and Trust Administration.

The Fiduciaries shall have only those specific powers, duties, responsibilities, and obligations as are specifically given them under this Plan or the Trust Agreement.

 

  (a) Plan Administrator . The Plan Administrator shall have the sole responsibility for the administration of the Plan, which responsibility is specifically described in this Plan and the Trust Agreement, except where an agent is appointed to perform administrative duties as specifically agreed to by the Plan Administrator and the agent.

 

  (b) Trustee . Subject to Article IX, the Trustee shall have the sole responsibility for the administration of the Trust and the management of the assets held under the Trust as specifically provided in the Trust Agreement. The Trustee shall be relieved of its responsibility for the management of assets held under the Trust in the following situations:

 

  (i) In the case of the Williams-Sonoma, Inc. Stock Fund (see Section 4.4);

 

  (ii) In the case of those assets for which an investment manager has been appointed pursuant to Sections 9.2 (Appointment of Investment Managers) and 9.3 (Investment Manager Powers); and

 

  (iii) To the extent provided in the Trust Agreement.

 

  (c) Each Fiduciary warrants that any direction given, information furnished, or action taken by it shall be in accordance with the provisions of the Plan or the Trust Agreement, as the case may be, authorizing or providing for such direction, information or action. Furthermore, each Fiduciary may rely upon any direction, information or action of another Fiduciary as being proper under this Plan or the Trust, and is not required under this Plan or the Trust Agreement to inquire into the propriety of any direction, information or action. It is intended under this Plan and the Trust Agreement that each Fiduciary shall be responsible for the proper exercise of its own powers, duties, responsibilities and obligations under this Plan and the Trust Agreement and shall not be responsible for any act or failure to act of another Fiduciary. No Fiduciary guarantees the Trust in any manner against investment loss or depreciation in asset value.

 

-61-


10.2 Administration.

The Plan shall be administered by the Plan Administrator which may appoint or employ individuals to assist in the administration of the Plan and which may appoint or employ any other agents it deems advisable, including legal counsel, actuaries and auditors to serve at the Plan Administrator’s direction. All usual and reasonable expenses of maintaining, operating and administering the Plan and the Trust, including the expenses of the Plan Administrator and the Trustee (and their agents), shall be paid from the Trust (whether directly or by reimbursement to the Company or the Employer), except to the extent the Company or the Employer pays such expenses and a final decision is made not to request reimbursement from the Trust, as determined by the Plan Administrator.

 

10.3 Claims Procedure.

 

  (a) Discretionary Authority . The Plan Administrator, or a party designated by the Plan Administrator, shall have the exclusive discretionary authority to construe and to interpret the Plan, to decide all questions of eligibility for benefits and to determine the amount of such benefits, and its decisions on such matters are final and conclusive. As a result, benefits under this Plan will be paid only if the Plan Administrator decides in its discretion that the Participant (or other claimant) is entitled to them. The Plan Administrator’s discretionary authority is intended to be absolute, and in any case where the extent of this discretion is in question, the Plan Administrator is to be accorded the maximum discretion possible. Any exercise of this discretionary authority shall be reviewed by a court under the arbitrary and capricious standard (i.e., the abuse of discretion standard).

 

  (b) General Claims Procedures . If, pursuant to the discretionary authority provided for above, an assertion of any right to a benefit by or on behalf of a Participant or Beneficiary is wholly or partially denied, the Plan Administrator, or a party designated by the Plan Administrator, will provide such claimant the claims review process described in this subsection. The Plan Administrator has the discretionary right to modify the claims process described in this Section in any manner so long as the claims review process, as modified, includes the steps described below:

 

  (i) Within a 90-day response period following the receipt of the claim by the Plan Administrator, the Plan Administrator will provide a comprehensible notice setting forth:

 

  (A) The specific reason or reasons for the denial;

 

  (B) Specific reference to pertinent Plan provisions on which the denial is based;

 

-62-


  (C) A description of any additional material or information necessary for the claimant to submit to perfect the claim and an explanation of why such material or information is necessary; and

 

  (D) A description of the claims review process (including the time limits applicable to such process and a statement of the claimant’s right to bring a civil action under ERISA following a further denial on review).

If the Plan Administrator determines that special circumstances require an extension of time for processing the claim, it may extend the response period from 90 to 180 days. If this occurs, the Plan Administrator will notify the claimant before the end of the initial 90-day period, indicating the special circumstances requiring the extension and the date by which the Plan Administrator expects to make the final decision.

 

  (ii) If the claim is denied in whole or in part, further review of a claim is available upon request by the claimant to the Plan Administrator made in writing or such other form as is acceptable to the Plan Administrator within 60 days after the claimant receives the denial of the claim. Upon review, the Plan Administrator shall provide the claimant a full and fair review of the claim, including the opportunity to submit to the Plan Administrator comments, documents, records and other information relevant to the claim and the Plan Administrator’s review shall take into account such comments, documents, records and information regardless of whether it was submitted or considered at the initial determination.

 

  (iii) The rules in (A) below shall apply if the Plan Administrator is a committee that holds regularly scheduled meetings at least quarterly. The rules in (B) below shall apply in all other cases.

 

  (A) If the Plan Administrator is a committee that holds regularly scheduled meetings at least quarterly, the decision on review shall be made by the Plan Administrator at its next regularly scheduled meeting after the appeal is received. However, if the Plan Administrator receives the appeal within 30 days preceding its next regularly scheduled meeting, the Plan Administrator will make the benefit determination on appeal by its second regularly scheduled meeting after the appeal is received (or if circumstances require additional time, then by its third regularly scheduled meeting, in which case the Plan Administrator will send the claimant a written notice before the beginning of the extension informing the claimant of the special circumstances requiring the extension of time and the date as of which the benefit determination will be made). The Plan Administrator will notify the claimant of the benefit determination as soon as possible, but not later than 5 days after the benefit determination is made.

 

-63-


  (B) If the Plan Administrator is not a committee that holds regularly scheduled meetings at least quarterly, the decision on review shall be made within 60 days after receipt of the request for review by the Plan Administrator, unless circumstances warrant an extension of time not to exceed an additional 60 days. If this occurs, notice of the extension will be furnished to the claimant before the end of the initial 60-day period, indicating the special circumstances requiring the extension and the date by which the Plan Administrator expects to make the final decision.

 

  (iv) The final decision will be prepared in a manner calculated to be understood by the claimant, and will include the specific reasons for the decision with references to the specific Plan provisions on which the decision is based.

 

  (v) Any notice or other notification that is required to be sent to a claimant under this section may be sent pursuant to any method approved under Department of Labor Regulation § 2520.104b-1 or other applicable guidance.

 

  (c) Procedure for Disability Claims . For claims involving Disability due to alcohol, drugs, or other substance abuse, the following special rules apply:

 

  (i) The Claims Coordinator will generally make a decision on the claim no later than 45 days from the date the claim is received. Under special circumstances, the Claims Coordinator may determine that additional time is necessary to make a decision on the claim. If this is the case, the Claims Coordinator will provide the claimant a written notice before the last day of the initial 45-day period. The notice will inform the claimant of the special circumstances requiring an extension of time and the date the Claims Coordinator expects to make a decision, generally not later than 75 days from the date the claim is received. The Claims Coordinator may decide that even additional time is necessary to make a decision on the claim. If this is the case, the Claims Coordinator will send the claimant a written notice before the last day of the extended period informing the claimant of the special circumstances requiring the additional extension of time and the date the Claims Coordinator expects to make a decision (generally not more than an additional 30 days). In no event will the Claims Coordinator make a decision on the claim later than 105 days from the date the claim is received. If the Claims Coordinator requires an extension of time to make a decision on the claim due to the claimant’s failure to summit information necessary to decide the claim, the time period for making a decision on the claim is tolled from the date the notice requesting additional information is sent to the claimant until the date the claimant responds to that request.

 

-64-


  (ii) If the claimant’s claim is denied, the notice denying the claim may contain additional information than that listed above.

 

  (iii) If the claimant appeals a denial of the claim, the claimant must file the appeal with the Plan Administrator within 180 days from the date the notice denying the claim is sent to the claimant. If the claimant does not take that action, the claimant loses the right to appeal the Claim’s Coordinator’s denial of the claim. The Plan Administrator will issue a decision on the appeal no later than 45 days from the date the appeal is received, unless special circumstances require an extension of time. If an extension of time is required, the Plan Administrator will provide the claimant with written notice prior to the end of the 45-day period and the Plan Administrator will issue a decision on the appeal no later than 90 days from the date the appeal is received. If the Plan Administrator requires an extension of time to make a decision on an appeal due to the claimant’s failure to submit information necessary to decide the appeal, the time period for making a decision on the appeal is tolled from the date the notice requesting additional information is sent to the claimant until the date the claimant submits the necessary information to the Plan Administrator.

 

  (iv) If the Plan Administrator denies the appeal, the notice may contain additional information as well as the following statement: “You and the Plan may have other alternative dispute resolution options, such as mediation. One way to find out what may be available is to contact your local U.S. Department of Labor Office and your State insurance regulatory agency.”

 

  (d) Review in Court . Any claim referenced in this Section that is reviewed by a court, arbitrator, or any other tribunal shall be reviewed solely on the basis of the record before the Plan Administrator. In addition, any such review shall be conditioned on the claimants having fully exhausted all rights under this Section.

 

  (e)

Limitation on Actions . Any claim filed under Article VIII and any action filed in state or federal court by or on behalf of a Participant or a Beneficiary for the alleged wrongful denial of Plan benefits or for the alleged interference with ERISA-protected rights must be brought within two years of the date the Participant’s or Beneficiary’s cause of action first accrues. For purposes of this subsection, a cause of action with respect to a Participant’s benefits under the Plan shall be deemed to accrue when the Participant has received the calculation of the benefits that are the subject of the claim or legal action, except that in the case of such an action in state or federal court, the Participant must also have reached the earlier of: (i) his or her annuity starting date, or (ii) a date identified to the Participant by the Plan Administrator on which payments shall commence. For purposes of this subsection, a cause of action with respect to the alleged interference with ERISA-protected rights shall be deemed to accrue when the claimant has actual or constructive knowledge of the acts that are alleged to

 

-65-


interfere with ERISA-protected rights. Failure to bring any such claim or cause of action within this two-year time frame shall preclude a Participant or Beneficiary, or any representative of the Participant or Beneficiary, from filing the claim or cause of action. Correspondence or other communications following the mandatory appeals process described in Section 10.3(b) or (c) shall have no effect on this two-year time frame.

 

10.4 Records and Reports.

The Plan Administrator shall exercise such authority and responsibility as it deems appropriate in order to comply with ERISA and government regulations issued thereunder relating to records of Participants’ service and benefits, notifications to Participants; reports to, or registration with, the Internal Revenue Service; reports to the Department of Labor; and such other documents and reports as may be required by ERISA.

 

10.5 Administrative Powers and Duties.

The Plan Administrator shall have such powers and duties as may be necessary or desirable to discharge its functions hereunder, including:

 

  (a) To exercise its discretionary authority to construe and interpret the Plan, decide all questions of eligibility and determine the amount, manner and time of payment of any benefits hereunder;

 

  (b) To prescribe procedures to be followed by Participants or Beneficiaries filing applications for benefits;

 

  (c) To prepare and distribute, in such manner as the Plan Administrator determines to be appropriate, information explaining the Plan;

 

  (d) To receive from Associates and agents and from Participants such information as shall be necessary for the proper administration of the Plan;

 

  (e) To receive, review and keep on file (as it deems convenient or proper) reports of the financial condition, and of the receipts and disbursements, of the Trust from the Trustee;

 

  (f) To appoint or employ individuals or other parties to assist in the administration of the Plan and any other agents it deems advisable, including accountants, actuaries and legal counsel (which may be legal counsel for the Company); and

 

  (g) To delegate to other persons or entities, or to designate or employ persons to carry out any of the Plan Administrator’s fiduciary duties or responsibilities or other functions under the Plan.

 

-66-


10.6 Rules and Decisions.

The Plan Administrator may adopt such rules and procedures as it deems necessary, desirable, or appropriate. To the extent practicable and as of any time, all rules and decisions of the Plan Administrator shall be uniformly and consistently applied to Participants in the same circumstances. When making a determination or calculation, the Plan Administrator shall be entitled to rely upon information furnished by a Participant or beneficiary, the legal counsel of the Plan Administrator, or the Trustee.

 

10.7 Procedures.

The Plan Administrator shall keep all necessary records and forward all necessary communications to the Trustee. The Plan Administrator may adopt such regulations as it deems desirable for the administration of the Plan.

 

10.8 Authorization of Benefit Distributions.

The Plan Administrator shall issue directions to the Trustee concerning all benefits which are to be paid from the Trust pursuant to the provisions of the Plan, and shall warrant that all such directions are in accordance with this Plan.

 

10.9 Application and Forms for Distributions.

The Plan Administrator may require a Participant to complete and file with the Plan Administrator an application for a distribution and all other forms (or other methods for receiving information) approved by the Plan Administrator, and to furnish all pertinent information requested by the Plan Administrator. The Plan Administrator may rely upon all such information so furnished it, including the Participant’s current mailing address, age and marital status.

 

10.10  Certain Operational Mistakes.

Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein contained, if the Plan Administrator discovers that a mistake has been made in crediting Employer contributions or earnings to the Account of any Participant, the Plan Administrator may consult with the Employer to determine if the Employer will take remedial action and may take any other administrative action that it deems necessary or appropriate to remedy such mistake.

 

-67-


ARTICLE XI—AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION

 

11.1 Amendment of the Plan.

The Company shall have the right in its discretion at any time by instrument in writing, duly executed, to modify, alter or amend this Plan in whole or in part. However, except as permissible under the Code and ERISA, no amendment shall:

 

  (a) Reduce the amounts in any Participant’s Account because of forfeiture or reduce the vested right or interest to which any Participant or Beneficiary is then entitled under this Plan;

 

  (b) Eliminate an optional form of benefit with respect to a Participant’s Account as of the date of the amendment;

 

  (c) Cause or authorize any part of the Trust to revert or be refunded to the Employer, or

 

  (d) Cause any assets of the Trust to be used for, or diverted to, purposes other than for the exclusive benefit of Participants and their Beneficiaries (other than such part as is required to pay taxes and expenses of administration).

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, the Company may make any amendment, with or without retroactive effect, that: (i) the Company determines necessary or desirable to comply with ERISA, the Code and other applicable laws and regulation, including securing the full deduction for tax purposes of the Employer contributions made hereunder, or (ii) is required by the Internal Revenue Service as a pre-condition to the issuance of a favorable determination that the Plan continues to be a qualified plan within the meaning of Code section 401(a). A participating Employer shall not have the right to amend the Plan. Notwithstanding any provision herein to the contrary, the Company may by such amendment decrease or otherwise affect the rights of Participants hereunder if, and to the extent, necessary to accomplish such purpose.

 

11.2 Right to Terminate the Plan or Discontinue Contributions.

The Company reserves the right to terminate the Plan, in whole or in part, or completely discontinue contributions under the Plan for any reason, at any time. Action taken by the Company to terminate the Plan or discontinue contributions shall be in writing and shall be effective as of the date set forth in such writing.

 

11.3 Effect of Termination or Discontinuance of Contributions.

As of the date of a complete termination of the Plan or the complete discontinuance of contributions to the Plan, each Participant who is then an Associate shall become 100% vested in his or her Account. Upon termination, all Accounts shall be distributed to or for the benefit of the Participant or continued in trust for his or her benefit, as the Plan

 

-68-


Administrator shall direct. After distribution of all Accounts under the Plan, any amounts remaining in the suspense account established under Section 15.2(b) shall revert to the Employer, as permitted by the Code.

 

11.4 Effect of a Partial Termination.

As of the date of a partial termination, each affected Participant who is then an Associate shall become 100% vested in his or her Account and the Accounts of Participants affected by the partial termination shall be distributed to or for the benefit of such Participants or continued in trust for their benefit, as the Plan Administrator shall direct.

 

11.5 Plan Merger.

The Company may not merge or consolidate the Plan with, or transfer any assets or liabilities to, any other plan, unless each Participant would (if the Plan then terminated) receive a benefit immediately after the merger, consolidation or transfer, which is equal to or greater than the benefit he or she would have been entitled to receive immediately before the merger, consolidation or transfer if the Plan had then terminated.

 

11.6 Additional Participating Employers.

With the consent of the Plan Sponsor, any other corporation may become a participating Employer under the Plan for the benefit of its Eligible Associates, with such changes and variations in Plan terms as the Plan Sponsor approves. Any such inclusion shall be contingent upon the Internal Revenue Service not making a determination that it adversely affects the qualified status of the Plan and Trust. A corporation that becomes a participating Employer under the Plan shall compile and submit all information required by the Plan Sponsor with reference to its Eligible Associates.

 

11.7 Withdrawal of a Participating Employer.

A participating Employer may withdraw from the Plan upon six months prior written notice to the Plan Administrator (unless the Plan Administrator approves a shorter notice period). If a participating Employer discontinues or suspends contributions to the Plan upon behalf of its Associates or if a participating Employer shall become insolvent or bankrupt, or be dissolved, such participating Employer shall be deemed to have withdrawn from the Plan (unless otherwise provided by the Plan Sponsor). If a participating Employer ceases to be a member of the Company’s Controlled Group, such participating Employer shall only continue to be a participating Employer to the extent expressly permitted by the Plan Sponsor.

 

-69-


ARTICLE XII—MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

 

12.1 Action by the Company.

Any action by the Company, including any amendment authorized to be made under Section 11.1, shall be made in accordance with procedures authorized by the Board from time to time. In addition, any person or persons authorized by the Board may take action on behalf of the Company. Any action taken by any such person or persons shall be effective provided it is executed in accordance with the authorization of the Board.

 

12.2 No Right to Be Retained in Employment.

Nothing contained in this Plan shall give any Participant or Associate the right to be retained in the employment of the Employer or affect the right of any Employer to dismiss any Participant or Associate.

 

12.3 Rights to Trust Assets.

No Associate shall have any right to, or interest in, any assets of the Trust Fund upon termination of his employment or otherwise, except as provided from time to time under this Plan, and then only to the extent of the benefits payable under the Plan to such Associate out of the assets of the Trust Fund.

 

12.4 Non-Alienation of Benefits.

 

  (a) In General . Except as provided in subsections (b) and (c) below, and to the extent permitted by law, the right of any Participant or Beneficiary to any benefit or to any payment hereunder shall not be subject in any manner to anticipation, assignment, alienation, attachment, sale, transfer, pledge, encumbrance, charge, garnishment, execution, levy or other legal, equitable, or other process of any kind, either voluntary or involuntary, and any attempt to anticipate, assign, alienate, attach, sell, transfer, pledge, encumber, charge, garnish, execute, levy or otherwise dispose of any right to a benefit or payment hereunder shall be void. The Trust shall not in any manner be liable for, or subject to, the debts, contracts, liabilities, engagements or torts of any person entitled to benefits hereunder.

 

  (b) Qualified Domestic Relations Orders . Notwithstanding subsection (a) above, payment of Plan benefits shall be made in accordance with a “qualified domestic relations order” under Section 8.8. Neither the Plan, the Company, an Employer, the Plan Administrator nor the Trustee shall be liable in any manner to any person, including any Participant or Beneficiary, for complying with a domestic relations order that is considered a qualified domestic relations order.

 

  (c) Crimes and Fiduciary Violations . The nonalienation provisions set forth in subsection (a) above shall not apply to any offset of a Participant’s benefits under the Plan against an amount that the Participant is ordered or required to pay to the Plan if such order or requirement to pay:

 

-70-


  (i) Arises under either (A) the Participant’s conviction of a crime involving the Plan; (B) a civil judgment, consent order or decree entered by a court in an action for violation of the fiduciary responsibility provisions of ERISA; or (C) a settlement agreement between the Secretary of Labor (or the PBGC) and the Participant in connection with a violation (or alleged violation) of the fiduciary responsibility provisions of ERISA by a fiduciary or any other person;

 

  (ii) Provides expressly for the offset of all or part of the amount ordered or required to be paid to the Plan against the Participant’s benefits provided under the Plan; and

 

  (iii) Meets the requirements set forth in Code § 401(a)(13)(c)(iii), in the event the Participant has a spouse at the time at which the offset is to be made.

 

12.5 Requirement to Provide Information to Plan Administrator.

Prior to the time any amount shall be distributed under the Plan, a Participant or other person entitled to benefits must file with the Plan Administrator such information as the Plan Administrator shall require to establish his or her rights and benefits under the Plan

 

12.6 Source of Benefit Payments.

Benefits provided under the Plan shall be paid or provided for solely from the Trust, and neither the Company, the Board, an Employer, the Plan Administrator, the Trustee, or any investment manager shall assume any liability therefore. To confirm the acquiescence of a Participant, his or her legal representative or Beneficiary that such parties do not and have not assumed any liability, the Trustee, the Company, the Board, an Employer and the Plan Administrator (or any one or more of them) may require the Participant (or such Participant’s legal representative or Beneficiary), as a condition precedent to payment of amounts from the Plan, to execute a receipt and release therefor in such form as they shall determine.

 

12.7 Indemnification.

 

  (a) Indemnification Generally. The Company shall indemnify, to the full extent permitted by law and without regard to any limit on indemnification not in this Section 12.7, any current or former employee of the Company, who acted in good faith, for liabilities (including, but not limited to, attorneys’ fees) related to actions and inactions that occur in carrying out his or her responsibilities related to the Plan.

 

  (b)

Indemnification Procedure. To be indemnified under subsection (a) above, the current or former employee shall promptly submit to the Company notice of the claim, charge or other proceeding against him or her (“Proceeding”) and provide a

 

-71-


copy of any materials that have been received in connection with the Proceeding. The failure to provide reasonably prompt notice shall not relieve the Company of its indemnification obligation under subsection (a) above, unless such failure is prejudicial to the Company. Upon receipt of such notice, the Company may choose to assume the affected individual’s defense of such Proceeding by giving written notice to the affected individual of the Company’s decision to do so. If the Company assumes the defense, indemnification under subsection (a) above shall not be available for any fees or expenses of separately retained counsel subsequently incurred by the affected individual in connection with the same Proceeding (except to the extent that such counsel is necessary because of a conflict between the affected individual and the Company). Further, as a condition to indemnification, each current or former employee must cooperate with the Company and its counsel in all reasonable respects in the investigation, mediation, settlement, trial, appeal and other aspects of any Proceeding for which indemnification is sought hereunder, and any settlement of a Proceeding by a current or former employee must be consented to by the Company in writing, which the Company shall not unreasonably withhold.

 

  (c) Exceptions to Indemnification . Notwithstanding any other provision of this Section 12.7, the Company shall not indemnify any current or former employee pursuant to subsection (a) under the following circumstances:

 

  (i) No Duplication : To the extent the current or former employee receives payment for amounts (otherwise indemnifiable hereunder) pursuant to: (i) a liability insurance policy maintained by the Company; (ii) the Company’s Articles of Incorporation or Bylaws; (iii) any provision of federal, state or local law that results in payments from the Company or the Plan; or (iv) any other agreement or right that results in payments from the Company or the Plan.

 

  (ii) No Section 16(b) Claims : For expenses and the payment of profits arising from the current or former employee’s purchase and sale of securities in violation of Section 16(b) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, or any successor statute.”

 

12.8 Construction.

The terms of this Plan shall be construed in accordance with this Section.

 

  (a) References : Singular references may include the plural, and plural references may include the singular, unless the context clearly indicates to the contrary.

 

  (b) Compounds of the Word “Here” : The words “herein”, “hereof”, “hereunder” and other similar compounds of the word “here” shall mean and refer to the entire Plan, not to any particular provision or section.

 

-72-


  (c) Examples : Whenever an example is provided or the text uses the term “including” followed by a specific item or items, or there is a passage having similar effect, such passages of the Plan shall be construed as if the phrase “without limitation” followed such example or term (or otherwise applied to such passage in a manner that avoids limits on its breadth of application).

 

  (d) Effect of Specific References : Specific references in the Plan to the Plan Administrator’s discretion shall create no inference that the Plan Administrator’s discretion in any other respect, or in connection with any other provisions, is less complete or broad.

 

  (e) Subdivisions of the Plan Document : This Plan document is divided and subdivided using the following progression: articles, sections, subsections, paragraphs and subparagraphs. Articles are designated by capital roman numerals. Sections are designated by Arabic numerals containing a decimal point. Subsections are designated by lower-case letters in parentheses. Paragraphs are designated by lower-case roman numerals. Subparagraphs are designated by upper-case letters in parentheses. Any reference in a section to a subsection (with no accompanying section reference) shall be read as a reference to the subsection with the specified designation contained in that same section. A similar reading shall apply with respect to paragraph references within a subsection and subparagraph references within a paragraph.

 

  (f) Invalid Provisions : If any provision of this Plan is, or is hereafter declared to be void, voidable, invalid or otherwise unlawful, the remainder of the Plan shall not be affected thereby.

 

  (g) Interpreting Article XI : In all circumstances, the provisions of Article XI shall be interpreted in the manner which imposes the least limitation on the Company’s claimed right of amendment. In this regard, it is specifically intended that any ambiguities in the Plan are to be resolved in the manner which minimizes the limitation on any right of amendment that is claimed directly or indirectly against one or more Associates or Participants. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, it is expressly permissible for the Company to clarify the terms of this document, even retroactively, by an amendment accomplishing a good faith correction of any typographical error or inadvertent ambiguity or scrivener’s error.

 

12.9 Governing Law.

The Plan is intended to qualify under Code §§ 401(a) and 401(k) and to comply with ERISA and shall be construed and interpreted in a manner consistent with the requirements of these laws. The Plan and the rights of all persons under the Plan shall be further construed and administered in accordance with the laws of the State of California, in the event that ERISA does not preempt state law in a particular circumstance.

 

-73-


ARTICLE XIII—DOLLAR LIMITATION ON PRE-TAX CONTRIBUTIONS

 

13.1 Treatment of Excess Deferrals.

 

  (a) Mid-Year Change in Pre-tax Contribution Level . If, during the Plan Year, the Plan Administrator determines that continued contribution of Pre-tax Contributions for the Plan Year on behalf of an Associate would exceed the annual dollar limitation in Section 3.2(b), the Employer shall not make any additional Pre-tax Contributions with respect to such Associate for the remainder of that Plan Year.

 

  (b) Distribution of Excess Deferrals : If the Plan Administrator determines that Excess Deferrals have been made on behalf of an Associate for a Plan Year (that is, that the Pre-tax Contributions made on behalf of an Associate exceed the annual dollar limitation in Section 3.2(b)), the Plan Administrator shall distribute the amount of such Excess Deferrals, adjusted for allocable income and losses as provided in subsection (d) below, no later than the April 15th following the Plan Year in which such Excess Deferrals were made. If the amount of such Excess Deferrals are not distributed within the time period provided in the prior sentence, the amount of the Excess Deferrals shall be treated as Annual Additions under Section 15.1(a).

 

  (c) Excess Contributions : The Plan Administrator shall reduce the amount of Excess Deferrals for a Plan Year distributable to the Associate by the amount of Excess Contributions if any, previously distributed to the Associate with respect to the Plan Year for which such Excess Deferrals and Excess Contributions were made.

 

  (d) Income and Loss for the Plan Year : Excess Deferrals shall be adjusted for any income or loss for the taxable year to which they relate, using either the method in Treasury Regulation § 1.402(g)-1(e)(5)(iii) or any other reasonable method for computing the income or loss allocable to Excess Deferrals; provided such other reasonable method is used consistently for all Participants and for all corrective distributions under the Plan for the Plan Year, and is used by the Plan for allocating income or loss to Participants’ accounts.

 

  (e) Income and Loss for the Gap Period : Income or loss allocable to the period between the end of the taxable year and the date of distribution shall be disregarded in determining income or loss.

 

13.2 Coordination With Other Arrangements In Which Earnings are Deferred.

If an Associate participates in another plan under which he or she makes elective deferrals pursuant to a Code § 401(k) arrangement, salary reduction contributions to a tax-sheltered annuity or elective deferrals under a simplified employee pension, he or she may submit a request to the Plan Administrator through the Participant Response System for Excess Deferrals made to this Plan with respect to the calendar year that result from

 

-74-


the elective deferrals to the other plan. Any such claim must be submitted by the Associate no later than the March 1st following the close of the particular calendar year in which such elective deferrals were made and must specify the amount of the Associate’s Pre-tax Contributions under this Plan which are Excess Deferrals. If the Plan Administrator receives a timely claim, it shall distribute the Excess Deferrals the Associate has assigned to this Plan (as adjusted for allocable income or loss), in accordance with Section 13.1.

 

-75-


ARTICLE XIV—NONDISCRIMINATION RULES: ADP AND ACP TESTS

This Article sets forth the Actual Deferral Percentage (ADP) Test and Actual Contribution Percentage (ACP) Test rules applicable to this Plan.

 

14.1 Definitions Applicable to the Nondiscrimination Rules.

For purposes of this Article XIV, the following terms when capitalized and used in this Article XIV shall have the meaning ascribed to them in this Section 14.1.

 

  (a) Actual Contribution Percentage ” means the ratio (expressed as a percentage), of the Matching Contributions made on behalf of an Eligible Associate for the Plan Year to the Eligible Associate’s Compensation for the Plan Year.

 

  (b) Actual Deferral Percentage ” means the ratio (expressed as a percentage) of Pre-tax Contributions made on behalf of an Eligible Associate for the Plan Year to the Eligible Associate’s Compensation for the Plan Year. A Non-highly Compensated Employee’s Actual Deferral Percentage does not include elective deferrals made to this Plan or to any other Plan maintained by the Employer, to the extent such Pre-tax Contributions exceed the limitation on Pre-tax Contributions set forth in Section 3.2(b) (annual limitation on Pre-tax Contributions); however, a IRS Highly Compensated Employee’s Actual Deferral Percentage does include any such elective deferrals.

 

  (c) Average Actual Deferral Percentage ” means, for any group of Eligible Associates who are Participants or eligible to be Participants, the average (expressed as a percentage) of the Actual Deferral Percentages for each of the Eligible Associates in that group, including those for whom no Pre-tax Contributions were made. If the Plan Administrator elects to: (i) calculate the Average Actual Deferral Percentage for Associates who have not met the minimum age and service requirements of Code § 410(a)(1)(A) separately for coverage pursuant to Code § 410(b)(4)(B), and (ii) exclude from the Average Actual Deferral Percentage calculation all Non-highly Compensated Employees who have not met such minimum age and service requirements pursuant to Code § 401(k)(3)(F), the Plan is not required to use the same method for crediting service (e.g., elapsed time or actual counting of hours) for both of these tests.

 

  (d) Average Actual Contribution Percentage ” means, for any group of Eligible Associates who are Participants or eligible to be Participants, the average (expressed as a percentage) of the Actual Contribution Percentages for each of the Eligible Associates in that group, including those for whom no Matching Contributions were made.

 

  (e)     

 

-76-


  (f) Excess Aggregate Contributions ” means the amount of Matching Contributions made on behalf of a IRS Highly Compensated Employee in excess of the Actual Contribution Percentage Test limits set forth in Section 14.7.

 

  (g) QNECs ” means contributions made by the Employer to the Plan: (a) in which a Participant is 100% vested as of the date they are allocated, (b) which may not be distributed to a Participant except on account of the Participant’s Retirement, death, Disability or Separation from Service, (c) are not Pre-Tax Contributions, and (d) which the Employer chooses to treat as Pre-tax Contributions in accordance with Section 14.6 (except that they are not available for distribution on account of hardship under Section 6.2). “QNEC” is an acronym for “qualified nonelective contributions” under Code §401(k).

 

14.2 Actual Deferral Percentage Test.

 

  (a) With respect to each Plan Year, the Average Actual Deferral Percentage for Eligible Associates who are Participants or eligible to be Participants must satisfy one of the following tests (i.e., current year testing is used):

 

  (i) The Average Actual Deferral Percentage for the Plan Year for IRS Highly Compensated Employees who are Participants or eligible to be Participants for the Plan Year shall not exceed the Average Actual Deferral Percentage for the Plan Year being tested for Non-highly Compensated Employees who are Participants or eligible to be Participants for the Plan Year multiplied by 1.25; or

 

  (ii) The Average Actual Deferral Percentage for the Plan Year for IRS Highly Compensated Employees who are Participants or eligible to be Participants for the Plan Year shall not exceed the Average Actual Deferral Percentage for the Plan Year being tested for Non-highly Compensated Employees who are Participants or eligible to be Participants for the Plan Year being tested multiplied by two; provided that the Average Actual Deferral Percentage for such IRS Highly Compensated Employees does not exceed the Average Actual Deferral Percentage for such Non-highly Compensated Employees by more than two percentage points.

 

  (b) The Plan Administrator may elect to calculate the Average Actual Deferral Percentage in subsection (a) pursuant to Code § 401(k)(3)(F) by excluding the Non-highly Compensated Employees who have not met the minimum age and service requirements of Code § 410(a)(1)(A).

 

  (c) The portion of the Plan that covers collectively bargained Associates shall be tested separately under subsection (a) from the portion of the Plan that covers other Associates, except that the Plan Administrator may elect to test collectively bargained Associates: (i) separately by each collective bargaining unit, (ii) by aggregating collective bargaining units into two or more groups, on a basis that is reasonable and reasonably consistent from Plan Year to Plan Year, or (iii) by a combination of these methods.

 

-77-


Notwithstanding the above, the Employer may elect to use the Average Actual Deferral Percentage for Non-highly Compensated Employees for the preceding Plan Year rather than the Plan Year being tested to the extent permitted under applicable Treasury Regulations ( see , e.g. , Treasury Regulation § 1.401(k)-2(a)(2)(ii)).

 

14.3 More Than One Employer-Sponsored Plan Subject to the ADP Test.

For purposes of this Article XIV, the Actual Deferral Percentage for any IRS Highly Compensated Employee who is a Participant under two or more arrangements described in Code § 401(k) sponsored by any employer within the Company’s Controlled Group shall be determined as if all such arrangements (other than arrangements that may not be aggregated under applicable regulations) were one Code § 401(k) arrangement. If the Code § 401(k) arrangements in which the IRS Highly Compensated Employee participates have different plan years, the aggregate Actual Deferral Percentage shall be determined by counting the deferrals made to such arrangements in the plan years ending in the same calendar year.

 

14.4 Recharacterization of Pre-tax Contributions.

If Excess Contributions have been made on behalf of a IRS Highly Compensated Employee for the Plan Year, the Plan Administrator may recharacterize the Excess Contributions as after-tax contributions (or voluntary contributions under another qualified plan if such plan has the same plan year), provided such recharacterization occurs within 2  1 / 2 months of the Plan Year being tested. All such recharacterized Excess Contributions shall be subject to the same requirements and limitations that apply to Pre-tax Contributions hereunder, in accordance with the rules set forth in Treasury Regulation § 1.401(k)-1(f)(3)(ii), including all distribution limitations, vesting requirements, funding requirements, contribution limitations and top heavy rules. The Plan Administrator may not include Pre-tax Contributions (or other elective deferrals) in the Actual Contribution Percentage test, unless the Plan which includes the Pre-tax Contributions (or other elective deferrals) satisfies the Actual Deferral Percentage test both with and without the recharacterized Excess Deferrals included in the Actual Contribution Percentage test.

 

14.5 Treatment of Excess Contributions.

 

  (a)

Excess Contributions (adjusted for allocable income or loss) which are not recharacterized in accordance with Section 14.4 shall be distributed to the appropriate IRS Highly Compensated Employee no later than 12 months after the close of the Plan Year in which such Excess Contribution arose. To the extent deemed administratively possible and otherwise advisable by the Plan Administrator, Excess Contributions shall be distributed within 2  1 / 2 months after the close of the Plan Year in which such Excess Contributions arose, so as to avoid the imposition of an excise tax.

 

-78-


  (b) Income and Loss . Excess Contributions shall be adjusted for any income or loss for the taxable year to which they relate, using either the method in Treasury Regulation § 1.401(k)-1(f)(4)(ii)(C) or any other reasonable method for computing the income or loss allocable to Excess Contributions; provided such other reasonable method is used consistently for all Participants and for all corrective distributions under the Plan for the Plan Year, and is used by the Plan for allocating income or loss to Participants’ accounts.

 

  (c) Gap Period . Income or loss allocable to the period between the end of the taxable year and the date of distribution shall be disregarded in determining income or loss.

 

  (d) In calculating the amount of Excess Contributions to be distributed, such amount shall be determined by calculating the amount of Pre-tax Contributions that would have to be distributed in order for the Plan to pass the Actual Deferral Percentage test if, hypothetically, Pre-tax Contributions were distributed to IRS Highly Compensated Employees in order of the Actual Deferral Percentages beginning with the highest of such percentages. However, after such amount has been determined, Excess Contributions shall in fact be distributed to IRS Highly Compensated Employees on the basis of the dollar amount of Pre-tax Contributions by, or on behalf of, each of such IRS Highly Compensated Employee in order of the dollar amount of Pre-tax Contributions for each such IRS Highly Compensated Employee, beginning with the highest of such dollar amounts.

 

14.6 QNECs.

For each Plan Year, the Plan Administrator may in its sole discretion direct the Employer to contribute QNECs to the Plan for the benefit of Participants who are Non-highly Compensated Employee. At the election of the Plan Administrator, QNECs may be treated as Pre-tax Contributions or Matching Contributions for the purposes of, and in accordance with, the Actual Deferral Percentage and Actual Contribution Percentage tests set forth in Article XIV. The Plan Administrator may determine the Actual Deferral Percentages of Eligible Associates by taking into account QNECs and may determine the Actual Contribution Percentages of Eligible Associates by taking into account QNECs (other than QNECs used in the Actual Deferral Percentage test) made to this Plan or to any other qualified Plan maintained by the Employer provided that each of the following requirements are met:

 

  (a) The amount of contributions made by the Employer to the Plan that are not Pre-tax Contributions, including those QNECs treated as Pre-tax Contributions for purposes of the Actual Deferral Percentage Test, satisfies Code §401(a)(4), Code Section 401(k) and the Treasury Regulations issued thereunder, and any QNECS made under this subsection (a) to each Eligible Associate shall not exceed to greater of (i) 5% of such Eligible Associate’s Eligible Pay received in such Plan Year; or (ii) twice the Plan’s ‘representative contribution rate,’ as defined in Treasury Regulations Section 1.401(k)-2(a)(6)(iv)(B).

 

-79-


  (b) The amount of contributions made by the Employer to the Plan that are not Pre-tax Contributions, including those QNECs treated as Matching Contributions for purposes of the Actual Contribution Percentage Test, satisfies Code §401(a)(4), Code Section 401(m) and the Treasury Regulations issued thereunder, and any QNECs made under this subsection (b) to each Eligible Associate shall not exceed to greater of (i) 5% of such Eligible Associate’s Eligible Pay received in such Plan Year; or (ii) twice the Plan’s ‘representative contribution rate,’ as defined in Treasury Regulations Section 1.401(m)-2(a)(6)(v)(13).

 

  (c) The QNECs are (i) not contingent upon the Eligible Associate’s continued participation in the Plan subsequent to the date of the allocation; and (ii) made to the Trust no later than the 12 month period immediately following the Plan Year to which such contribution relates.

 

  (d) The Plan Administrator may not include in the Actual Deferral Percentage test any QNECs under another qualified plan unless that plan has the same plan year as this Plan.

 

  (e) If, pursuant to this Section, the Plan Administrator has elected to include QNECs in calculating the Average Actual Deferral Percentage, the Plan Administrator shall first treat Excess Contributions as attributable proportionately to Pre-tax Contributions. If the total amount of a IRS Highly Compensated Employee’s Excess Contributions for the Plan Year exceeds the Associate’s Pre-tax Contributions, if any, for the Plan Year, the Plan Administrator shall next treat the remaining portion of his or her Excess Contributions as attributable to QNECs, if any.

 

  (f) The Plan Administrator shall reduce the amount of Excess Contributions for a Plan Year distributable to a IRS Highly Compensated Employee by the amount of Excess Deferrals if any, previously distributed to that Associate for the Associate’s taxable year ending in that Plan Year.

 

14.7 Actual Contribution Percentage Test.

 

  (a) With respect to each Plan Year, the Average Actual Contribution Percentage for Eligible Associates who are Participants or eligible to be Participants must satisfy one of the following tests:

 

  (i) The Average Actual Contribution Percentage for the Plan Year for IRS Highly Compensated Employees who are Participants or eligible to be Participants for the Plan Year shall not exceed the Average Actual Contribution Percentage for the Plan Year being tested for Non-highly Compensated Employees who are Participants or eligible to be Participants for the Plan Year being tested multiplied by 1.25; or

 

  (ii)

The Average Actual Contribution Percentage for the Plan Year for IRS Highly Compensated Employees who are Participants or eligible to be

 

-80-


 

Participants for the Plan Year shall not exceed the Average Actual Contribution Percentage for the Plan Year being tested for Non-highly Compensated Employees who are Participants or eligible to be Participants for the Plan Year being tested multiplied by two; provided that the Average Actual Contribution Percentage for such IRS Highly Compensated Employees does not exceed the Average Actual Deferral Percentage for such Non-highly Compensated Employees by more than two percentage points.

 

  (b) The Plan Administrator may elect to calculate the Average Actual Contribution Percentage in subsection (a) pursuant to Code § 401(m)(5)(C) by excluding the Non-highly Compensated Employees who have not met the minimum age and service requirements of Code § 410(a)(1)(A).

 

  (c) The portion of the Plan that covers collectively bargained Associates shall be tested separately under subsection (a) from the portion of the Plan that covers other Associates, except that the Plan Administrator may elect to test collectively bargained Associates – (i) separately by each collective bargaining unit, (ii) by aggregating collective bargaining units into two or more groups on a basis that is reasonable and reasonably consistent from Plan Year to Plan Year, or (iii) by a combination of these methods.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Employer may elect to use the Average Actual Contribution Percentage for Non-highly Compensated Employees for the preceding Plan Year rather than the Plan Year being tested to the extent permitted under applicable Treasury Regulations ( see , e.g. , Treasury Regulation § 1.401(m)-2(a)(2)(ii)).

 

14.8 More Than One Plan Subject to the Actual Contribution Test.

For purposes of this Article XIV, the Actual Contribution Percentage for any IRS Highly Compensated Employee who is a Participant under two or more arrangements sponsored by any employer within the Company’s Controlled Group to which matching contributions (other than qualified matching contributions) or Associate contributions are made shall be determined as if all such arrangements (other than arrangements that may not be aggregated under applicable regulations) were one such arrangement. If the arrangements in which such IRS Highly Compensated Employee participates have different plan years, the aggregate Actual Contribution Percentage shall be determined by counting the matching contributions and Associate contributions made to such arrangements in the plan years ending in the same calendar year.

 

14.9 Required Plan Aggregation for Purposes of the ADP and ACP Test.

If the Employer treats two or more plans as a unit for coverage or nondiscrimination purposes, the Employer must combine the Code § 401(k) arrangements for purposes of determining whether each such arrangement satisfies the Actual Deferral Percentage test and must combine the arrangements under which matching contributions or employee

 

-81-


contributions are made; provided, however, that aggregation shall not be required with respect to arrangements within plans with different plan years; and provided, further, that an employee stock ownership plan (or the employee stock ownership plan portion of a plan) shall not be aggregated with a non-employee stock ownership plan (or non-employee stock ownership plan portion of a plan).

 

14.10  Required Plan Disaggregation for Purposes of the ADP and ACP Test.

If the Employer operates qualified separate lines of business under Code § 414(r), then to the extent required by law the Employer will disaggregate the Code § 401(k) arrangements for each separate line of business for purposes of determining whether each such arrangement satisfies the Actual Deferral Percentage Test and will disaggregate the arrangements under which matching contributions or employee contributions are made with respect to each such separate line of business.

 

14.11  Treatment of Excess Aggregate Contributions.

 

  (a) Excess Aggregate Contributions plus any income and minus any loss allocable thereto, which are not recharacterized in accordance with Section 14.4 shall be distributed to the appropriate IRS Highly Compensated Employee no later than 12 months after the close of the Plan Year in which such Excess Aggregate Contribution arose. To the extent administratively possible, Excess Aggregate Contributions shall be distributed within 2-1/2 months after the close of the Plan Year in which such Excess Contributions arose, so as to avoid an excise tax.

 

  (b) Excess Aggregate Contributions shall be adjusted for any income or loss for the taxable year to which they relate, using either the method in Treasury Regulation § 1.401(m)-1(e)(3)(ii)(C) or any other reasonable method for computing the income or loss allocable to Excess Aggregate Contributions; provided such other reasonable method is used consistently for all Participants and for all corrective distributions under the Plan for the Plan Year, and is used by the Plan for allocating income or loss to Participants’ accounts.

 

  (c) In calculating the amount of Excess Aggregate Contributions to be distributed, such amount shall be determined by calculating the amount of Matching Contributions that would have to be distributed in order for the Plan to pass the Actual Contribution Percentage test if, hypothetically, Matching Contributions were distributed to IRS Highly Compensated Employees in order of the Actual Contribution Percentages beginning with the highest of such percentages. However, after such amount has been determined, Excess Aggregate Contributions shall in fact be distributed to IRS Highly Compensated Employees on the basis of the amount of Matching Contributions by, or on behalf of, each of such IRS Highly Compensated Employee in order of the amount of Matching Contributions for each such IRS Highly Compensated Employee, beginning with the highest of such amounts.

 

-82-


  (d) The Plan Administrator shall treat a IRS Highly Compensated Employee’s allocable share of Excess Aggregate Contributions in the following priority: (i) first, as Matching Contributions allocable to Excess Contributions determined under the Actual Deferral Percentage test; (ii) then, on a pro rata basis, as Matching Contributions and as the Pre-tax Contributions relating to those Matching Contributions which the Plan Administrator has included in the Actual Contribution Percentage test, if any; and (iii) last, as QNECs used in the Actual Contribution Percentage test.

 

  (e) To the extent the IRS Highly Compensated Employee’s Excess Aggregate Contributions are attributable to Matching Contributions, with respect to which the IRS Highly Compensated Employee is not 100% vested, the Plan Administrator shall distribute only the vested portion and forfeit the nonvested portion. The vested portion of the IRS Highly Compensated Employee’s Excess Aggregate Contributions attributable to Matching Contributions is the total amount of such Excess Aggregate Contributions (as adjusted for allocable income or loss) multiplied by his or her vested percentage (determined as of the last day of the Plan Year for which the Matching Contributions were made). The Plan shall allocate forfeited Excess Aggregate Contributions to reduce Employer Matching Contributions for the Plan Year in which such forfeiture occurs.

 

14.12  Coverage Testing.

The Plan shall satisfy the coverage requirements of Code § 410(b). In the event the Plan fails to satisfy the coverage tests for a given Plan Year, the Employer may make a QNEC to the Plan in order to satisfy the coverage requirements of Code § 410(b) in accordance with Treasury Regulation § 1.401(a)(4)-11(g). Such QNEC shall be allocated to the accounts of Non-highly Compensated Employees no later than the 15 th day of the tenth month following the last day of the Plan Year for which the contribution is made.

 

-83-


ARTICLE XV—CODE § 415 LIMITATION

 

15.1 Definitions Applicable to the Code § 415 Limitation.

The following terms when capitalized and used in this Article XV shall have the meaning ascribed to them in this Section 15.1.

 

  (a) Annual Additions ” means the sum credited to a Participant for any Limitation Year of (i) Employer contributions (but not including Age 50 Catch-up Contributions under Section 3.2(d)), (ii) employee contributions, (iii) forfeitures, (iv) amounts allocated to an individual medical account (as defined in Code § 415(1)(2)) which is part of a pension or annuity plan maintained by any 415 Affiliate and (v) amounts derived from contributions that are attributable to post-retirement medical benefits allocated to the separate account of a key employee (as defined in Code § 419A(d)(3)) under a welfare benefit fund (as defined in Code § 419(e)) maintained by any 415 Affiliate and other amounts described in Treasury Regulation § 1.415(c)-1(b). The term Annual Addition shall not include Rollover Contributions made to the Plan, amounts restored or repaid to the Plan in accordance with Code §§ 411(a)(7)(B) and (C) and Article V of the Plan or the other exclusions described in Treasury Regulation § 1.415(c)-1(b). Except to the extent provided in the Code and Treasury Regulations, Annual Additions include Excess Contributions and Excess Aggregate Contributions regardless of whether the Plan distributes or forfeits such excess amounts. Excess Deferrals are not Annual Additions unless distributed after the April 15th following the Plan Year in which such Excess Deferrals were made.

 

  (b) Defined Benefit Plan ” means any plan of the type defined in Code § 414(j) maintained by any 415 Affiliate which is described in Code § 415(k)(1).

 

  (c) Defined Contribution Plan ” means any plan maintained by any 415 Affiliate of the type defined in Code § 414(i) or a hybrid plan as defined in Code § 414(k) to the extent that benefits payable under the plan are based upon the individual account of the Participant.

 

  (d) Excess Annual Additions ” means Annual Additions that exceed the Code § 415 limitation on Annual Additions set forth in Article XV.

 

  (e) 415 Affiliate ” means a member of the Company’s Controlled Group; provided , however , that for purposes of determining whether a corporation is a member of a “controlled group of corporations” (within the meaning of Code § 414(b) of which the Company is also a member) the phrase “more than 50 percent” shall be substituted for the phrase “at least 80 percent” wherever the latter phrase appears in Code § 1563(a)(1).

 

  (f) Limitation Year ” means the Plan Year.

 

-84-


15.2 Limitation on Annual Additions.

 

  (a) Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan to the contrary, Annual Additions credited under the Plan and all other Defined Contribution Plans maintained by any 415 Affiliate with respect to each Participant for any Limitation Year shall not exceed $53,000 (or such higher amount as may be determined from time to time and announced by the Secretary of the Treasury in accordance with Code § 415(d)), or if less, 100% of the Participant’s Compensation for such Limitation Year.

 

  (b) If the Plan Administrator determines during a Plan Year that a Participant will likely exceed the limit imposed by Section 15.2(a) (assuming that a Participant’s Contribution Election remains in effect for the remainder of the Limitation Year, and based on the Plan Administrator’s estimate of a Participant’s Compensation for the Limitation Year), the Plan Administrator may adjust the Participant’s Annual Additions and take the following actions in the following order of priority:

 

  (i) Reduce or eliminate the Participant’s unmatched Pre-tax Contributions; and

 

  (ii) Reduce or eliminate the Participant’s matched Pre-tax Contributions and any corresponding Matching Contributions.

If an allocation of Employer contributions would result in an Excess Annual Addition to the Participant’s Account (other than an Excess Annual Addition which results from the application of the nondiscrimination rules under Article XIV), the Plan Administrator may reallocate the Excess Annual Addition to the remaining Participants who are eligible for an allocation of Employer contributions for the Plan Year in which the Limitation Year ends. The Plan Administrator shall reallocate the Excess Annual Additions pursuant to the allocation method under the Plan as if the Participant whose Account otherwise would receive such Excess Annual Addition were not eligible for an allocation of Employer contributions. As soon as administratively feasible after the end of the Plan Year, the Plan Administrator shall determine the actual limit which should have applied to the Participant under Section 15.2(a) based on the Participant’s actual Compensation for such Limitation Year.

 

  (c) If after the end of a Plan Year, the Plan Administrator determines that the Annual Additions credited under the Plan with respect to a Participant for any Limitation Year exceed the limitations of Section 15.2(a), corrections shall be made in conformance with the Employee Plans Compliance Resolution System (or any successor thereto).

 

  (i) The Participant’s unmatched Pre-tax Contributions shall be reduced to the extent necessary. The amount of the reduction shall be returned to the Participant, together with any earnings on the contributions to be returned.

 

-85-


  (ii) The Participant’s matched Pre-tax Contributions and corresponding Matching Contributions shall be reduced to the extent necessary. The amount of the reduction attributable to the Participant’s matched Pre-tax Contributions shall be returned to the Participant, together with any earnings on those contributions to be returned. The amount attributable to the Matching Contributions shall be forfeited and used to reduce Employer contributions for the Participant for the next Limitation Year (and succeeding Limitation Years, as necessary) if the Participant is covered by the Plan at the end of the Limitation Year. If the Participant is not covered by the Plan as of the end of the Limitation Year, then the excess Annual Additions shall be held unallocated in a suspense account for the Limitation Year and allocated and reallocated in the next Limitation Year to all of the remaining Participants entitled to allocation of contributions, but only to the extent that such allocation or reallocation would not cause the Annual Additions to such Participants to violate the limitations of Code § 415 for such Limitation Year. If a suspense account is in existence at any time during a Limitation Year, all amounts in the suspense account must be allocated or reallocated before any Employer contributions or employee contributions which would constitute Annual Additions may be made to the Plan for the Limitation Year (and succeeding Limitation Years, as necessary) in accordance with the rules set forth in Treasury Regulation § 1.415-6(b)(6)(i). If a suspense account is in effect, it shall not share in investment gains or losses.

 

  (d) If a Participant also participates in any other Defined Contribution Plan which is subject to the limitation set forth in Section 15.2(a) above and, as a result, such limitation would be exceeded with respect to the Participant in any Limitation Year, any reduction or other permissible method necessary to ensure compliance with such limitation first shall be made under this Plan in accordance with the terms hereof. If after such correction a further reduction is necessary to ensure that the limitation set forth in Section 15.2(a) is not exceeded, Annual Additions credited under such other plan or plans with respect to the Participant shall be reduced in accordance with the provisions of such plan or plans. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any correction shall be made in conformance with the Employee Plans Compliance Resolution System (or any successor thereto).

 

  (e) For Limitation Years prior to January 1, 2000, if a Participant is also a Participant in a Defined Benefit Plan, then the Annual Additions credited with respect to the Participant in any such Limitation Year shall be limited as provided in Section 15.3 below.

 

15.3 Applicable Regulations.

Notwithstanding anything contained in this Article XV to the contrary, the Plan Administrator, in its sole discretion, may determine the amounts required to be taken into account under Article XV by such alternative methods as shall be permitted under applicable regulations or rulings.

 

-86-


ARTICLE XVI—TOP HEAVY PROVISIONS

This Plan is not currently a Top Heavy Plan and is not expected to become a Top Heavy Plan. The provisions of this Article will apply only in the event the Plan should become a Top Heavy Plan.

 

16.1 Definitions Applicable to the Top Heavy Provisions.

For purposes of this Article XVI, the following terms when capitalized and used in this Article XVI shall have the meaning ascribed to them in this Section 16.1.

 

  (a) Aggregation Group ” means in the case of a Plan that is not part of either a Required Aggregation Group or a Permissive Aggregation Group, the Employer. In the case of a Plan that is part of a Required Aggregation Group but not part of a Permissive Aggregation Group, the Required Aggregation Group. In the case of a Plan that is part of a Required Aggregation Group and part of Permissive Aggregation Group, either the Required Aggregation Group or the Permissive Aggregation Group, as determined by the Plan Administrator.

 

  (b) Determination Date ” means, with respect to a Plan Year, the last day of the preceding Plan Year or, in the case of the first Plan Year, the last day of the Plan Year.

 

  (c) Five-percent Owner ” means, with respect to a corporation, any person who owns (or is considered as owning within the meaning of Code § 318) more than 5% of the outstanding stock of the corporation, or stock possessing more than 5% of the total voting power of the corporation.

 

  (d) Key Employee ” means, as of any Determination Date, any Associate or former Associate (including any deceased Associate) who at any time during the Plan Year that includes the Determination Date was:

 

  (A) An officer of the Employer having annual Compensation greater than $170,000 (as adjusted under Code § 416(i)(1) for Plan Years);

 

  (B) A Five-percent Owner of the Employer; or

 

  (C) A One-percent Owner of the Employer having annual Compensation of more than $150,000.

For purposes of this subsection (d), the term “Key Employee” shall also include the Beneficiary of a Key Employee. The Plan Administrator shall determine who is a Key Employee in accordance with Code § 416(i)(1) and the applicable regulations and other guidance of general applicability issued thereunder.

 

  (e) Non-Key Employee ” means an Associate who is not a Key Employee.

 

-87-


  (f) One-percent Owner ” means with respect to a corporation, any person who owns (or is considered as owning within the meaning of Code § 318) more than 1% of the outstanding stock of the corporation, or stock possessing more than 1% of the total voting power of the corporation.

 

  (g) Participant ” includes an Eligible Associate of the Plan who does not participate in the Plan.

 

  (h) Permissive Aggregation Group ” means each plan in the Required Aggregation Group and any other qualified plan or plans maintained by an employer within the Company’s Controlled Group if such group of plans, when considered together, would meet the requirements of Code §§ 401(a)(4) and 410.

 

  (i) Required Aggregation Group ” means, with respect to a Plan Year for which a determination is being made, (i) this Plan, (ii) each other qualified plan of an employer within the Company’s Controlled Group in which at least one Key Employee is a Participant, and (iii) any other qualified plan of an employer within the Company’s Controlled Group which enables any plan described in subparagraphs (i) and (ii) above to meet the requirements of Code §§ 401(a)(4) or 410.

 

  (j) Top Heavy Plan ” means the Plan, if any of the following conditions exists:

 

  (i) The Top Heavy Ratio for the Plan exceeds 60% and the Plan is not part of any Required Aggregation Group or Permissive Aggregation Group;

 

  (ii) If the Plan is a part of a Required Aggregation Group but is not part of a Permissive Aggregation Group, the Top Heavy Ratio for the Required Aggregation Group exceeds 60%;

 

  (iii) If the Plan is a part of a Required Aggregation Group and part of a Permissive Aggregation Group, the Top Heavy Ratio for the Permissive Aggregation Group exceeds 60%.

 

  (k) Top Heavy Ratio ” means, with respect to the plans taken into consideration, a fraction, the numerator of which is the present value of the accrued benefits for all Key Employees under the Defined Benefit Plans of the Aggregation Group as of the Determination Date for each plan plus the sum of account balances for all Key Employees under the Defined Contribution Plans of the Aggregation Group, in each case as of the respective Determination Date (including any part of any accrued benefit or account balance distributed in the five-year period ending on the Determination Date), and the denominator of which is the sum of the present value of all accrued benefits for all Non-Key Employees under the Defined Benefit Plans of the Aggregation Group plus the sum of all account balances of all Non-Key Employees under Defined Contribution Plans of the Aggregation Group, in each case as of the respective Determination Date for each plan (including any part of any accrued benefit or account balance distributed in the five-year period ending on the Determination Date), all determined in accordance with Code § 416. For purposes of this subsection (k):

 

-88-


  (i) The accrued benefit and account balances of Key Employees under plans that terminated within the five-year period ending on the Determination Date (including amounts which were distributed during such period) are taken into account for purposes of determining the Top Heavy Ratio.

 

  (ii) The account balances and accrued benefits of a Participant (1) who is not a Key Employee but who was a Key Employee in a prior year, or (2) who has not been credited with at least one Hour of Service at any time during the five-year period ending on the Determination Date, shall be disregarded.

 

  (iii) Generally, the Plan Administrator shall calculate the present value of accrued benefits under Defined Benefit Plans or simplified employee pension plans included within the group in accordance with the terms of those plans and Code § 416. If a Participant in a defined benefit plan is a Non-Key Employee, however, the Plan Administrator shall determine such Non-Key Employee’s accrued benefit under the accrual method, if any, which is applicable uniformly to all Defined Benefit Plans or, if there is no uniform method, in accordance with the slowest accrual rate permitted under the fractional rule accrual method described in Code § 411(b)(1)(C).

 

  (iv) To calculate the present value of benefits under a Defined Benefit Plan, the Plan Administrator shall use the interest and mortality assumptions prescribed by the Defined Benefit Plans to value benefits for top heavy purposes.

 

  (v) If an aggregated plan does not have a valuation date coinciding with the Determination Date, the Plan Administrator shall value the accrued benefit or account balance under such aggregated plan as of the most recent valuation date falling within the 12-month period ending on the Determination Date, except as Code § 416 and applicable Treasury Regulations require for the first and second plan year of a Defined Benefit Plan.

 

  (vi) The Plan Administrator shall calculate the value of account balances and accrued benefits with reference to the Determination Dates for the respective aggregated plans that fall within the same calendar year.

 

  (vii)

This clause (vii) shall supersede and take precedence over any of the preceding provisions of this subsection that conflict with the following rules, which shall apply for Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 2002: The present values of accrued benefits and the amounts of account balances of an Associate as of the Determination Date shall be increased

 

-89-


by the distributions made with respect to the Associate under the Plan or any plan aggregated with the Plan under Code § 416(g)(2) during the one-year period ending on the Determination Date. The preceding sentence shall also apply to distributions under a terminated plan which, had it not been terminated, would have been aggregated with the Plan under Code § 416(g)(2)(A)(i). In the case of a distribution made for a reason other than Separation from Service, death and Disability, this provision shall be applied by substituting “five-year period” for “one-year period.” In addition, the accrued benefits and accounts of any individual who has not performed services for the Employer during the one-year period ending on the Determination Date shall not be taken into account.

 

16.2 Application of Article XVI.

If the Plan is determined to be a Top Heavy Plan as of any Determination Date, then it shall be subject to the rules set forth in the balance of this Article XVI, beginning with the first Plan Year commencing after such Determination Date.

 

16.3 Minimum Contributions.

 

  (a) Subject to subsection (b) of this Section, if the Plan is determined to be a Top Heavy Plan for a Plan Year, minimum Employer contributions (including forfeitures but excluding any Pre-tax Contributions and any Employer Matching Contributions necessary to satisfy the nondiscrimination requirements of Code § 401(k) or of Code § 401(m)) shall be made on behalf of each Participant who has not Separated from Service as of the end of the Plan Year and who is not a Key Employee, of not less than the lesser of the following percentage of the Key Employee’s Compensation for the Plan Year:

 

  (i) 3%, or

 

  (ii) the highest percentage of Employer contributions (including forfeitures and amounts contributed pursuant to a salary reduction agreement) made under the Plan for the Plan Year on behalf of a Key Employee.

However, if a Defined Benefit Plan which benefits a Key Employee depends on this Plan to satisfy the nondiscrimination rules of Code § 401(a)(4) or the coverage rules of Code § 410 (or another plan benefiting the Key Employee so depends on such defined benefit plan), the allocation is 3% of the Non-Key Employee’s Compensation for the Plan Year regardless of the contribution rate for the Key Employees.

 

  (b) If, for a Plan Year, there are no allocations of Employer contributions, forfeitures or Pre-tax Contributions for any Key Employee to the Plan, no minimum allocation shall be required with respect to the Plan Year, except as otherwise may be required because of another plan in the Aggregation Group.

 

-90-


  (c) The minimum allocation required under this Section 16.3 shall be made after Employer contributions and forfeitures are made.

 

  (d) Notwithstanding subsection (a) above, for a Plan Year, a Participant covered under this Plan, which is determined to be Top Heavy, and a Top Heavy defined benefit plan, shall receive the defined benefit minimum from the Top Heavy defined benefit plan.

Notwithstanding subsection (a) above, for a Plan Year, a Participant covered under this Plan, which is determined to be Top Heavy, and another Top Heavy defined contribution plan, shall receive the defined contribution minimum from the other Top Heavy defined contribution plan.

 

-91-


ARTICLE XVII—REJUVENATION MERGER

 

17.1 Merger.

Effective July 15, 2013 (the “Rejuvenation Merger Date”), the Rejuvenation Inc. 401(k) Employee Savings Plan (the “Rejuvenation Plan”) is merged into the Plan. The assets of the Rejuvenation Plan are transferred to and become assets of this Plan and will be held, invested, and administered by the Plan Administrator with the other Plan assets, pursuant to the provisions of the Plan.

The purpose of this Article is to set forth specific provisions that will apply with respect to individuals who were participants in the Rejuvenation Plan immediately prior to the Rejuvenation Merger Date (the “Rejuvenation Participants”). Notwithstanding any other provision of this Plan to the contrary, the following provisions of this Article will apply with respect to all Rejuvenation Participants and will supersede any other provisions of the Plan to the extent they are inconsistent with the Plan.

 

17.2 Participation.

Each Rejuvenation Participant on the Rejuvenation Merger Date will automatically participate in this Plan after the Rejuvenation Merger Date. Each other employee of Rejuvenation, Inc. (“Rejuvenation”) who was not a Rejuvenation Participant on the Rejuvenation Merger Date will be eligible to participate in the Plan subject to the terms and conditions of the Plan.

 

17.3 Service.

Each Rejuvenation Participant who was employed by Rejuvenation on the Rejuvenation Merger Date will be credited with Hours of Service and Years of Service under the Plan equal to his or her hours of service and years of service credited under the Rejuvenation Plan.

 

17.4 Accounts.

Amounts transferred from the Rejuvenation Plan that are attributable to “Elective Deferral Contributions” and “Catch-Up Contributions” under the Rejuvenation Plan will be held and invested in a Rejuvenation Subaccount under this Plan. Amounts transferred from the Rejuvenation Plan that are attributable to “Matching Contributions” under the Rejuvenation Plan will be held and invested in the Rejuvenation Participant’s new Matching Contributions Subaccount under this Plan. Amounts transferred from the Rejuvenation Plan that were attributable to “Rollover Contributions” under the Rejuvenation Plan will be held and invested in a Rejuvenation Rollover Contributions Subaccount under this Plan.

A Rejuvenation Participant for whom amounts are transferred under this Article will have a 100% vested and nonforfeitable interest in any amounts transferred from the

 

-92-


Rejuvenation Plan that are attributable to amounts held in his or her “Elective Deferral Contributions Account,” “Catch-Up Contributions Account,” “Matching Contributions Subaccount and “Rejuvenation Rollover Contributions Subaccount” under the Rejuvenation Plan.

 

17.5 Vesting.

Notwithstanding Section 5.2, each Rejuvenation Participant on the Rejuvenation Merger Date shall be 100% vested in his or her Matching Contributions.

 

17.6 Loans.

Each outstanding loan under the Rejuvenation Plan as of the Rejuvenation Merger Date will be transferred to and maintained on and after that date under the Plan until all amounts of principal and interest with respect to these outstanding loans have been repaid or as otherwise provided under the terms of the loan. These transferred loans will be administered, including the crediting of loan repayments to the account of a Rejuvenation Participant, in accordance with rules established by the Committee.

 

-93-


APPENDIX A—2003 ADDITIONAL MATCHING CONTRIBUTION

In 2002 and 2003, Matching Contributions were made to the Accounts of the Participants listed on the attached schedule in excess of the Matching Contributions permitted under the formula in Article IV. When the Plan Administrator discovered the error, the Plan Administrator forfeited the excess amounts from the Accounts of the affected Participants (along with any related earnings) under the self-correction procedures set forth in Part IV of IRS Revenue Procedure 2003-44. The forfeited amounts were then reallocated within the Trust as provided in Section 5.4 (allocation of forfeitures). In the case of the affected Participants who were Nonhighly Compensated Employees for 2003, in addition to the Matching Contribution under Section 3.3, a Matching Contribution was made by the Employer to each affected Participant in an amount equal to the forfeited amount (including any related earnings) and simultaneous with the forfeiture, to the extent permitted under Code section 415. The figures for each affected Participant are set forth on the attached schedule.

 

-94-


APPENDIX B—WSI WARN ASSOCIATES

From time to time, the Company may reorganize its business structure, resulting in the termination of some of its Associates. In the case of those affected Associates who are classified by the Company, in the exercise of its sole discretion, as eligible for wages related to the 60-day notice period applicable under The Worker Adjustment and Retraining Notification Act and the California Worker Adjustment and Retraining Notification Act (collectively “WARN”), while they are on an authorized leave of absence from the Company, “Eligible Pay” shall include wages related to the WARN notice period that are paid for a WARN-related leave of absence, regardless of whether these wages are paid at pay period intervals or in a single lump sum. The Company’s discretionary classification shall solely govern the application of this provision, and it shall apply for purposes of the Plan notwithstanding any different determination that may become applicable regarding rights under WARN.

In all other respects, the terms and provisions of the Plan remain unchanged.

 

-95-


SIGNATURE

This Plan is hereby amended and restated this day of [                      ], 2015, to be effective on the dates indicated herein.

 

By:

 

 

[name]  

 

 

-96-

Exhibit 10.30

WILLIAMS-SONOMA, INC.

2012 EVP LEVEL MANAGEMENT RETENTION PLAN

(Amended and Restated Effective November 16, 2015)

This 2012 EVP Level Management Retention Plan (the “Plan”) was adopted and approved by the Compensation Committee (“Committee”) of the Board of Directors (“Board”) of Williams-Sonoma, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “Company”) on November 1, 2012 and amended and restated effective November 16, 2015 (the “Effective Date”). The purpose of the Plan is to provide certain eligible Executives (as such term is defined in Section 1(a) below) of the Company with severance benefits upon certain terminations of employment following a Change of Control in order to provide such Executive participants with enhanced financial security, incentive and encouragement to remain with the Company notwithstanding the possibility of a Change of Control. The Board recognizes that a potential Change of Control can be a distraction to Executive participants and can cause them to consider alternative employment opportunities. The Board has determined that it is in the best interests of the Company and its stockholders to (a) assure that the Company will have the continued dedication and objectivity of covered Executives, notwithstanding the possibility, threat or occurrence of a Change of Control of the Company, and (b) provide Executive participants with an incentive to continue their employment and to motivate them to maximize the value of the Company upon a Change of Control for the benefit of its stockholders. This Plan is an “employee welfare benefit plan,” as defined in Section 3(1) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended (“ERISA”). This document constitutes both the written instrument under which the Plan is maintained and the required summary plan description for the Plan. Capitalized terms used herein but not defined shall have the meaning assigned to such terms in Section 5 below.

1. Eligibility; Term; and Termination .

(a) Eligibility . Each employee of the Company at the Executive Vice President level and above (each, an “Executive”) shall automatically participate in the Plan, effective upon the later of (i) the Effective Date and (ii) the date of promotion or hire into the Executive Vice President level or higher. The Committee may, in its discretion, adopt a resolution approving participation in the Plan by an employee below the level of Executive Vice President. For the avoidance of doubt, the President and Chief Executive Officer of the Company, whose severance benefits are governed by a separate agreement with the Company, shall not participate in the Plan. Notwithstanding any other provision in the Plan to the contrary, the severance payments and benefits provided hereunder shall be in lieu of any other severance and/or retention plan benefits and any severance payments and benefits specified in Section 3 below shall be reduced by any severance paid or provided to Executive under any other plan or arrangement. Once participating in the Plan, Executive shall remain a Plan participant until (i) the Plan is terminated in accordance with Section 1(b) below, (ii) Executive is no longer an employee of the Company, other than a termination of employment triggering severance benefits under Section 3(a) below, (iii) the effective date of Executive’s demotion below the Executive Vice President level, or (iv) written notice is provided to Executive prior to a Change in Control stating that such employee is no longer a Plan participant.

 

-1-


(b) Term . This Plan will commence on the Effective Date and will remain in effect through November 15, 2018; provided, however, that if prior to the expiration of the term of this Plan, the Company enters into a definitive agreement (a “Definitive Agreement”) with a third party (or third parties), the consummation of which would result in a Change of Control (as defined in this Plan), then the term of this Plan shall automatically be extended to eighteen months following the resulting Change of Control, unless the Definitive Agreement terminates or is cancelled without resulting in a Change of Control, in which case such extension shall not be effective. Moreover, the Plan provisions shall survive the lapse of the term of this Plan and shall be binding on both the Company and Executive with respect to any termination of Executive’s employment triggering severance benefits under Section 3 that occurs prior to the lapsing of the term of this Plan.

(c) Amendment, Modification or Termination . The Company reserves the right to amend, modify or terminate the Plan at any time, without advance notice to any Executive; provided, however, that, no amendment, modification, or termination of the Plan shall be permitted for a period of eighteen (18) months after a Change in Control that would reduce the severance benefits payable to Executive or impair Executive’s eligibility under the Plan (unless the affected Executive consents in writing to such amendment or termination). Any action of the Company in amending or terminating the Plan will be taken in a non-fiduciary capacity.

2. No Employment Right . Nothing in the Plan shall interfere with or limit in any way the right of the Company, or a subsidiary of the Company, as applicable, to terminate any Executive’s employment or service at any time, with or without cause. Executive’s employment is and shall continue to be at-will, as defined under applicable law. If Executive’s employment terminates for any reason, Executive shall not be entitled to any payments, benefits, damages, awards or compensation other than as provided under this Plan, any outstanding written employment agreement or offer letter by and between Executive and the Company, or as may otherwise be available in accordance with the Company’s established employee plans.

3. Severance Benefits .

(a) Involuntary Termination Other than for Cause or Voluntary Termination for Good Reason, Within 18 Months On or Following a Change of Control . If within the period commencing on a Change of Control and ending eighteen (18) months following the Change of Control, Executive’s employment with the Company (A) is terminated involuntarily by the Company without Cause, or (B) voluntarily by Executive for Good Reason, then subject to Executive signing and not revoking a release of claims in favor of the Company substantially in the form attached as Exhibit A to this Plan, which may be updated to reflect applicable laws (a “Release”), the Company shall provide severance pay and benefits, subject to certain conditions, as follows:

(i) Severance Payment . Executive shall be entitled to receive a cash severance payment equal to two hundred percent of Executive’s annual base salary (as in effect immediately prior to (A) the Change of Control, or (B) Executive’s termination, whichever is greater) plus an amount equal to two hundred percent of the average annual bonus received by Executive in the last thirty-six (36) months. Such cash severance payment shall be paid out

 

-2-


ratably over twenty-four (24) months from the date of employment termination in accordance with the payroll schedule applicable to active officers of the Company (subject to the timing provisions of Sections 3(h) and 9 of this Plan).

(ii) Equity Compensation Acceleration . One hundred percent (100%) of Executive’s outstanding stock options, stock appreciation rights, restricted stock units and other Company equity compensation awards, including performance-based vesting full-value awards where the payout is either a fixed number of shares or zero shares depending on whether the performance metric is obtained, shall immediately become fully vested as to all of the underlying shares. Except as set forth in a grant agreement covering a particular award, with respect to performance-based vesting full-value awards in which the performance period has not been completed prior to Executive’s termination date and where the number of shares earned is variable based upon the extent to which performance milestones are reached (i.e., where the number of shares earned based upon achieving performance milestones can be more than one positive number), each such award shall vest at the target performance level as to a pro-rata number of shares in an amount equal to (A) the number of shares subject to the award that would have vested at target performance levels (had any additional service-based vesting requirements been met) multiplied by (B) a fraction, with the numerator being the number of months that have elapsed from the start of the award’s performance period (with partial months rounded up to a whole month) through and including Executive’s termination date and the denominator being the number of full months in the award’s performance period (with such fraction not to exceed the whole number one). Any Company stock options and stock appreciation rights shall thereafter remain exercisable following Executive’s employment termination for the period prescribed in the respective option and stock appreciation right agreements.

(iii) Continued Employee Benefits . In lieu of continued employee benefits (other than as statutorily required, such as COBRA continuation coverage as required by law), Executive shall receive payments of three thousand dollars ($3,000) per month for twelve months from the date of employment termination in accordance with the payroll schedule applicable to active officers of the Company (subject to the timing provisions of Sections 3(h) and 9 of this Plan.

(b) Voluntary Resignation Other than for Good Reason; Termination for Cause; Termination due to Death or Disability . If Executive’s employment with the Company terminates (i) voluntarily by Executive other than for Good Reason, or (ii) for Cause by the Company, or (iii) pursuant to Executive’s death or Disability, then Executive shall not be entitled to receive severance or other benefits except for those (if any) as may then be established under the Company’s then existing severance and benefits plans and practices or pursuant to other written agreements with the Company.

(i) Termination Outside of Change of Control . In the event Executive’s employment is terminated for any reason, either prior to a Change of Control or more than eighteen (18) months after a Change of Control, then Executive shall be entitled to receive severance benefits only as provided under the Company’s then existing severance and benefits plans and practices or pursuant to other written agreements with the Company.

 

-3-


(ii) Termination On or Within 18 Months Following a Change of Control . In the event Executive’s employment terminates on or within eighteen (18) months following a Change of Control, Executive shall only receive severance payments and benefits under this Plan and not pursuant to the Company’s then existing severance and benefits plans and practices or pursuant to other written agreements with the Company.

(c) Non-Solicitation; Confidential Information . Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Company’s obligation to provide severance payments and benefits under this Section 3 is expressly conditioned upon Executive’s ongoing compliance with the confidential information and non-solicitation provisions of the Company’s Corporate Code of Conduct as in effect on the date of Executive’s termination of employment. In the event Executive breaches the terms of the confidential information and non-solicitation provisions of the Company’s Corporate Code of Conduct as in effect on such date, the Company’s obligations under Section 3 shall automatically terminate, without any notice to Executive.

(d) No Mitigation . Executive shall not be required to mitigate the amount of any severance payments or benefits provided for under this Plan by seeking other employment nor shall any amounts to be received by Executive under this Plan be reduced by any other compensation earned; provided that in no event shall Executive receive severance payments or benefits under both a Management Retention Agreement entered into on or prior to the Effective Date and under this Plan.

(e) Tax Withholding . The Company shall be entitled to withhold from any payments made to Executive under this Section 3 any amounts required to be withheld by applicable federal, state or local tax law.

(f) Non-Competition, Non-Solicitation; Confidential Information . If at any time during the period commencing on Executive’s employment termination date and ending twelve (12) months later, Executive accepts other employment or a professional relationship with a competitor of the Company (defined as either (i) another company primarily engaged in retail sales of products for the home or (ii) any retailer with retail products for the home sales in excess of one hundred million dollars ($100,000,000) annually), or if Executive breaches Executive’s remaining obligations to the Company (e.g., the duty to protect confidential information and intellectual property and the duties not to solicit under the Company’s Corporate Code of Conduct), then the Company’s obligations under this Section 3 will cease such that Executive will not be entitled to any further payments or benefits under this Section 3 and the Company may seek injunctive relief against Executive as specified in Section 8(d) hereof.

(g) Non-Disparagement . While employed by the Company and for a period of twenty-four (24) months commencing on the date upon which Executive’s employment terminates, (i) Executive shall agree in the Release not to make any statements that disparage the Company, its products, services, officers, employees, members of its Board, advisers or other business contacts, and (ii) the Company hereby agrees that members of its Board and the Company’s officers holding a title of Executive Vice President or above shall not make any statements that disparage Executive. Executive shall acknowledge and agree in the Release that upon Executive breaching this non-disparagement provision of the Plan and the Release on or after the date upon which Executive’s employment terminates then the Company’s obligations

 

-4-


under this Section 3 will cease such that Executive will not be entitled to any further payments or benefits under this Section 3 and the Company may seek injunctive relief against Executive as specified in Section 8(d) hereof.

(h) Release of Claims . Receipt of the severance payments and benefits specified in this Section 3 shall be contingent on Executive’s execution of the Release, and the lapse of any statutory period for revocation, and such Release becoming effective in accordance with its terms within fifty-two days following Executive’s termination date. Any severance payment to which Executive otherwise would have been entitled during such fifty-two day period shall be paid by the Company in cash and in full arrears on the fifty-third day following Executive’s employment termination date or such later date as is required to avoid the imposition of additional taxes under Section 409A (“Section 409A”) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”).

4. Code Section 280G Best Results . If any payment or benefit Executive would receive pursuant to this Plan or otherwise, including accelerated vesting of any equity compensation (“Payment”) would (i) constitute a “parachute payment” within the meaning of Section 280G of the Code, and (ii) but for this sentence, be subject to the excise tax imposed by Section 4999 of the Code (the “Excise Tax”), then such Payment shall be reduced to the Reduced Amount. The “Reduced Amount” shall be either (x) the largest portion of the Payment that would result in no portion of the Payment being subject to the Excise Tax or (y) the largest portion, up to and including the total, of the Payment, whichever amount, after taking into account all applicable federal, state and local employment taxes, income taxes, and the Excise Tax (all computed at the highest applicable marginal rate), results in Executive’s receipt, on an after-tax basis, of the greater amount of the Payment notwithstanding that all or some portion of the Payment may be subject to the Excise Tax. If a reduction in payments or benefits constituting “parachute payments” is necessary so that the Payment equals the Reduced Amount, reduction shall occur in the following order: (A) cash payments shall be reduced first and in reverse chronological order such that the cash payment owed on the latest date following the occurrence of the event triggering such excise tax will be the first cash payment to be reduced; (B) accelerated vesting of stock awards shall be cancelled/reduced next and in the reverse order of the date of grant for such stock awards (i.e., the vesting of the most recently granted stock awards will be reduced first), with full-value awards reversed before any stock option or stock appreciation rights are reduced; and (C) employee benefits shall be reduced last and in reverse chronological order such that the benefit owed on the latest date following the occurrence of the event triggering such excise tax will be the first benefit to be reduced.

The Company shall appoint a nationally recognized accounting firm to make the determinations required hereunder and perform the foregoing calculations. The Company shall bear all expenses with respect to the determinations by such accounting firm required to be made hereunder.

The accounting firm engaged to make the determinations hereunder shall provide its calculations, together with detailed supporting documentation, to the Company and Executive within fifteen (15) calendar days after the date on which right to a Payment is triggered (if requested at that time by the Company or Executive) or such other time as requested by the Company or Executive. Any good faith determinations of the accounting firm made hereunder shall be final, binding and conclusive upon the Company and Executive.

 

-5-


5. Definition of Terms . The following terms referred to in this Plan shall have the following meanings:

(a) Cause . “Cause” means (i) an act of dishonesty made by Executive in connection with Executive’s responsibilities as an employee, (ii) Executive’s conviction of or plea of nolo contendere to, a felony or any crime involving fraud, embezzlement or any other act of moral turpitude, (iii) Executive’s gross misconduct, (iv) Executive’s unauthorized use or disclosure of any proprietary information or trade secrets of the Company or any other party to whom Executive owes an obligation of nondisclosure as a result of Executive’s relationship with the Company; (v) Executive’s willful breach of any obligations under any written agreement or covenant with the Company or breach of the Company’s Corporate Code of Conduct; or (vi) Executive’s continued failure to perform Executive’s employment duties after Executive has received a written demand of performance from the Chief Executive Officer which specifically sets forth the factual basis for the Chief Executive Officer’s belief that Executive has not substantially performed Executive’s duties and has failed to cure such non-performance to the Chief Executive Officer’s satisfaction within 30 days after receiving such notice.

(b) Change of Control . “Change of Control” means the occurrence of any of the following events:

(i) A change in the ownership of the Company which occurs on the date that any one person, or more than one person acting as a group, (“ Person ”) acquires ownership of the stock of the Company that, together with the stock held by such Person, constitutes more than 50% of the total voting power of the stock of the Company; provided, however, that for purposes of this subsection (i), the acquisition of additional stock by any one Person, who is considered to own more than 50% of the total voting power of the stock of the Company will not be considered a Change of Control; or

(ii) A change in the effective control of the Company which occurs on the date that a majority of members of the Board is replaced during any twelve (12) month period by Directors whose appointment or election is not endorsed by a majority of the members of the Board prior to the date of the appointment or election. For purposes of this clause (ii), if any Person is considered to effectively control the Company, the acquisition of additional control of the Company by the same Person will not be considered a Change of Control; or

(iii) A change in the ownership of a substantial portion of the Company’s assets which occurs on the date that any Person acquires (or has acquired during the twelve (12) month period ending on the date of the most recent acquisition by such person or persons) assets from the Company that have a total gross fair market value equal to or more than 50% of the total gross fair market value of all of the assets of the Company immediately prior to such acquisition or acquisitions; provided, however, that for purposes of this subsection (iii), the following will not constitute a change in the ownership of a substantial portion of the Company’s assets: (A) a transfer to an entity that is controlled by the Company’s stockholders immediately after the transfer, or (B) a transfer of assets by the Company to: (1) a stockholder of the

 

-6-


Company (immediately before the asset transfer) in exchange for or with respect to the Company’s stock, (2) an entity, 50% or more of the total value or voting power of which is owned, directly or indirectly, by the Company, (3) a Person, that owns, directly or indirectly, 50% or more of the total value or voting power of all the outstanding stock of the Company, or (4) an entity, at least 50% of the total value or voting power of which is owned, directly or indirectly, by a Person. For purposes of this subsection (iii), gross fair market value means the value of the assets of the Company, or the value of the assets being disposed of, determined without regard to any liabilities associated with such assets.

For purposes of this Section 5(b), persons will be considered to be acting as a group if they are owners of a corporation that enters into a merger, consolidation, purchase or acquisition of stock, or similar business transaction with the Company.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, a transaction shall not be deemed a Change of Control unless the transaction qualifies as a change in the ownership of the Company, change in the effective control of the Company or a change in the ownership of a substantial portion of the Company’s assets, each within the meaning of Section 409A.

(c) Disability . “Disability” means Executive (i) is unable to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment which can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than twelve (12) months, or (ii) is, by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment which can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than twelve (12) months, receiving income replacement benefits for a period of not less than three (3) months under an accident and health plan covering Company employees.

(d) Good Reason . “Good Reason” means, without Executive’s consent, (i) a material reduction in Executive’s annual base salary (except pursuant to a reduction generally applicable to senior executives of the Company), (ii) a material diminution of Executive’s authority, duties or responsibilities, (iii) if Executive reported directly to the Chief Executive Officer of the Company immediately prior to the Change of Control, Executive ceasing to report directly to the Chief Executive Officer of the Company or to the Chief Executive Officer of the entity holding all or substantially all of the Company’s assets following a Change of Control, or (iv) relocation of Executive to a location more than 50 miles from the principal place of employment for Executive immediately prior to the Change of Control. In addition, upon any such voluntary termination for Good Reason, Executive must provide written notice to the Company of the existence of the one or more of the above conditions within 90 days of its initial existence, and the Company must be provided with at least 30 days from the receipt of the notice to remedy the condition.

6. Assignment .

(a) Executive . The rights and obligations of Executive under the Plan are personal to that Executive and without the prior written consent of the Company, no such right shall be assignable by Executive otherwise than by will or the laws of descent and distribution. The rights of Executive under this Plan shall inure to the benefit of and be enforceable by the heirs, executors and legal representatives of Executive upon Executive’s death. None of the

 

-7-


rights of Executive to receive any form of compensation payable pursuant to this Plan may be assigned or transferred except by will of the laws of descent and distribution. Any other attempted assignment, transfer, conveyance or other disposition of Executive’s right to compensation or other benefits will be null and void.

(b) Successor Company . Until the Plan terminates in accordance with Section 1 above, the rights and obligations of the Company under the Plan shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon the Company and its successors and assigns. Any such successor of the Company will be deemed substituted for the Company under the terms of this Plan for all purposes. For this purpose, “successor” means any person, firm, corporation or other business entity which at any time, whether by purchase, merger or other, directly or indirectly acquires all or substantially all of the assets or business of the Company. The Company will require any successor to assume expressly and agree to administer this Plan in the same manner and to the same extent that the Company would be required to perform it if no such succession had taken place.

7. Notices . All claims, notices, requests, demands and other communications called for under this Plan shall be in writing and shall be deemed given (i) on the date of delivery if delivered personally, (ii) one (1) day after being sent by a well established commercial overnight service, or (iii) four (4) days after being mailed by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, prepaid and addressed to the parties or their successor at the following addresses, or at such other addresses as the parties may later designate in writing:

If to the Administrator:

Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors

Williams-Sonoma, Inc.

3250 Van Ness Avenue

San Francisco, CA 94109

Attn: c/o General Counsel

If to Executive:

At the last residential address known to the Company

 

-8-


8. Administration and Claims .

(a) Administration . The “Administrator” (within the meaning of section 3(16)(A) of ERISA) shall be the Committee. The Administrator shall have the exclusive discretion and authority to establish rules, forms, and procedures for the administration of the Plan, and discretionary authority to construe and interpret the Plan and to decide any and all questions of fact, interpretation, definition, computation or administration arising in connection with the operation of the Plan. Decisions made by the Administrator prior to the occurrence of a Change of Control shall not be subject to review unless they are found to be unreasonable or not to have been made in good faith. For decisions made by the Administrator on or after the occurrence of a Change of Control that affect benefits payable under the Plan, the Administrator’s decisions shall be subject to review. As used in this Section 8(a), “review” shall mean review as provided by applicable law. The Administrator may appoint one or more individuals and delegate such of its powers and duties as it deems desirable to any such individual(s), in which case every reference herein made to the Administrator shall be deemed to mean or include the appointed individual(s) as to matters within their jurisdiction.

(b) Claims Procedure . Any Executive who believes he or she is entitled to any payment under the Plan may submit a claim in writing to the Administrator in accordance with Section 7 above identifying the matter in dispute and the proposed remedy. If the claim is denied (in full or in part), the claimant will be provided a written notice explaining the specific reasons for the denial and referring to the provisions of the Plan on which the denial is based. The notice will also describe any additional information needed to support the claim and the Plan’s procedures for appealing the denial. The denial notice will be provided within ninety (90) days after the claim is received. If special circumstances require an extension of time (up to ninety (90) days), written notice of the extension will be given within the initial ninety (90) day period. This notice of extension will indicate the special circumstances requiring the extension of time and the date by which the Administrator expects to render its decision on the claim.

(c) Appeal Procedure . If the claimant’s claim is denied, the claimant (or his or her authorized representative) may apply in writing to the Administrator for a review of the decision denying the claim. Review must be requested within sixty (60) days following the date the claimant received the written notice of their claim denial or else the claimant loses the right to review. The claimant (or representative) then has the right to review and obtain copies of all documents and other information relevant to the claim, upon request and at no charge, and to submit issues and comments in writing. The Administrator will provide written notice of his or her decision on review within sixty (60) days after it receives a review request. If additional time (up to sixty (60) days) is needed to review the request, the claimant (or representative) will be given written notice of the reason for the delay. This notice of extension will indicate the special circumstances requiring the extension of time and the date by which the Administrator expects to render its decision. If the claim is denied (in full or in part), the claimant will be provided a written notice explaining the specific reasons for the denial and referring to the provisions of the Plan on which the denial is based. The notice shall also include a statement that the claimant will be provided, upon request and free of charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents and other information relevant to the claim and a statement regarding the claimant’s right to bring an action under Section 502(a) of ERISA.

 

-9-


(d) Availability of Injunctive Relief . Notwithstanding the other provisions of this Section 8 or any other provision of the Plan to the contrary, the Company and Executive shall have the right to seek judicial relief in the form of injunctive and/or other equitable relief under the California Arbitration Act, Code of Civil Procedure section 1281.8(b), including but not limited to relief for threatened or actual misappropriation of trade secrets, violation of this Plan, the Corporate Code of Conduct or any other agreement regarding trade secrets, confidential information, non-competition, nonsolicitation, non-disparagement or Labor Code §2870. In the event either the Company or Executive seeks injunctive relief, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover reasonable costs and attorneys’ fees.

(e) Administrative Relief . This Plan does not prohibit Executive from pursuing an administrative claim with a local, state or federal administrative body such as the Department of Fair Employment and Housing, the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission or the workers’ compensation board.

9. Section 409A .

(a) Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Plan, no Deferred Compensation Separation Benefits (as defined below) payable under this Plan will be considered due or payable until and unless Executive has a “separation from service” within the meaning of Section 409A. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Plan, if Executive is a “specified employee” within the meaning of Section 409A at the time of Executive’s “separation from service” other than due to Executive’s death, then any severance benefits payable pursuant to this Plan and any other severance payments or separation benefits, that in each case when considered together may be considered deferred compensation under Section 409A (together, the “Deferred Compensation Separation Benefits”) and are otherwise due to Executive on or within the six (6) month period following Executive’s “separation from service” will accrue during such six (6) month period and will instead become payable in a lump sum payment on the date six (6) months and one (1) day following the date of Executive’s “separation from service.” All subsequent Deferred Compensation Separation Benefits, if any, will be payable in accordance with the payment schedule applicable to each payment or benefit. Each payment and benefit payable under this Plan is intended to constitute separate payments for purposes of Section 1.409A-2(b)(2) of the Treasury Regulations.

(b) Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Plan, if Executive dies following Executive’s “separation from service” but prior to the six (6) month anniversary of the date of Executive’s “separation from service,” then any Deferred Compensation Separation Benefits delayed in accordance with this Section will be payable in a lump sum as soon as administratively practicable after the date of Executive’s death, but not later than ninety (90) days after the date of Executive’s death, and all other Deferred Compensation Separation Benefits will be payable in accordance with the payment schedule applicable to each payment or benefit.

(c) It is the intent of this Plan to comply with the requirements of Section 409A so that none of the severance payments and benefits to be provided hereunder will be subject to the additional tax imposed under Section 409A, and any ambiguities herein will be interpreted to so comply. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Plan, including but not

 

-10-


limited to Section 1(c), the Committee reserves the right to amend the Plan as it deems necessary or advisable, in its sole discretion and without the consent of Executive, to comply with Section 409A or to otherwise avoid income recognition under Section 409A prior to the actual payment of any severance benefits or imposition of any additional tax.

10. Miscellaneous Provisions .

(a) Waiver . No provision of this Plan shall be modified, waived or discharged unless the modification, waiver or discharge is agreed to in writing and signed by Executive and by an authorized officer of the Company (other than Executive). No waiver by either party of any breach of, or of compliance with, any condition or provision of this Plan by the other party shall be considered a waiver of any other condition or provision or of the same condition or provision at another time.

(b) Headings . All captions and section headings used in this Plan are for convenient reference only and will not limit or otherwise affect the meaning hereof.

(c) Inconsistency with Plan . This Plan supersedes in its entirety all prior representations, understandings, undertakings or agreements (whether oral or written and whether expressed or implied) of Executive and the Company with respect to the subject matter hereof, including any prior management retention agreements entered into between Executive and the Company. In the event of any inconsistency between this Plan and any other plan, program, practice or agreement in which Executive participates or is a party, this Plan shall control unless a written agreement is executed by both Executive and an authorized officer of the Company (other than Executive) specifically stating that the terms of such agreement shall prevail over the Plan.

(d) Choice of Law . This Plan will be governed by the laws of the State of California (with the exception of its conflict of laws provisions).

(e) Severability . The invalidity or unenforceability of any provision or provisions of this Plan shall not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision hereof, which shall remain in full force and effect.

11. Statement of ERISA Rights . Executives under the Plan have certain rights and protections under ERISA:

(a) Executive may examine (without charge) all Plan documents, including any amendments and copies of all documents filed with the U.S. Department of Labor, such as the Plan’s annual report (IRS Form 5500). These documents are available for Executive’s review in the Company’s Human Resources Department.

(b) Executive may obtain copies of all Plan documents and other Plan information upon written request to the Plan Administrator. A reasonable charge may be made for such copies.

In addition to creating rights for Executives, ERISA imposes duties upon the people who are responsible for the operation of the Plan. The people who operate the Plan (called

 

-11-


“fiduciaries”) have a duty to do so prudently and in the interests of covered Executives. No one, including the Company or any other person, may fire Executives or otherwise discriminate against Executives in any way to prevent Executives from obtaining a benefit under the Plan or exercising Executive’s rights under ERISA. If Executive’s claim for a severance benefit is denied, in whole or in part, Executive must receive a written explanation of the reason for the denial. Executive has the right to have the denial of claim reviewed. (The claim review procedure is explained in Section 8 above.)

Under ERISA, there are steps Executives can take to enforce the above rights. For instance, if Executive requests materials and does not receive them within thirty (30) days, Executive may file suit in a federal court. In such a case, the court may require the Plan Administrator to provide the materials and to pay Executive up to $110 a day until receipt of the materials, unless the materials were not sent because of reasons beyond the control of the Plan Administrator. If Executive has a claim which is denied or ignored, in whole or in part, Executive may file suit in a state or federal court. If it should happen that Executive is discriminated against for asserting his or her rights, Executive may seek assistance from the U.S. Department of Labor, or may file suit in a federal court.

In any case, the court will decide who will pay court costs and legal fees. If Executive is successful, the court may order the person sued to pay these costs and fees. If Executive loses, the court may order Executive to pay these costs and fees, for example, if it finds that the claim is frivolous.

If Executive has any questions regarding the Plan, they should contact the Administrator. If Executive has any questions about this statement or about their rights under ERISA, Executive may contact the nearest area office of the Employee Benefits Security Administration (formerly the Pension and Welfare Benefits Administration), U.S. Department of Labor, listed in the telephone directory, or the Division of Technical Assistance and Inquiries, Employee Benefits Security Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20210. Executive may also obtain certain publications about their rights and responsibilities under ERISA by calling the publications hotline of the Employee Benefits Security Administration.

12. Additional Information .

 

Plan Name:

   Williams-Sonoma, Inc. 2012 Management Retention

Plan Sponsor:

  

Williams-Sonoma, Inc.

3250 Van Ness Avenue

San Francisco, California 94109

Identification Numbers:

   EIN: 94-2203880

Plan Year:

   Company’s Fiscal Year

Plan Administrator:

  

Williams-Sonoma, Inc.

Attention: Compensation Committee of the Board

 

-12-


  

c/o General Counsel

Williams-Sonoma, Inc.

3250 Van Ness Avenue

San Francisco, California 94109

415-421-7900

Agent for Service of Legal

Process

  

CSC—Lawyers Incorporating Service

(a.k.a., Corporation Service Company)

2710 Gateway Oaks Drive, Suite 150N

Sacramento, CA 95833

Type of Plan:

   Severance Plan/Employee Welfare Benefit Plan

Plan Costs:

   The cost of the Plan is paid by the Employer

END OF PLAN

 

-13-


EXHIBIT A

WILLIAMS-SONOMA, INC.

RELEASE OF CLAIMS

This Release of Claims (“Agreement”) is made by and between Williams-Sonoma, Inc. (the “Company”) and                      (“Executive”).

WHEREAS, Executive has agreed to enter into a release of claims in favor of the Company upon certain events specified in the 2012 EVP Level Management Retention Plan (the “Management Retention Plan”).

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual promises made in this Agreement, the parties hereby agree as follows:

1. Termination . Executive’s employment from the Company terminated on                      (the “Termination Date”).

2. Confidential Information . Executive shall continue to maintain the confidentiality of all confidential and proprietary information of the Company and shall continue to comply with the terms and conditions of the Company’s Code of Corporate Conduct as in effect on the date of Executive’s termination of employment. Executive shall return all the Company property and confidential and proprietary information in Executive’s possession to the Company on the Effective Date of this Agreement. In the event Executive breaches the terms of the confidential information provisions of the Company’s Corporate Code of Conduct as in effect on such date, the Company’s obligations under Section 3 of the Management Retention Plan shall automatically terminate, without any notice to Executive.

3. Non-Solicitation . Executive shall continue to comply with the non-solicitation provisions of the Company’s Corporate Code of Conduct as in effect on the date of Executive’s termination of employment. In the event Executive breaches the terms of the non-solicitation provisions of the Company’s Corporate Code of Conduct as in effect on such date, the Company’s obligations under this Section 3 of the Management Retention Plan shall automatically terminate, without any notice to Executive.

4. Non-Competition . If at any time during the period commencing on Executive’s employment termination date and ending twelve (12) months later, Executive accepts other employment or a professional relationship with a competitor of the Company (defined as either (i) another company primarily engaged in retail sales of products for the home or (ii) any retailer with retail products for the home sales in excess of one hundred million dollars ($100,000,000) annually), or if Executive breaches Executive’s remaining obligations to the Company (e.g., the duty to protect confidential information and intellectual property and the duties not to solicit under the Company’s Corporate Code of Conduct), then the Company’s obligations under Section 3 of the Management Retention Plan will cease such that Executive will not be entitled

 

-14-


to any further payments or benefits under Section 3 of the Management Retention Plan and the Company may seek injunctive relief against Executive as specified in Section 8(d) of the Management Retention Plan.

5. Non-Disparagement . For a period of twenty-four (24) months commencing on the date upon which Executive’s employment terminates, (i) Executive hereby agrees not to make any statements that disparage the Company, its products, services, officers, employees, members of its Board, advisers or other business contacts, and (ii) the Company hereby agrees that members of its Board and the Company’s officers holding a title of Executive Vice President or above shall not make any statements that disparage Executive. Executive acknowledges and agrees that upon Executive breaching this non-disparagement provision on or after the date upon which Executive’s employment terminates then the Company’s obligations under Section 3 of the Management Retention Plan will cease such that Executive will not be entitled to any further payments or benefits under Section 3 of the Management Retention Plan and the Company may seek injunctive relief against Executive as specified in Section 8(d) of the Management Retention Plan.

6. Payment of Salary . Executive acknowledges and represents that the Company has paid all salary, wages, bonuses, accrued vacation, commissions and any and all other benefits due to Executive.

7. Release of Claims . Executive agrees that the foregoing consideration represents settlement in full of all outstanding obligations owed to Executive by the Company. Executive, on behalf of Executive, and Executive’s respective heirs, family members, executors and assigns, hereby fully and forever releases the Company and its past, present and future officers, agents, directors, employees, investors, shareholders, administrators, affiliates, divisions, subsidiaries, parents, predecessor and successor corporations, and assigns, from, and agrees not to sue or otherwise institute or cause to be instituted any legal or administrative proceedings concerning any claim, duty, obligation or cause of action relating to any matters of any kind, whether presently known or unknown, suspected or unsuspected, that Executive may possess arising from any omissions, acts or facts that have occurred up until and including the Effective Date of this Agreement including, without limitation,

(a) any and all claims relating to or arising from Executive’s employment relationship with the Company and the termination of that relationship;

(b) any and all claims relating to, or arising from, Executive’s right to purchase, or actual purchase of shares of stock of the Company, including, without limitation, any claims for fraud, misrepresentation, breach of fiduciary duty, breach of duty under applicable state corporate law, and securities fraud under any state or federal law;

(c) any and all claims for wrongful discharge of employment; termination in violation of public policy; discrimination; breach of contract, both express and implied; breach of a covenant of good faith and fair dealing, both express and implied; promissory estoppel; negligent or intentional infliction of emotional distress; negligent or intentional misrepresentation; negligent or intentional interference with contract or prospective economic advantage; unfair business practices; defamation; libel; slander; negligence; personal injury; assault; battery; invasion of privacy; false imprisonment; and conversion;

 

-15-


(d) any and all claims for violation of any federal, state or municipal statute, including, but not limited to, Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, the Civil Rights Act of 1991, the Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967, the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, the Fair Labor Standards Act, the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, The Worker Adjustment and Retraining Notification Act, the California Fair Employment and Housing Act, and Labor Code section 201, et seq . and section 970, et seq . and all amendments to each such Act as well as the regulations issued under each such Act;

(e) any and all claims for violation of the federal, or any state, constitution;

(f) any and all claims arising out of any other laws and regulations relating to employment or employment discrimination; and

(g) any and all claims for attorneys’ fees and costs.

Executive agrees that the release set forth in this section shall be and remain in effect in all respects as a complete general release as to the matters released. This release does not extend to any severance obligations due Executive under the Management Retention Plan. Nothing in this Agreement waives Executive’s rights to indemnification or any payments under any fiduciary insurance policy, if any, provided by any act or agreement of the Company, state or federal law or policy of insurance.

8. Acknowledgment of Waiver of Claims under ADEA . Executive acknowledges that Executive is waiving and releasing any rights Executive may have under the Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967 (“ADEA”) and that this waiver and release is knowing and voluntary. Executive and the Company agree that this waiver and release does not apply to any rights or claims that may arise under the ADEA after the Effective Date of this Agreement. Executive acknowledges that the consideration given for this waiver and release Agreement is in addition to anything of value to which Executive was already entitled. Executive further acknowledges that Executive has been advised by this writing that (a) Executive should consult with an attorney prior to executing this Agreement; (b) Executive has at least twenty-one (21) days within which to consider this Agreement; (c) Executive has seven (7) days following the execution of this Agreement by the parties to revoke the Agreement; (d) this Agreement shall not be effective until the revocation period has expired; and (e) nothing in this Agreement prevents or precludes Executive from challenging or seeking a determination in good faith of the validity of this waiver under the ADEA, nor does it impose any condition precedent, penalties or costs for doing so, unless specifically authorized by federal law. Any revocation should be in writing and delivered to the Vice-President of Human Resources at the Company by close of business on the seventh day from the date that Executive signs this Agreement.

9. Civil Code Section 1542 . Executive represents that Executive is not aware of any claims against the Company other than the claims that are released by this Agreement.

 

-16-


Executive acknowledges that Executive has been advised by legal counsel and is familiar with the provisions of California Civil Code 1542, below, which provides as follows:

A GENERAL RELEASE DOES NOT EXTEND TO CLAIMS WHICH THE CREDITOR DOES NOT KNOW OR SUSPECT TO EXIST IN HIS OR HER FAVOR AT THE TIME OF EXECUTING THE RELEASE, WHICH IF KNOWN BY HIM OR HER MUST HAVE MATERIALLY AFFECTED HIS OR HER SETTLEMENT WITH THE DEBTOR.

Executive, being aware of said code section, agrees to expressly waive any rights Executive may have under such code section, as well as under any statute or common law principles of similar effect.

10. No Pending or Future Lawsuits . Executive represents that Executive has no lawsuits, claims, or actions pending in Executive’s name, or on behalf of any other person or entity, against the Company or any other person or entity referred to in this Agreement. Executive also represents that Executive does not intend to bring any claims on Executive’s own behalf or on behalf of any other person or entity against the Company or any other person or entity referred to herein.

11. Application for Employment . Executive understands and agrees that, as a condition of this Agreement, Executive shall not be entitled to any employment with the Company, its subsidiaries, or any successor, and Executive hereby waives any right, or alleged right, of employment or re-employment with the Company.

12. No Cooperation . Executive agrees that Executive will not counsel or assist any attorneys or their clients in the presentation or prosecution of any disputes, differences, grievances, claims, charges, or complaints by any third party against the Company and/or any officer, director, employee, agent, representative, shareholder or attorney of the Company, unless under a subpoena or other court order to do so.

13. No Admission of Liability . Executive understands and acknowledges that this Agreement constitutes a compromise and settlement of disputed claims. No action taken by the Company, either previously or in connection with this Agreement shall be deemed or construed to be (a) an admission of the truth or falsity of any claims heretofore made or (b) an acknowledgment or admission by the Company of any fault or liability whatsoever to Executive or to any third party.

14. Costs . The parties shall each bear their own costs, expert fees, attorneys’ fees and other fees incurred in connection with this Agreement.

15. Authority . Executive represents and warrants that Executive has the capacity to act on Executive’s own behalf and on behalf of all who might claim through Executive to bind them to the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

16. No Representations . Executive represents that Executive has had the opportunity to consult with an attorney, and has carefully read and understands the scope and effect of the provisions of this Agreement. Neither party has relied upon any representations or statements made by the other party which are not specifically set forth in this Agreement.

 

-17-


17. Severability . In the event that any provision hereof becomes or is declared by a court of competent jurisdiction to be illegal, unenforceable or void, this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect without said provision.

18. Entire Agreement . This Agreement, along with the Management Retention Plan, the Code of Corporate Conduct and Executive’s written equity compensation agreements with the Company, represents the entire agreement and understanding between the Company and Executive concerning Executive’s separation from the Company.

19. No Oral Modification . This Agreement may only be amended in writing signed by Executive and the Chairman of the Board of Directors of the Company.

20. Governing Law . This Agreement shall be governed by the internal substantive laws, but not the choice of law rules, of the State of California.

21. Effective Date . This Agreement is effective eight (8) days after it has been signed by both parties.

22. Counterparts . This Agreement may be executed in counterparts, and each counterpart shall have the same force and effect as an original and shall constitute an effective, binding agreement on the part of each of the undersigned.

23. Voluntary Execution of Agreement . This Agreement is executed voluntarily and without any duress or undue influence on the part or behalf of the parties to this Agreement, with the full intent of releasing all claims. The parties acknowledge that:

(a) They have read this Agreement;

(b) They have read the Management Retention Plan;

(c) They have been represented in the preparation, negotiation, and execution of this Agreement by legal counsel of their own choice or that they have voluntarily declined to seek such counsel;

(d) They understand the terms and consequences of this Agreement and of the releases it contains;

(e) They are fully aware of the legal and binding effect of this Agreement and the Management Retention Plan.

 

-18-


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement on the respective dates set forth below.

 

   

Williams-Sonoma, Inc.

Dated:                     , 20    

    By                                                                                                   
   

 

                     , an individual

 

Dated:          , 20    

   

 

                                                                                                                          

 

-19-

Exhibit 21.1

SUBSIDIARIES

The following is a list of subsidiaries of Williams-Sonoma, Inc., omitting subsidiaries which, considered in the aggregate as a single subsidiary, would not constitute a significant subsidiary as of January 31, 2016:

 

Subsidiary Name    Jurisdiction/Date of Incorporation

Williams-Sonoma Stores, Inc.

   California, October 11, 1984

Williams-Sonoma DTC, Inc.

   California, October 26, 2000

Williams-Sonoma Singapore Pte. Ltd.

   Singapore, April 11, 2008

Exhibit 23.1

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

We consent to the incorporation by reference in Registration Statements No. 33-60787, No. 333-39811, No. 333-48750, No. 333-58026, No. 333-134897, No. 333-118351, No. 333-169318, No. 333-176410 and No. 333-207362 each on Form S-8 of our report dated March 31, 2016, relating to the consolidated financial statements of Williams-Sonoma, Inc. and its subsidiaries (which report expresses an unqualified opinion and includes an explanatory paragraph relating to the adoption of ASU 2015-17, “Balance Sheet Classifications of Deferred Taxes”), and the effectiveness of Williams-Sonoma, Inc.’s internal control over financial reporting, appearing in this Annual Report on Form 10-K of Williams-Sonoma, Inc. for the fiscal year ended January 31, 2016.

/s/ DELOITTE & TOUCHE LLP

San Francisco, California

March 31, 2016

Exhibit 31.1

CERTIFICATION

I, Laura J. Alber, certify that:

 

  1. I have reviewed this Annual Report on Form 10-K of Williams-Sonoma, Inc.;

 

  2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

  3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

  4. The registrant’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:

 

  a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  d) Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

  5. The registrant’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

  b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.

Date: March 31, 2016

 

By:  

/ S /    L AURA J. A LBER

  Laura J. Alber
  Chief Executive Officer

Exhibit 31.2

CERTIFICATION

I, Julie P. Whalen, certify that:

 

  1. I have reviewed this Annual Report on Form 10-K of Williams-Sonoma, Inc.;

 

  2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

  3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

  4. The registrant’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:

 

  a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  d) Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

  5. The registrant’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

  b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.

Date: March 31, 2016

 

By:  

/ S /    J ULIE P. W HALEN

 

Julie P. Whalen

Chief Financial Officer

Exhibit 32.1

CERTIFICATION BY CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER

PURSUANT TO 18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350,

AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO

SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

In connection with the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the period ended January 31, 2016 of Williams-Sonoma, Inc. (the “Company”) as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Report”), I, Laura J. Alber, Chief Executive Officer of the Company, certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:

 

1. The Report fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended; and

 

2. The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company as of and for the periods presented in the Report.

Date: March 31, 2016

 

By:  

/ S /    L AURA J. A LBER

  Laura J. Alber
  Chief Executive Officer

Exhibit 32.2

CERTIFICATION BY CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER

PURSUANT TO 18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350,

AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO

SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

In connection with the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the period ended January 31, 2016 of Williams-Sonoma, Inc. (the

“Company”) as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Report”), I, Julie P. Whalen, Chief Financial Officer of the Company, certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:

 

1. The Report fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended; and

 

2. The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company as of and for the periods presented in the Report.

 

By:  

/ S /    J ULIE P. W HALEN

  Julie P. Whalen
  Chief Financial Officer

Date: March 31, 2016